This manual documents how to run, install and maintain the GNU Pascal Compiler (GPC), as well as its new features and incompatibilities, and how to report bugs. It corresponds to GPC 20060325 (GCC 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x).
Introduction:
Installation:
Using GNU Pascal:
Development:
Licenses:
Appendix:
the free 32/64-bit Pascal compiler of the GNU Compiler Collection (GNU CC or GCC). It combines a Pascal front-end with the proven GCC back-end for code generation and optimization. Other compilers in the collection currently include compilers for the Ada, C, C++, Objective C, Chill, FORTRAN, and Java languages. Unlike utilities such as p2c, this is a true compiler, not just a converter.
This version of GPC corresponds to GCC version 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x.
The purpose of the GNU Pascal project is to produce a Pascal compiler (called GNU Pascal or GPC) which
Pascal was originally designed for teaching. GNU Pascal provides a smooth way to proceed to challenging programming tasks without learning a completely different language.
The current release implements Standard Pascal (ISO 7185, levels 0 and 1), most of Extended Pascal (ISO 10206, aiming for full compliance), is highly compatible to Borland Pascal (version 7.0), has some features for compatibility to other compilers (such as VAX Pascal, Sun Pascal, Mac Pascal, Borland Delphi and Pascal-SC).
It provides a lot of useful GNU extensions not found in other Pascal compilers, e.g. to ease the interfacing with C and other languages in a portable way, and to work with files, directories, dates and more, mostly independent of the underlying operating system.
Included units provide support for regular expressions, arithmetic with integer, rational and real numbers of unlimited size, internationalization, inter-process communication, message digests and more. Demo programs show the usage of these units and of many compiler features.
This manual contains
If you are familiar with Standard Pascal (ISO 7185) programming, you can probably just go ahead and try to compile your programs. Also, most of the ISO Extended Pascal Standard (ISO 10206) is implemented into GNU Pascal. The Extended Pascal features still missing from GPC are set types with variable bounds and discriminated ordinal schema as schema discriminants.
If you are a Borland Pascal programmer, you should probably start reading the QuickStart guide from BP to GNU Pascal, see Borland Pascal. If you are curious about the new features GPC offers, you can get an idea in the overview of GPC highlights (see Highlights), and read in more detail about them in the Programmer's Guide to GPC (see Programming) and in the alphabetical GPC Language Reference (see Reference).
And, please, think about how you can contribute to the GNU Pascal project, too. Please support our work by contributing yours in form of example programs, bug reports, documentation, or even actual improvements of the compiler.
All trademarks used in this manual are properties of their respective owners.
The GNU Pascal Compiler (GPC) is, as the name says, the Pascal compiler of the GNU family (http://www.gnu.org/software/gcc/). This means:
and more (note: the runtime system only supports ASCII based systems; that includes almost all of today's systems, but a few IBM machines still use EBCDIC; on those, the compiler might run, but the runtime support might need major changes),
The compiler supports the following language standards and quasi-standards:
foo := Succ (bar, 5);).
(PNG, 21 kB) |
The demo programs mentioned above are available both on the WWW and in GPC source and binary distributions.
Co-workers welcome!
Able, committed programmers are always welcome in the GNU Pascal team. If you want to be independent of companies that you have to pay in order to get a compiler with more restrictive licensing conditions that only runs on one operating system, be invited to join the development team, Acknowledgments.
GPC's new or changed features since the last (non alpha/beta) GPC release are listed here. Items without further description refer to new routines, variables or options.
Features implemented for compatibility to other compilers are marked with, e.g., `(B)' for BP compatibility.
A few old and obsolete features have been dropped or replaced by cleaner, more flexible or otherwise more useful ones. This might lead to minor problems with old code, but we suppose they're rare and easy to overcome. Backward-incompatible changes are marked with `(@)'.
Have fun,
The GNU Pascal Development Team
This is the Frequently Asked Questions List (FAQ) for GNU Pascal. If the FAQ and the documentation do not help you, you have detected a bug in it which should be reported, Mailing List. Please really do it, so we can improve the documentation.
The purpose of the GNU Pascal project is to produce a Pascal compiler (called GNU Pascal or GPC) which
Pascal was originally designed for teaching. GNU Pascal provides a smooth way to proceed to challenging programming tasks without learning a completely different language.
The current release implements Standard Pascal (ISO 7185, levels 0 and 1), most of Extended Pascal (ISO 10206, aiming for full compliance), is highly compatible to Borland Pascal (version 7.0), has some features for compatibility to other compilers (such as VAX Pascal, Sun Pascal, Mac Pascal, Borland Delphi and Pascal-SC).
It provides a lot of useful GNU extensions not found in other Pascal compilers, e.g. to ease the interfacing with C and other languages in a portable way, and to work with files, directories, dates and more, mostly independent of the underlying operating system.
Included units provide support for regular expressions, arithmetic with integer, rational and real numbers of unlimited size, internationalization, inter-process communication, message digests and more. Demo programs show the usage of these units and of many compiler features.
The current version is 20060325.
Releases are available as a source archive and precompiled binaries for several common platforms from the GPC web site, http://www.gnu-pascal.de.
For details about new features, see the section `News' on the web site. On bugs fixed recently, see the `Done' section of the To-Do list (on the same web site).
GPC uses GCC as a back-end. It supports GCC version 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x. (The newest supported GCC version is usually preferable, unless it contains serious bugs in itself.)
There are no fixed time frames for new releases. Releases are made when enough interesting changes have been made and the compiler is somewhat stable.
GPC is not a drop-in replacement for Borland's Turbo Pascal (R). Almost all BP language features are supported. Notable exceptions are the string format (as discussed below), or the `Mem' and `Port' pseudo arrays, though replacement functions for the latter on IA32 platforms exist in the `Ports' unit.
Almost all of BP's run time library is supported in GPC, either by built-in compiler features or in units with the same names as their BP counterparts.
For details about the compatibility, the few remaining incompatibilities and some useful alternatives to BP features, see the `Borland Pascal' chapter in the GPC Manual. (see Borland Pascal)
GPC uses the GCC backend, so it should run on any system that is supported by GNU CC. This includes a large variety of Unix systems, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32. A full list of platforms supported by GCC can be found in the file INSTALL of the GCC distribution. Not all of these have actually been tested, but it is known to run on these platforms:
| ix86-gnu | (GNU Hurd)
|
| ix86-linux | (Linux 2.x, ELF)
|
| Linux/AMD64
| |
| i486-linuxaout
| |
| i486-linuxoldld
| |
| i386-freebsd1.2.0
| |
| AIX 4.2.1
| |
| AIX 4.3
| |
| DJGPP V2 | (Dos)
|
| EMX 0.9B | (OS/2, Dos)
|
| Cygwin32 beta20 and higher | (MS-Windows95/98, MS-Windows NT)
|
| mingw32 | (MS-Windows95/98, MS-Windows NT)
|
| MSYS | (MS-Windows)
|
| Mac OS/X 10.3
| |
| mips-sgi-irix5.3
| |
| mips-sgi-irix6.5
| |
| sun-sparc-sunos4.1.4
| |
| sparc-sun-solaris2.x
| |
| sun-sparc-solaris 2.5.1
| |
| sun-sparc-solaris 2.6
| |
| sun-sparc-solaris 7
| |
| sun-sparc-solaris 8
| |
| alpha-unknown-linux
| |
| alpha-dec-osf4.0b
| |
| s390-ibm-linux-gnu
|
OK people – send us your success stories, with canonical machine name!
You find the most up-to-date installation instructions in the GPC Manual or the file `INSTALL' in source distributions, or on the GPC web site. (see Installation)
The following sections describe things you might need or want to install besides GPC itself.
After installing GPC, please check the files in the directory /usr/local/doc/gpc:
| README | General Information about GPC
|
| FAQ | This FAQ :−)
|
| NEWS | Changes since the last release
|
| BUGS | How to report bugs, about the Test Suite
|
| AUTHORS | List of GPC authors
|
| COPYING | The GNU General Public License
|
| COPYING.LIB | The GNU Lesser General Public License
|
A complete Pascal compiler system should at least have:
For most people, the GNU binutils and GNU debugger (`gdb') are a good choice, although some may prefer to use vendor specific tools.
To debug your programs, (a) GNU Pascal must be able to generate executables with debug info for your platform, and (b) you must have a debugger which understands this.
gpc: -g not supported for this platform
then GPC is unable to generate debugging info. Usually, installing `gas' (part of GNU binutils) instead of your system's assembler can overcome this. When you configure the GCC used for GPC, specify `--with-gnu-as', and possibly `--with-gnu-ld' and/or `--with-stabs'. More information can be found in the INSTALL file in the GNU CC source directory.
The bottom line: if you can debug GCC compiled programs, you should be able to do this with GPC too.
The GNU debugger (`gdb') currently does not have a “Pascal” mode, so it is unable to display certain Pascal structures etc. When debugging, please note that the Initial Letter In Each Identifier Is In Upper Case And The Rest Are In Lower Case. If you want to display variable `foo' in the debugger, type `show Foo' or `display Foo' instead.
Although `gdb' is an excellent debugger, it's user interface is
not everybody's preference. If you like to debug under X11, please
refer to the comp.windows.x FAQ:
“Where can I get an X-based debugger?” at:
http://www.faqs.org/faqs/x-faq/part6/section-2.html
Some useful frontends include: XXGDB, tGDB and XWPE. See:
http://www.ee.ryerson.ca:8080/~elf/xapps/Q-IV.html
Very nice, but resource consuming is the Motif based DDD:
http://sol.ibr.cs.tu-bs.de/softech/ddd/
Furthermore, RHIDE (see IDE) contains built-in debugging suport, similar to the IDE of BP.
You will need certain additional libraries when you compile some of the units. These can be found in the directory http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
Currently, there are the following libraries:
Unix: You can compile terminal applications with ncurses and applications that run in an X11 window with PDCurses (though terminal applications can, of course, also run in an xterm under X11). ncurses is used by default. If you want to use PDCurses (a.k.a. XCurses), give the option `-DX11' when compiling CRT.
Dos with DJGPP and MS-Windows with mingw: Only PDCurses is available and will be used by default.
MS-Windows with Cygwin: PDCurses and ncurses are available. PDCurses is used by default. If you want to use ncurses, give the option `-DUSE_NCURSES' when compiling CRT.
Other systems: Please see the READMEs and installation
instructions of PDCurses and ncurses to find out which one(s)
can be built on your system. See the conditionals at the end of
crt.inc and crtc.h (and change them if necessary) on which
library is used by default.
The source code of the libraries is available in the main `libs' directory. Most libraries come with one or several patches which should be applied before compiling them.
Binaries for some platforms are available in the binary/platform subdirectories. If you compile the libraries for other platforms, be invited to make the binaries available to us for distribution on the web site.
There are also the following files:
Several people have contributed units for GPC. They are usually announced on the mailing list, Mailing List. Most of them can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/.
Users of Borland Pascal may wonder if there's a replacement for the IDE (Integrated Development Environment). Here's a few suggestions:
This chapter discusses some potential problems with GNU Pascal on MS-DOS, using DJGPP.
The following paragraph is from the site http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/:
DJGPP is a complete 32-bit C/C++ development system for Intel 80386 (and higher) PCs running DOS. It includes ports of many GNU development utilities. The development tools require a 80386 or newer computer to run, as do the programs they produce. In most cases, the programs it produces can be sold commercially without license or royalties.
GPC/DJGPP is a DJGPP V2 application, and most of the DJGPP documentation applies for GPC too. A great source of information is the DJGPP FAQ: http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/v2faq/230b.zip
Another place to look for DJGPP documentation is the DJGPP Knowledge Base, at this URL: http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/doc/kb/
As discussed in Components, other than GPC itself, you need an assembler, linker and friends, a C library and possibly a debugger. The site http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/ recommended the following files and they will help you find a mirror:
| v2/djdev203.zip | (C library)
|
| v2gnu/bnu2951b.zip | (assembler, ...)
|
| v2gnu/gcc2952b.zip | (gcc)
|
| v2gnu/gdb418b.zip | (debugger)
|
| v2gnu/mak379b.zip | (make)
|
| v2gnu/txi40b.zip | (texi)
|
This list is about 10 MB not counting GPC. You can use a binary version of GPC from the web site.
If you don't have DJGPP installed on your harddisk, create a directory for GNU Pascal (c:\gpc), and unzip the archives. Make sure you preserve the directory structure (use `pkunzip -d'). Now, add the directory where gpc.exe lives (c:\gpc\bin) to your path and set the DJGPP environment variable to point to your djgpp.env file:
set DJGPP=c:\gpc\djgpp.env
Then, add this to your djgpp.env file:
---------------------------------------------------------
[gpcpp]
C_INCLUDE_PATH=%/>;C_INCLUDE_PATH%%DJDIR%/lang/pascal;%DJDIR%/include
[gpc]
COMPILER_PATH=%/>;COMPILER_PATH%%DJDIR%/bin
LIBRARY_PATH=%/>;LIBRARY_PATH%%DJDIR%/lib;%DJDIR%/contrib/grx20/lib
---------------------------------------------------------
The GPC online documentation is in GNU info format; you need the Info reader (txi390b.zip) to read it, or use the built-in Info reader of the RHIDE or PENG IDE. To add the GPC documentation to the info directory file, edit the c:\gpc\info\dir file, and locate this section:
---------------------------------------------------------
* GCC: (gcc.inf).
The GNU C, C++, and Objective-C Compiler
* GDB: (gdb.inf).
The GNU Debugger (gdb and gdb-dpmi).
---------------------------------------------------------
To add GPC, change it to look like this:
---------------------------------------------------------
* GCC: (gcc.inf).
The GNU C, C++, and Objective-C Compiler
* GPC: (gpc.inf).
The GNU Pascal Compiler
* GDB: (gdb.inf).
The GNU Debugger (gdb and gdb-dpmi).
---------------------------------------------------------
Specific information for low-memory conditions and more can be found in the DJGPP FAQ and documentation.
To read the Info documentation, you need the `info' program from txi390b.zip or an IDE like RHIDE or PENG.
You don't have a DPMI server installed, and DJGPP v2 requires it to run. You can either use one of the commercial DPMI servers (e.g., run `gpc' in a DOS box under MS-Windows) or download and install CWSDPMI (csdpmi3b.zip) which is a free DPMI server written for DJGPP.
The GNU Assembler (as.exe), or gas, called by GCC accepts “AT&T” syntax which is different from “Intel” syntax. Differences are discussed in section 17.1 of the DJGPP FAQ.
A guide is available which was written by Brennan Mr. Wacko Underwood brennan@mack.rt66.com and describes how to use inline assembly programming with DJGPP, at this URL: http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/doc/brennan/brennan_att_inline_djgpp.html
There's also a GPC assembler tutorial at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/misc/gpcasm.zip
Section 17.3 of the DJGPP FAQ discusses some methods to convert “Intel” syntax to “AT&T” syntax.
However, please note that assembler code is unportable, i.e. it will work on IA32 (“x86”) and compatible processors if written for them, but will not even compile for other processors. So by writing assembler code in your programs, you will limit their usefulness substantially.
If you think you “need” assembler code for speed – and you've checked that your assembler code actually runs faster than Pascal code compiled with suitable optimizations – you might want to put both Pascal and assembler versions of the critical sections in your program, and let, e.g., an `{$ifdef i386}' decide which one to use. This way, your program will at least compile on all processors.
DPMI, BIOS and other functions are no different than other system functions. Refer to the GPC Manual on how to access your system's C-library. This small example shows how to use DPMI, copying some structures and function prototypes of `<dpmi.h>':
program DPMIDemo;
{ Only for DJGPP }
{$X+}
{ `Byte' is `unsigned char' in C,
`ShortCard' is `unsigned short' in C,
`MedCard' is `unsigned long' in C,
`Word' is `unsigned' in C,
etc. (all these types are built-in). }
type
TDpmiVersionRet = record
Major : Byte;
Minor : Byte;
Flags : ShortCard;
CPU : Byte;
Master_PIC: Byte;
Slave_PIC : Byte;
end;
type
TDpmiFreeMemInfo = record
LargestAvailableFreeBlockInBytes,
MaximumUnlockedPageAllocationInPages,
MaximumLockedPageAllocationInPages,
LinearAddressSpaceSizeInPages,
TotalNumberOfUnlockedPages,
TotalNumberOfFreePages,
TotalNumberOfPhysicalPages,
FreeLinearAddressSpaceInPages,
SizeOfPagingFilePartitionInPages,
Reserved1,
Reserved2,
Reserved3: MedCard;
end;
function DpmiGetVersion (var Version: TDpmiVersionRet): Integer;
external name '__dpmi_get_version';
function DpmiGetFreeMemoryInformation
(var MemInfo: TDpmiFreeMemInfo): Integer;
external name '__dpmi_get_free_memory_information';
var
Version: TDpmiVersionRet;
MemInfo: TDpmiFreeMemInfo;
begin
if DpmiGetVersion (Version) = 0 then
begin
WriteLn ('CPU type: ', Version.CPU, '86');
WriteLn ('DPMI major: ', Version.Major);
WriteLn ('DPMI minor: ', Version.Minor);
end
else
WriteLn ('Error in DpmiGetVersion');
if DpmiGetFreeMemoryInformation (MemInfo) = 0 then
WriteLn ('Free DPMI memory: ',
MemInfo.TotalNumberOfFreePages, ' pages.')
else
WriteLn ('Error in DpmiGetMemoryInformation');
end.
Per default, the maximum stack size of a DJGPP application is 256K. If you need more, you have to adjust it with the stubedit program, i.e.:
stubedit your_app.exe minstack=5000K
Another way is to add the following code to your program to define a minimum stack size (here: 2 MB). This value will be honored even if a user sets a lower value by using stubedit, so this method might be a little safer. (The linker name `_stklen' is essential; the Pascal identifier doesn't matter. The constant doesn't have to be used anywhere in the program. It is recommended to put this declaration in the main program file, not in any unit/module, so programs using a unit/module can set whatever limit they need.)
{$ifdef __GO32__}
const
MinStackSize: Cardinal = $200000; attribute (name = '_stklen');
{$endif}
Still, it might be a good idea to use pointers for large structures, and allocate the memory at runtime.
DJGPP has to allocate the stack in physical memory at program startup, so one might have to be careful with too large stack limits. Most other systems allocate stack pages on demand, so the only reason to set a limit at all might be to prevent a runaway recursion from eating up all memory ...
On Unix-like systems, you can set a resource limit, but you usually don't do it in normal programs, but rather in the shell settings (bash: `ulimit'; csh: `limit'; syscall: `setrlimit'(2)).
Turbo Pascal strings have a length byte in front. Since a byte has the range 0 .. 255, this limits a string to 255 characters. However, the Pascal string schema, as defined in section 6.4.3.3.3 of the ISO 10206 Extended Pascal standard, is a schema record:
type
String (Capacity: Integer) = record
Length: 0 .. Capacity;
String: packed array [1 .. Capacity + 1] of Char
end;
The `+ 1' is a GPC extension to make it feasible to automatically add the `#0' terminator when passing or assigning them to CStrings. Thus at the expense of a little added complexity (must declare capacity, don't use `GetMem' without explicit initialization of the `Capacity' field, and the additional space requirement) you can now have very long strings.
Q: Should the different variants in a variant record overlay in the same memory? Previous Pascals I have used have guaranteed this, and I've got low-level code that relies on this. The variants are not the same length, and they are intended not to be.
A: No, this is intentional so that the discriminants are not overwritten, and they can be properly initialized in the first place. Consider:
record
case Boolean of
False: (s1: String (42));
True: (s2: String (99));
end;
If the strings would overlay, in particular their discriminants would occupy the same place in memory. How should it be initialized? Either way, it would be wrong for at least one of the variants ...
So, after a discussion in the ISO Pascal newsgroup where this topic came up concerning file variables (which also require some automatic initialization and finalization), we decided to do this in GPC for all types with automatic initialization and finalization (currently files, objects and schemata, including strings, in the future this might also be Delphi compatible classes and user-defined initialized and finalized types), since the standard does not guarantee variants to overlay, anyway ...
There are two ways in GPC to get guaranteed overlaying (both non-standard, of course, since the standard does not assume anything about internal representations; both BP compatible), `absolute' declarations and variable type casts. E.g., in order to overlay a byte array `b' to a variable `v':
var
b: array [1 .. SizeOf (v)] of Byte absolute v;
Or you can use type-casting:
type
t = array [1 .. SizeOf (v)] of Byte;
then `t (v)' can be used as a byte array overlayed to `v'.
Q: In standard Pascal you expect `s[1]' to align with the first character position of `s' and thus one character to the left is the length of `s'. Thus `s[0]' is the length of `s'. True?
A: This holds for UCSD/BP strings (which GPC does not yet implement, but that's planned). The only strings Standard Pascal knows are arrays of char without any length field.
GPC also supports Extended Pascal string schemata (see String schema), but they also don't have a length byte at “position 0”, but rather a `Length' field (which is larger than one byte).
Q: Any “gotchas” with string parameters?
A: Be careful when passing string literals as parameters to routines accepting the string as a value parameter and that internally modify the value of the parameter. Inside the routine, the value parameter gets a fixed capacity – the length of the string literal that was passed to it. Any attempt to assign a longer value will not work.
This only applies if the value parameter is declared as `String'. If it is declared as a string with a given capacity (e.g., `String (255)'), it gets this capacity within the routine.
Q: Two different kinds of strings with the same name – `String' – does make a bit of confusion. Perhaps the oldstyle strings could be renamed `short string' ?
A: When we implement the short strings, we'll have to do such a distinction. Our current planning goes like this:
`String (n)': string schema (EP compatible)
`String [n]': short string (UCSD/BP compatible, where n must be <= 255)
`String': dependent on flags, by default undiscriminated schema, but in BP mode (or with a special switch) short string of capacity 255 (UCSD/BP compatible).
Q: So when will these short strings be available?
A: It's been planned for some years. The delay has been caused by more pressing problems.
A C string (`char *') is an array of char, terminated with a `#0' char.
C library functions require C, not Pascal style string arguments. However, Pascal style strings are automatically converted to C style strings when passed to a routine that expects C style strings. This works only if the routine reads from the string, not if it modifies it.
E.g., this is how you could access the `system()' call in your C library (which is not necessary anymore, since `Execute' is already built-in):
program SysCall;
function System (CmdLine: CString): Integer; external name 'system';
var
Result: Integer;
begin
Result := System ('ls -l');
WriteLn ('system() call returned: ', Result)
end.
You could use the type `PChar' instead of `CString'. Both `CString' and `PChar' are predefined as `^Char' – though we recommend `CString' because it makes it clearer that we're talking about some kind of string rather than a single character.
A lot of library routines in Pascal for many applications exist in the GPC unit and some other units. Where available, they should be preferred (e.g. `Execute' rather than `system()', and then you won't have to worry about `CString's.)
Do not pass a C style string as a `const' or `var' argument if the C prototype says `const char *' or you will probably get a segfault.
Please read the GPC Manual (info files or other formats) as well as the README and BUGS files that come with GPC (usually installed in directory /usr/local/doc/gpc), plus other docs that might help (the DJGPP FAQ if you use DJGPP, etc.) before you send email to the maintainers or mailing list.
In particular, the BUGS file contains information on how to submit bug reports in the most efficient way.
The `Support' chapter of the GPC Manual tells you where to find more information about GPC and how to contact the GPC developers. (see Support)
If you want to contribute, please write to the mailing list, Mailing List.
The GPC homepage on the web, for information and downloads, is
http://www.gnu-pascal.de.
The GPC To-Do list, listing the latest features and fixed bugs can also be found there.
Current Maintainer: Russ Whitaker, russ@ashlandhome.net
This is the second incarnation of the GNU Pascal FAQ list, based on the previous FAQ by J.J. van der Heijden. Comments about, suggestions for, or corrections to this FAQ list are welcome.
Please make sure to include in your mail the version number of the document to which your comments apply (you can find the version at the beginning of this FAQ list).
Many people have contributed to this FAQ, only some of them are acknowledged above. Much of the info in, and inspiration for this FAQ list was taken from the GPC mailing list traffic, so you may have (unbeknownst to you) contributed to this list.
You can download the source code of the current GNU Pascal release from
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/current/
and binaries for some platforms from
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/binary/
The binary archive files are named gpc-version.platform.extension – for example `gpc-2.1.alpha-unknown-linux-gnu.tar.gz' for GPC version 2.1 on an Alpha workstation running the Linux kernel with GNU C Library, or `gpc-20000616.i386-pc-msdosdjgpp' for GPC version 20000616 on an Intel IA32 compatible PC running DOS with DJGPP.
After you have downloaded the correct archive file for your platform, please read the installation notes on how to install such a binary distribution.
If you are running Dos or MS Windows, you will need additional tools – see “What else to download and where” below.
GNU Pascal is subject to steady development. Alpha and beta snapshots (source only, use at your own risk) can be found at:
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/alpha/
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/beta/
When you are using GNU Pascal on a DOS system, you will need either the DJGPP or the EMX development environment (see below). On an OS/2 system, you will need EMX. On an MS Windows 95/98/NT system you will need either the CygWin or the mingw32 ot the MSYS environment.
GNU Pascal uses the compiler back-end from the GNU Compiler Collection, GNU CC or GCC. If you want to compile GPC, you will need the source of GCC as well as the source of GPC itself. From the same place as GPC, please download GCC 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x. (It is also available from any GNU mirror; see http://www.gnu.org/software/gcc/.)
For some of GPC's units, you will need some standard libraries. In particular:
| Unit | Platform | Library
|
| CRT | Unix/terminal | ncurses >= 5.0 (1), (2)
|
| CRT | Unix/X11 | PDCurses (2)
|
| CRT | Dos, MS-Windows | PDCurses (3)
|
| GMP | any | gmp
|
| RegEx | any | rx
|
| (debugging) | Unix, MS-Windows | ElectricFence (4)
|
Notes:
(1) ncurses version 5.0 or newer is strongly recommended because older versions contain a bug that severely affects CRT programs.
(2) You can install both ncurses and PDCurses on a Unix system, and choose at compile time whether to generate a terminal or X11 version of your program.
(3) ncurses also runs under MS-Windows with CygWin (not mingw32, however), but doesn't appear to behave much differently from PDCurses on that platform.
(4) ElectricFence is not used by any unit, but can be used for debugging memory allocation bugs by simply linking it (see the accompanying documentation).
You can find those libraries on many places on the Net. Also, many GNU/Linux distributions, DJGPP mirrors and other OS distributions already contain some of the libraries. In any case, you can find the sources of the libraries (sometimes together with patches that you should apply before building if you choose to build from the sources) and binaries for some platforms in
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/
For more information and descriptions of these libraries, see Libraries.
DJGPP is available from any SimTel mirror in the gnu/djgpp subdirectory; for addresses look into the DJGPP FAQ. To use GNU Pascal you need at least
We also recommend you to get:
EMX is an environment for creating 32-bit applications for DOS and OS/2. To develop EMX programs with GNU Pascal you need at least
If your DOS box has DPMI (it does if you are using MS Windows or OS/2) you will also need RSX, available from the same sites as EMX in the subdirectory rsxnt.
The GNU development tools contain the GNU C compiler which is in fact not needed to use GNU Pascal. However, the C library is needed.
CygWin is an environment which implements a POSIX layer under MS Windows, giving it large parts of the functionality of Unix. CygWin contains development tools such as an assembler, a linker, etc. GPC needs for operation. More information about CygWin can be found at
http://cygwin.com
The Minimalists' GNU Win32 environment, mingw32, allows a large number of Unix programs – including GPC and GCC – to run under MS Windows 95/98/NT using native MS libraries. mingw32 ressources can be found at
http://www.mingw.org
To install a binary distribution, cd to the root directory and
unpack the archive while preserving the stored directory structure. Under
a Unix compatible system with GNU tar installed, the following
(performed as `root') will do the job:
# cd /
# tar xzf archive.tar.gz
If you are using a `tar' utility other than GNU tar, it
might be necessary to do the above in an explicit pipe:
# cd /
# gzip -c -d archive.tar.gz | tar xf -
Some binary distributions are now distributed packed with `bzip2'. You can recognize them by their file name suffix .bz2 instead of .gz. For such archives, make sure you have `bunzip2' installed and then use the following command:
# cd /
# tar xjf archive.tar.bz2
Or:
# cd /
# bunzip2 -c -d archive.tar.bz2 | tar xf -
If you want to install a GPC binary distribution in another directory than it was prepared for (for example, if you do not have root access to the computer and want to install GPC somewhere under your home directory), you can do the following:
install-gpc-binary, available from
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/binary/.
To install a ZIP archive under DOS with `PKunzip', `cd' to the appropriate directory (usually `\' for EMX, `\DJGPP' for DJGPP), then call `PKunzip' with the `-d' option:
C:\> cd djgpp
C:\DJGPP> pkunzip -d archive.zip
where archive.zip is the name of the distribution file.
For DJGPP you must edit your djgpp.env in the DJGPP directory to complete the installation: Please copy the entries from `[gcc]' to create a new `[gpc]' section. The result may look as follows:
[gcc]
COMPILER_PATH=%/>;COMPILER_PATH%%DJDIR%/bin
LIBRARY_PATH=%/>;LIBRARY_PATH%%DJDIR%/lib
[gpc]
COMPILER_PATH=%/>;COMPILER_PATH%%DJDIR%/bin
LIBRARY_PATH=%/>;LIBRARY_PATH%%DJDIR%/lib
If you are using the DJGPP version of GPC but do not have a DJGPP directory, please download and install DJGPP (see Download).
Binary distributions include libgcc.a and specs, files that are normally part of GCC. If you have GCC installed, they will be replaced unless you manually install the archive.
The preferred way to distribute GNU software is distribution of the source code. However, it can be a non-trivial exercise to build GNU Pascal on some non-Unix systems, so we also provide ready-to-run binaries for a number of platforms. (See Binary Distributions for how to install a binary distribution.)
GPC is based on the GNU Compiler Collection, GNU CC or GCC. You will
need the GCC sources to build it. It must be the same version as the
one GPC is implemented with – 2.8.1, 2.95.x, 3.2.x, 3.3.x or 3.4.x as of this
writing. Although you need GCC to build the GNU Pascal compiler, you
don't need GCC to compile Pascal programs once GNU Pascal is
installed. (However, using certain libraries will require compiling
C wrappers, so it is a good idea to install the C compiler as well.)
Because GNU Pascal shares its back-end with GCC, it should run on any system supported by GCC. A full list of platforms supported by GCC can be found in the GCC installation instructions.
The GCC source can be obtained from any mirror of the GNU FTP site, ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/. The “core” distribution is sufficient for GPC.
Here is the generic procedure for installing GNU Pascal on a Unix system. See Compilation Notes for extra information needed to install GPC on DOS-like platforms.
Make sure that GNU make is installed and that you use it in the following steps. When unsure, you can try `make --version' and/or `gmake --version'. It should tell you that it is GNU make. If you don't have it, you can obtain it from http://www.gnu.org/software/make/.
(In the following, we will simply speak of `make' when invoking GNU make; you might need to call `gmake' instead.)
You also need a patch program. If such a program is not installed on your system, you can get GNU patch from http://www.gnu.org/directory/patch.html.
For extracting the example programs from the documentation to the doc/docdemos directory a non-crippled `sed' is needed. GNU sed is known to work.
If you have downloaded a “minimal” source distribution, most derived files have to be rebuilt. This is done automatically when building GPC, but you need additional tools:
`bash', `bzip2', GNU `sed', GNU `awk', GNU `m4', `bison' (at least version 2.1), `flex' (version 2.5.27), `autoconf' (version 2.12), `texinfo' (at least version 4.2), `help2man'.
Make sure that these are installed. The minimal distributions are compressed with `bzip2' instead of `gzip', so substitute it in the instructions below.
If your bison and flex programs are installed under different names, you may have to set some or all of the following environment variables before running `configure':
FLEX=/path/to/flex
LEX=/path/to/flex
BISON=/path/to/bison
YACC=/path/to/bison
INTLBISON=/path/to/bison
If you want to build the GPC WWW pages you will also need a TeX distribution (including `pdftex' and `dvips').
If you run into trouble during the installation process, please check whether you are using outdated versions of the required utilities and upgrade if necessary.
The GNU versions of the packages above are available from http://www.gnu.org/software/, in a subdirectory whose name is the name of the package.
From a directory of your choice (e.g. /home/fred), unpack the GCC and GNU Pascal source distributions. This will create separate subdirectories for GCC and GPC. Let us assume gcc-3.4.3 and gpc-20041218 in this example.
% cd /home/fred
% bzip2 -d < gcc-core-3.4.3.tar.bz2 | tar xf -
% gzip -c -d gpc-20041218.tar.gz | tar xf -
`cd' to the GPC directory and move the contents (a subdirectory p) to the subdirectory gcc of the GCC directory:
% mv /home/fred/gpc-20041218/p /home/fred/gcc-3.4.3/gcc/
Instead of moving the directory, it is now also possible to make a symbolic link (if the OS supports symlinks). This is useful if you want to build GPC with several different GCC versions:
% ln -s /home/fred/gpc-20041218/p /home/fred/gcc-3.4.3/gcc/p
It is recommended, though not required, to use a separate directory for building the compiler, rather than compiling in the source directory. In this example, let us create /home/fred/gpc-build for this purpose:
% mkdir /home/fred/gpc-build
If you use a separate directory, you do not need to write into the GCC source directory once you have patched the GCC source (see below), and can build GPC for more than one platform from the same source tree.
In case you are re-using a directory where you have already built GCC and/or GPC for a different target machine, do `make distclean' to delete all files that might be invalid. One of the files this deletes is Makefile; if `make distclean' complains that Makefile does not exist, it probably means that the directory is already suitably clean.
GNU Pascal is automatically configured with GCC. Configuration of GCC is treated in depth in the GCC installation instructions. The normal procedure is as follows:
`cd' to the GPC build directory. From there, run the `configure' script in the GCC source directory:
% cd /home/fred/gpc-build
% /home/fred/gcc-3.4.3/configure --enable-languages=pascal
This creates all the necessary config files, links and Makefile in the GCC object directory.
Note 1: The configuration will prompt you for patching the GCC source for GPC support, so you need write access to that directory. All changes to GCC are surrounded by `#ifdef GPC ... #endif', so they should not interfere when you build a C compiler from this source tree.
Note 2: The `--enable-languages=pascal' option means that we only want to build the Pascal compiler and not, for instance, the C++ compiler.
Note 3: The standard base directory for installing GCC and GPC is /usr/local. If you want to install files to an alternate directory dir, specify `--prefix=dir' when you run configure. For installing into a system directory such as /usr/local you will, of course, need appropriate permissions (often root). Therefore, if you want to install GPC on a system where you don't have those permissions, you must specify a prefix (e.g., `$HOME/usr').
Some environments require other GNU tools (such as the GNU assembler or linker) instead of the standard system tools for GCC to work. (See the GCC installation instructions for details.) If this is the case for your system, install the required tools in the GPC build directory under the names as, ld, or whatever is appropriate. This will enable the compiler to find the proper tools for compilation of the program enquire (a part of GCC) and to install the GNU tools to a place where they are found by GCC but do not interfere with the standard system tools.
Alternatively, you can do subsequent compilation using a value of the
PATH environment variable such that the necessary GNU tools come
before the standard system tools.
Once you are satisfied with the configuration as determined by configure, you can build the compiler:
% make
Notice that this procedure will build the C compiler (and maybe some other compilers) too, because that is used to compile the GPC runtime library.
Optionally, you may supply CFLAGS, LDFLAGS or RTSFLAGS. CFLAGS is used for compiler and RTS, RTSFLAGS are for RTS only, i.e.: `make CFLAGS="-O2" RTSFLAGS=-Wall'
Note: The documentation may fail to build from *.texi sources if GCC 2.95.x tries to use an older version of `makeinfo' supplied in GCC package itself. This can be prevented by supplying explicit instruction to use your system's `makeinfo':
% make MAKEINFO=`which makeinfo`
optionally followed by the rest of arguments.
When everything has been compiled, you can check the installation process with:
% make -n install
To complete the installation, run the command `make install'. You need write access to the target directories (/usr/local/bin, /usr/local/lib, /usr/local/info, /usr/local/doc, and /usr/local/man in this example), so this is usually done as `root':
% su -c "make install"
If you want to install only the Pascal compiler (for example if you already have the correct version of GCC installed), `cd' to the `gcc' subdirectory of the build directory (e.g. /home/fred/gpc-build/gcc) and run `make pascal.install'. This installation process does not overwrite existing copies of libgcc.a or specs, should they exist.
However, if you do not have the exactly matching GCC version installed, you might need some additional files (otherwise GPC will complain about missing files at runtime). You can install them by doing `make pascal.install-with-gcc' in the gcc subdirectory of the build directory.
There is a (partial) translation of the GPC manual into Croatian available now. It is not installed by default. If you want to install it, do a `pascal.install-hr' in the `gcc' directory. This will install the manpage gpc-hr.1 and the info documentation gpc-hr.info*. Other formats like PS, PDF and HTML can be built manually (it's also easy to add appropriate make targets for them when needed).
Also from the `gcc' subdirectory you can do some more “exotic” builds. For instance, you can build the GPC WWW pages by typing `make pascal.html' or a binary distribution by typing `make pascal.bindist'. See the Makefile in that directory for more examples.
The only compiler that is capable of compiling the GNU Compiler Collection (GNU CC or GCC) under MS-DOS is GCC itself. In order to compile GPC or GCC for MS-DOS with DJGPP you will therefore need either a working copy of DJGPP installed, or you will have to cross-build from a non-MS-DOS system.
Building GPC under MS-DOS with DJGPP follows the same scheme as building GPC under a Unix-like system: Place the p subdirectory in the gcc directory and follow the instructions for compiling GCC. This requires `bash' and many other tools installed, and you must be very careful at many places to circumvent the limitations of the DOS platform.
Our preferred way to build GPC for DJGPP is to cross-build it from a Unix-like platform – which is much easier. For instructions, see Cross-Compilers and Crossbuilding.
EMX is a free 32-bit DOS extender which adds some properties of Unix to MS-compatible DOS and IBM's OS/2 operating systems.
As of this writing, we are not aware of current versions of GCC for EMX, and EMX support in GPC has not been maintained. Please contact us if you know about recent development in EMX and are interested in continuing EMX support in GPC.
There are two ports of the GNU development tools to MS Windows 95/98/NT: CygWin and mingw32.
The CygWin environment implements a POSIX layer under MS Windows, giving it large parts of the functionality of Unix. Thus, compiling GCC and GPC under the CygWin environment can be done following the instructions for compiling it under a Unix-like system (see Compiling GPC).
The Minimalists' GNU Win32 environment, mingw32, uses the native crtdll.dll library of MS Windows. It is much smaller than CygWin, but it is not self-hosting and must be crossbuilt from another system (see Crossbuilding).
GNU Pascal can function as a cross-compiler for many machines. Information about GNU tools in a cross-configuration can be found at `ftp://ftp.cygnus.com/pub/embedded/crossgcc/'.
If you want a cross-compiler targetting Linux you may use Dan Kegel's crosstool from `http://www.kegel.com/crosstool/'
Since GNU Pascal generates assembler code, you need a cross-assembler that GNU Pascal can run, in order to produce object files. If you want to link on other than the target machine, you need a cross-linker as well. It is straightforward to install the GNU binutils to act as cross-tools – see the installation instructions of the GNU binutils for details.
You also need header files and libraries suitable for the target machine that you can install on the host machine. Please install them under prefix/platform/include/, for instance /usr/local/i386-pc-msdosdjgpp/include/ for a cross-compiler from a typical Unix-like environment to MS-DOS with DJGPP.
Configuration and compilation of the compiler can then be done using the scripts cfgpc and mkgpc which are included in the source distribution in the subdirectory p/script. Please call them with the `-h' option for instructions.
Using a cross-compiler to build GNU Pascal results in a compiler binary that runs on the cross-target platform. This is called “crossbuilding”. A possible reason why anybody would want to do this, is when the platform on which you want to run the GNU Pascal compiler is not self-hosting. An example is mingw32.
To crossbuild GNU Pascal, you have to install a cross-compiler for your target first, see Cross-Compilers.
As when building a cross-compiler, configuration and compilation of the compiler can be done using the scripts cfgpc and mkgpc which are included in the source distribution in the subdirectory p/script. Please call them with the `-h' option for instructions.
GPC is a command-line compiler, i.e., to compile a program you have to invoke gpc passing it the name of the file you want to compile, plus options.
GPC supports all command-line options that GCC knows, except for many preprocessor options. For a complete reference and descriptions of all options, see GCC Command Options. Below, you will find a list of the additional options that GPC supports, and a list of GPC's most important options (including some of those supported by GCC as well).
You can mix options and file names on the command line. For the most part, the order doesn't matter. Order does matter, e.g., when you use several options of the same kind; for example, if you specify `-L' more than once, the directories are searched in the order specified. Note: Since many options have multiletter names; multiple single-letter options may not be grouped as is possible with many other programs: `-dr' is very different from `-d -r'.
Many options have long names starting with `--' or, completely equivalent `-f'. E.g., `--mixed-comments' is the same as `-fmixed-comments'. Some options tell GPC when to give warnings, i.e. diagnostic messages that report constructs which are not inherently erroneous but which are risky or suggest there may have been an error. Those options start with `-W'.
Most GPC specific options can also be changed during one compilation by using compiler directives in the source, e.g. `{$X+}' or `{$extended-syntax}' for `--extended-syntax' (see Compiler Directives).
GPC understands the same environment variables GCC does (see Environment Variables Affecting GCC). In addition, GPC recognizes `GPC_EXEC_PREFIX' with the same meaning that `GCC_EXEC_PREFIX' has to GCC. GPC also recognizes `GCC_EXEC_PREFIX', but `GPC_EXEC_PREFIX' takes precedence.
Some of the long options (e.g., `--unit-path') take an argument. This argument is separated with a `=' sign, e.g.:
--unit-path=/home/foo/units
The following table lists the command line options GPC understands in addition to those understood by GCC.
--debug-tree--debug-gpi--debug-automake--debug-source--no-debug-source--disable-debug-info--progress-messages--no-progress-messages--progress-bar--no-progress-bar--automake-gpc--automake-gcc--automake-g++--amtmpfile--autolink--no-autolink--automake--no-automake--autobuild--no-autobuild--maximum-field-alignment--ignore-packed--no-ignore-packed--ignore-garbage-after-dot--no-ignore-garbage-after-dot--extended-syntax--no-extended-syntax--ignore-function-results--no-ignore-function-results--pointer-arithmetic--no-pointer-arithmetic--cstrings-as-strings--no-cstrings-as-strings-Wabsolute-Wno-absolute--short-circuit--no-short-circuit--mixed-comments--no-mixed-comments--nested-comments--no-nested-comments--delphi-comments--no-delphi-comments--macros--no-macros--truncate-strings--no-truncate-strings--exact-compare-strings--no-exact-compare-strings--double-quoted-strings--no-double-quoted-strings--longjmp-all-nonlocal-labels--no-longjmp-all-nonlocal-labels--iso-goto-restrictions--no-iso-goto-restrictions--nonlocal-exit--no-nonlocal-exit--io-checking--no-io-checking--pointer-checking-user-defined--no-pointer-checking-user-defined--pointer-checking--no-pointer-checking--object-checking--no-object-checking--range-checking--no-range-checking--range-and-object-checking--no-range-and-object-checking--case-value-checking--no-case-value-checking--stack-checking--no-stack-checking--read-base-specifier--no-read-base-specifier--read-hex--no-read-hex--read-white-space--no-read-white-space--write-clip-strings--no-write-clip-strings--write-real-blank--no-write-real-blank--write-capital-exponent--no-write-capital-exponent--transparent-file-names--no-transparent-file-names--field-widths--no-field-widths--pedantic--no-pedantic--typed-address--no-typed-address--enable-keyword--disable-keyword--implicit-result--no-implicit-result--enable-predefined-identifier--disable-predefined-identifier--assertions--no-assertions--setlimit--gpc-main--propagate-units--no-propagate-units--interface-only--implementation-only--executable-file-name--unit-path--no-unit-path--object-path--no-object-path--executable-path--no-executable-path--unit-destination-path--no-unit-destination-path--object-destination-path--no-object-destination-path--disable-default-paths--gpi-destination-path--uses--init-modules--cidefine--csdefine--big-endian--little-endian--print-needed-options-Wwarnings-Wno-warnings-Widentifier-case-local-Wno-identifier-case-local-Widentifier-case-Wno-identifier-case-Winterface-file-name-Wno-interface-file-name--methods-always-virtual--no-methods-always-virtual--objects-are-references--no-objects-are-references--objects-require-override--no-objects-require-override--delphi-method-shadowing--no-delphi-method-shadowing--borland-objects--mac-objects--ooe-objects--gnu-objects--preprocessed-nostdinc-remap-A-E-H-P-Wimplicit-abstract-Wno-implicit-abstract-Winherited-abstract-Wno-inherited-abstract-Wobject-assignment-Wno-object-assignment-Wimplicit-io-Wno-implicit-io-Wfloat-equal-Wno-float-equal-Wtyped-const-Wno-typed-const-Wnear-far-Wno-near-far-Wunderscore-Wno-underscore-Wsemicolon-Wno-semicolon-Wlocal-external-Wno-local-external-Wdynamic-arrays-Wno-dynamic-arrays-Wmixed-comments-Wno-mixed-comments-Wnested-comments-Wno-nested-comments--classic-pascal-level-0--standard-pascal-level-0--classic-pascal--standard-pascal--extended-pascal--object-pascal--ucsd-pascal--borland-pascal--delphi--pascal-sc--vax-pascal--sun-pascal--mac-pascal--gnu-pascalAs the most simple example, calling
gpc foo.pas
tells GPC to compile the source file foo.pas and to produce an executable of the default name which is foo.exe on EMX, a.exe on Cygwin, both a.out and a.exe on DJGPP, and a.out on most other platforms.
Users familiar with BP, please note that you have to give the file name extension `.pas': GPC is a common interface for a Pascal compiler, a C, ObjC and C++ compiler, an assembler, a linker, and perhaps an Ada and a FORTRAN compiler. From the extension of your source file GPC figures out which compiler to run. GPC recognizes Pascal sources by the extension .pas, .p, .pp or .dpr. GPC also accepts source files in other languages (e.g., .c for C) and calls the appropriate compilers for them. Files with the extension .o or without any special recognized extension are considered to be object files or libraries to be linked.
Another example:
gpc -O2 -Wall --executable-file-name --automake --unit-path=units foo.pas
This will compile the source file foo.pas to an executable named foo (`--executable-file-name') with fairly good optimization (`-O2'), warning about possible problems (`-Wall'). If the program uses units or imports modules, they will be searched for in a directory called units (`--unit-path') and automatically compiled and linked (`--automake').
The following table lists the most commonly used options to GPC.
--automake--unit-path=dir[:dir...]--object-path=dir[:dir...]--unit-destination-path=dir--object-destination-path=dir--executable-path=dir-o fileSince only one output file can be specified, it does not make sense
to use `-o' when compiling more than one input file, unless you
are producing an executable file as output.
--executable-file-name[=name]-Ldir-Idir-llibrary-O[n]With optimization, the compiler tries to reduce code size and execution time. The higher the value of n, the more optimizations will be done, but the longer the compilation will take.
If you use multiple `-O' options, with or without n, the
last such option is the one that is effective.
-g-s-WallNote that some warnings (e.g., those about using uninitialized
variables) are never given unless you compile with optimization (see
above), because otherwise the compiler doesn't analyze the usage
patterns of variables.
-Werror-S-c-static-Dmacro[=def]-b machine-v--classic-pascal-level-0--classic-pascal--extended-pascal--object-pascal--ucsd-pascal--borland-pascal--delphi--pascal-sc--mac-pascalBy default, GNU Pascal allows the redefinition of some keywords. Each of these switches causes GNU Pascal to forbid the redefinition of keywords of the specified standard.
Most ISO 7185 Pascal programs should compile properly with or without `--classic-pascal'. However, without this option, some constructs behave in non-standard way. Moreover, certain GNU extensions and Pascal features from other dialects are supported as well. With this option, they are rejected.
These options are not intended to be useful; they exist only to
satisfy pedants who would otherwise claim that GNU Pascal fails to
support the ISO Standard or is not really compatible to Borland
Pascal, or whatever. We recommend, rather, that users take advantage
of the extensions of GNU Pascal and disregard the limitations of
other compilers.
-pedantic-errors--gpc-main=nameThis chapter is still under development.
This chapter tells you how the source of a valid GNU Pascal program should look like. You can use it as tutorial about the GNU Pascal language, but since the main goal is to document all special GPC features, implementation-dependent stuff, etc., expect a steep learning curve.
This chapter does not cover how to compile your programs and to produce an executable – this is discussed above in Invoking GPC.
A source file accepted by GNU Pascal may contain up to one program, zero or more ISO-style modules, and/or zero or more UCSD-style units. Units and modules can be mixed in one project.
One trivial example for a valid GPC source file follows. Note that the code below may either be in one source file, or else the unit and the program may be in separate source files.
unit DemoUnit;
interface
procedure Hello;
implementation
procedure Hello;
begin
WriteLn ('Hello, world!')
end;
end.
program UnitDemo;
uses
DemoUnit;
begin
Hello
end.
A generic GNU Pascal program looks like the following:
program name (Input, Output);
import_part
declaration_part
begin
statement_part
end.
The program headline may be omitted in GPC, but a warning
will be given except in `--borland-pascal' mode.
While the program parameters (usually `Input', `Output') are obligatory in ISO Pascal if you want to use `ReadLn' and `WriteLn', they are optional in GNU Pascal. GPC will warn about such missing parameters in `--extended-pascal' mode. However if you give parameters to the program headline, they work like ISO requires.
The import_part consists either of an ISO-style `import' specification or a UCSD/Borland-style `uses' clause. While `import' is intended to be used with interfaces exported by ISO 10206 Extended Pascal modules, and `uses' is intended to be used with units, this is not enforced. (See also uses, import.)
The declaration_part consists of label, constant, type, variable or subroutine declarations in free order. However, every identifier must be declared before it is used. The only exception are type identifiers pointing to another type identifier which may be declared below.
The statement_part consists of a sequence of statements.
As an extension, GPC supports a “declaring statement” which can be used in the statement part to declare variables (see var).
A label declaration has the following look:
label
label_name, ..., label;
A label declaration part starts with the reserved word label,
which contains a list of labels.
A constant declaration has the following look:
const
constant_identifier = constant_expression;
...
constant_identifier = constant_expression;
A constant declaration part starts with the reserved word const.
It declares a constant_identifier which is defined by
constant_expression. This expression has to be evaluatable during
compilation time, i.e. it can include numbers, parentheses, predefined
operators, sets and type casts (the last, however, is a Borland extension).
In ISO 7185 Pascal, constant_expression must be a constant or
a set. All Pascal Dialects but ISO-Pascal allow the use of these
intrinsic functions in constant_expression:
Abs, Round, Trunc, Chr, Ord, Length, Pred, Succ, SizeOf, Odd.
In Borland Pascal, in the constant declaration part variables can be declared as well, which are given an initial value. These variables are called “typed constants”. It is good style to avoid this use, especially since Extended Pascal and GNU Pascal allow to initialize a variable in variable declaration part or give a type a preset value on declaration.
const
FiveFoo = 5;
StringFoo = 'string constant';
AlphabetSize = Ord ('Z') - Ord ('A') + 1;
type
PInteger = ^Integer; { Define a pointer to an Integer }
const
{ Constant which holds a pointer to an Integer at address 1234 }
AddressFoo = PInteger (1234);
An example of a typed constant:
const
i: Integer = 0;
If you want to use it as a constant only, that's perfectly fine. However, if you modify `i', we suggest to translate the declaration to an initialized variable. The EP syntax is:
var
i: Integer value 0;
GPC supports this as well as the following mixture of dialects:
var
i: Integer = 0;
Furthermore, you can also assign initialization values to types:
program InitTypeDemo;
type
MyInteger = Integer value 42;
var
i: MyInteger;
begin
WriteLn (i)
end.
Here, all variables of type MyInteger are automatically initialized to 42 when created.
program BPArrayInitDemo;
const
MyStringsCount = 5;
type
Ident = String [20];
const
MyStrings: array [1 .. MyStringsCount] of Ident =
('export', 'implementation', 'import',
'interface', 'module');
begin
end.
And the following way in EP:
program EPArrayInitDemo;
const
MyStringsCount = 5;
type
Ident = String (20);
var
MyStrings: array [1 .. MyStringsCount] of Ident value
[1: 'export'; 2: 'implementation'; 3: 'import';
4: 'interface'; 5: 'module'];
begin
end.
There seem to be pros and cons to each style. GPC supports both as well as just about any thinkable mixture of them.
Some folks don't like having to specify an index since it requires renumbering if you want to add a new item to the middle. However, if you index by an enumerated type, you might be able to avoid major renumbering by hand.
Subroutine Parameter List Declaration
A type declaration looks like this:
type
type_identifier = type_definition;
...
type_identifier = type_definition;
or, with preset content:
type
type_identifier = type_definition value constant_expression;
...
type_identifier = type_definition value constant_expression;
A type declaration part begins with the reserved word type.
It declares a type_identifier which is defined by type_definition.
A type definition either can be an array, a record, a schema, a set, an
object, a subrange, an enumerated type, a pointer to another type_identifier
or simply another type_identifier which is to alias.
If a schema type is to be declared, type_identifier is followed by a
discriminant enclosed in parentheses:
type_identifier (discriminant) = schema_type_definition;
If value is specified, followed by a constant satisfying
the type definition, every variable of this type is initialized with
constant_expression, unless it is initialized by value itself.
The reserved word value can be replaced by `=', however
value is not allowed in ISO-Pascal and Borland Pascal, and the
replacement by `=' is not allowed in Extended Pascal.
type
{ This side is the } { That side is the }
{ type declaration } { type definition }
Arrayfoo = array [0 .. 9] of Integer; { array definition }
Recordfoo = record { record definition }
Bar: Integer;
end;
{ schema def with discriminants ``x, y: Integer'' }
SchemaFoo (x, y: Integer) = array [x .. y] of Integer;
CharSetFoo = set of Char; { Def of a set }
ObjectFoo = object { Def of an object }
procedure DoAction;
constructor Init;
destructor Done;
end;
SubrangeFoo = -123..456; { subrange def }
EnumeratedFoo = (Pope,John,the,Second); { enum type def }
{ Def of a pointer to another type identifier }
PInteger = ^arrayfoo;
{ Def of an alias name for another type identifier }
IdentityFoo = Integer;
{ Def of an integer which was initialized by 123 }
InitializedFoo = Integer value 123;
Type Definition, Data Types, Variable Declaration
A variable declaration looks like this:
var
var_identifier: type_identifier;
...
var_identifier: type_identifier;
or
var
var_identifier: type_definition;
...
var_identifier: type_definition;
and with initializing value:
var
var_identifier: type_identifier value constant_expression;
...
var_identifier: type_identifier value constant_expression;
or
var
var_identifier: type_definition value constant_expression;
...
var_identifier: type_definition value constant_expression;
A variable declaration part begins with the reserved word var.
It declares a var_identifier whose type
either can be specified by a type identifier, or by a type definion which
either can be an array, a record, a set, a subrange, an enumerated type
or a pointer to an type identifier.
If value is specified followed by a constant expression satisfying
the specified type, the variable declared is initialized with
constant_expression.
The reserved word value can be replaced by `=', however
value is not allowed in ISO-Pascal and Borland Pascal, and the
replacement by `=' is not allowed in Extended Pascal.
Type Definition, Type Declaration, Data Types, The Declaring Statement, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration
procedure procedure_identifier;
declaration_part
begin
statement_part
end;
or with a parameter list:
procedure procedure_identifier (parameter_list);
declaration_part
begin
statement_part
end;
A procedure is quite like a sub-program: The declaration_part consists of label, constant, type, variable or subroutine declarations in free order. The statement_part consists of a sequence of statements. If parameter_list is specified, parameters can be passed to the procedure and can be used in statement_part. A recursive procedure call is allowed.
The Function, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration
function function_identifier: function_result_type;
declaration_part
begin
statement_part
end;
or with a parameter list:
function function_identifier (parameter_list): result_type;
declaration_part
begin
statement_part
end;
A function is a subroutine which has a return value of type function_result_type. It is structured like the program: the declaration_part consists of label, constant, type, variable or subroutine declarations in free order. The statement_part consists of a sequence of statements. If parameter_list is specified, parameters can be passed to the function and can be used in statement_part. The result is set via an assignment:
function_identifier := expression
Recursive function calls are allowed. Concerning the result type, ISO 7185 Pascal and Borland Pascal only allow the intrinsic types, subranges, enumerated types and pointer types to be returned. In Extended Pascal, function_result_type can be every assignable type. Of course, there are no type restrictions in GNU Pascal as well. If extended syntax is switched on, functions can be called like procedures via procedure call statement.
The Procedure, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration, Data Types
GNU Pascal allows to define operators which can be used the infix style in expressions. For a more detailed description, see Operators
parameter; ...; parameter
Each parameter can start with a prefix (see below) describing how the parameters are passed, followed by a comma seperated list of one or more parameter_identifiers and an optional parameter_type.
procedure DoIt (var x, y, z: OneType; a, b: AnotherType; var q);
To understand parameter passing, first some definitions.
Technical note: Parameters are not always passed on the stack, they may also be passed in registers, especially on RISC machines.
The prefix defines how a variable is passed on the stack and how you can access the formal_parameter inside the procedure. The prefix can be one of:
procedure DoIt (x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by value or reference, but if passed by reference, it is then copied to a local copy on the stack. Aliasing has no effect on x.
What it means: you can modify `x' inside the routine, but your
changes will not affect the actual parameter (and vice versa). The
actual parameter can be a constant or other immutable object, or a
protected or const variable.
procedure DoIt (protected x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by value or reference, but
if passed by reference, it is then copied to a local copy on the
stack. Aliasing has no effect on x. protected is a Extended
Pascal extension.
What it means: if you modify the actual parameter, this will not
affect `x' inside the routine. The actual parameter can be a
constant or other immutable object, or a protected or const
variable. You are forbidden from modifying x inside the routine.
procedure DoIt (var x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by reference. Aliasing will definitely change `x'.
What it means: modifications to `x' inside the routine will change the actual parameter passed in. The actual parameter must be an addressable L-value (ie, it must be something you can take the address of and assign to).
A parameter of this kind is called variable parameter and internally
corresponds to an L-value pointer (to the specified type identifier
if any). This declaration is necessary if the parameter is to be
modified within the routine and to hold its value still after
return.
procedure DoIt (const x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by value or reference.
The compiler will make a copy of the actual parameter to have
something it can address if the actual parameter is not addressable.
You are forbidden from modifying `x' inside the routine, and
therefore you cannot modify the actual parameter. Aliasing may or
may not change `x'. const is a Borland Pascal extension.
What it means: You can pass any R-value. You cannot modify `x'
inside the routine. If you change the actual parameter while inside
the routine, `x' will have an undefined value.
procedure DoIt (protected var x: SomeType);
Technical: The actual parameter is passed by reference. The compiler will never make a copy of the actual parameter. You are forbidden from modifying `x' inside the routine, and therefore you cannot modify the actual parameter. Aliasing will definitely change `x'.
What it means: You can pass anything addressable. You cannot modify `x' inside the routine. If you change the actual parameter while inside the routine, `x' will change as well.
In GPC, the protected var mode guarantees that the parameter
is always passed by reference, making it the correct choice for
calling C routines with `const' pointer parameters.
If you omit the formal parameter type specification, then any type may be passed to that parameter. Generally this is a bad idea, but occasionally it can be useful, especially for low level code.
As an Extended Pascal extension, you can also declare procedural parameters directly:
procedure parameter_identifier
or:
function parameter_identifier: parameter_identifier_result_type
Example for parameter lists:
program ParameterDemo;
procedure Foo (var Bar; var Baz: Integer; const Fred: Integer);
procedure Glork1 (function Foo: Integer; procedure Bar (Baz: Integer));
begin
Bar (Foo)
end;
begin
Baz := Integer (Bar) + Fred
end;
var
a, b, c: Integer;
begin
Foo (a, b, c)
end.
Data Types, var, const, protected
The way an assignment looks like:
L-value := expression;
This statement assigns any valid expression to L-value. Make sure that the result of expression is compatible with L-value, otherwise an compilation error is reported. The `:=' is called assignment operator. As long as L-value and expression are type compatible, they are assignment compatible for any definable type as well.
begin
statement;
statement;
...
statement
end
This statement joins several statements together into one compound statement which is treated as a single statement by the compiler. The finishing semicolon before `end' can be left out.
This statement has the following look:
if boolean_expression then
statement
or with an alternative statement:
if boolean_expression then
statement1
else
statement2
The `if' ... `then' statement consists of a boolean expression and a statement, which is conditionally executed if the evaluation of boolean_expression yields true.
If `if' ... `then' ... `else' is concerned, statement1 is executed depending on boolean_expression being true, otherwise statement2 is executed alternatively. Note: the statement before else must not finish with a semicolon.
case expression of
selector: statement;
...
selector: statement;
end
or, with alternative statement sequence:
case ordinal_expression of
selector: statement;
...
selector: statement;
otherwise { ``else'' instead of ``otherwise'' allowed }
statement;
...
statement;
end
or, as part of the invariant record type definition:
type
foo = record
field_declarations
case bar: variant_type of
selector: (field_declarations);
selector: (field_declarations);
...
end;
or, without a variant selector field,
type
foo = record
field_declarations
case variant_type of
selector: (field_declarations);
selector: (field_declarations);
...
end;
The case statement compares the value of ordinal_expression
to each selector, which can be a constant, a subrange, or a list of
them separated by commas, being compatible with the result of
ordinal_expression.
Note: duplicate selectors or range crossing is not allowed unless
{$borland-pascal} is specified. In case of
equality the corresponding statement is executed. If otherwise
is specified and no appropriate selector matched the expression, the
series of statements following otherwise is executed. As a synonym
for otherwise, else can be used. The semicolon before
otherwise is optional.
@@ ???? The expression must match one of the selectors in order to continue, unless an alternative statement series is specified.
For case in a variant record type definition, see Record Types.
for ordinal_variable := initial_value to final_value do
statement
or
for ordinal_variable := initial_value downto final_value do
statement
For sets:
for set_element_type_variable in some_set do
statement
For pointer index variables:
for pointer_variable := initial_address to final_address do
statement
or
for pointer_variable := initial_address downto final_address do
statement
The for statement is a control statement where an index variable assumes every value of a certain range and for every value the index variable assumes statement is executed. The range can be specified by two bounds (which must be of the same type as the index variable, i.e. ordinal or pointers) or by a set.
For ordinal index variables:
For pointer index variables:
Since gpc provides a flat memory modell, all addresses are linear, so they can be compared. Still, such loops should be used (if at all) only for iterating through successive elements of an array.
For sets:
Please note: A modification of the index variable may result in unpredictable action.
Set Types, Pointer Arithmetics, repeat Statement, for Statement
The while loop has the following form
while boolean_expression do
statement
The while statement declares a loop which is executed while
boolean_expression is true. Since the terminating condition is
checked before execution of the loop body, statement may never
be executed.
repeat Statement, for Statement
repeat
statement;
...
statement;
until boolean_expression
The repeat ... until statement declares a loop which is
repeated until boolean_expression is true. Since the terminating
condition is checked after execution of the loop body, the statement
sequence is executed at least once.
while Statement, for Statement
asm (StatementList: String);
The asm inline statement is a GNU Pascal extension. It
requires its parameter to be AT&T-noted assembler statements, and
therefore it is not compatible with that one of Borland Pascal.
statementlist is a string containing asm statements separated
by semicolons.
@@ ???? This statement looks like this:
goto label
(Under construction.)
subroutine_name;
This statement calls the subroutine subroutine_name which can either be a procedure or, if GNU extended syntax is turned on, a function. In this case, the result is ignored.
This statement allows to declare a variable within a statement part. It looks like this:
var
var_identifier: type_identifier;
or
var
var_identifier: type_definition;
and with initializing value:
var
var_identifier: type_identifier value expression;
or
var
var_identifier: type_definition value expression;
Unlike in declaration parts, the initializing expression does
not have to be a constant expression. Note that every declaring
statement has to start with var. The name space of the
variable extends from its declaration to the end of the current
matching statement sequence (which can be a statement part (of the
program, a function, a procedure or an operator) or, within that
part, a begin end compound statement, a repeat loop, or the else
branch of a case statement). This statement is a GNU Pascal
extension.
Continue;
and
Break;
These simple statements must not occur outside a loop, i.e. a `for', `while' or `repeat' statement. `Continue' transfers control to the beginning of the loop right by its call, `Break' exits the current loop turn and continues loop execution.
A module can have one or more `export' clauses and the name of an `export' clause doesn't have to be equal to the name of the module.
Sample module code with separate interface and
implementation parts:
module DemoModule interface; { interface part }
export DemoModule = (FooType, SetFoo, GetFoo);
type
FooType = Integer;
procedure SetFoo (f: FooType);
function GetFoo: FooType;
end.
module DemoModule implementation; { implementation part }
import
StandardInput;
StandardOutput;
var
Foo: FooType;
{ Note: the effect is the same as a `forward' directive would have:
parameter lists and result types are not allowed in the
declaration of exported routines, according to EP. In GPC, they
are allowed, but not required. }
procedure SetFoo;
begin
Foo := f
end;
function GetFoo;
begin
GetFoo := Foo
end;
to begin do
begin
Foo := 59;
WriteLn ('Just an example of a module initializer. See comment below')
end;
to end do
begin
Foo := 0;
WriteLn ('Goodbye')
end;
end.
Alternatively the module interface and implementation may be combined as follows:
module DemoMod2; { Alternative method }
export Catch22 = (FooType, SetFoo, GetFoo);
type
FooType = Integer;
procedure SetFoo (f: FooType);
function GetFoo: FooType;
end; { note: this `end' is required here, even if the
module-block below would be empty. }
var
Foo: FooType;
procedure SetFoo;
begin
Foo := f
end;
function GetFoo;
begin
GetFoo := Foo
end;
end.
Either one of the two methods may be used like this:
program ModuleDemo (Output);
import DemoModule;
begin
SetFoo (999);
WriteLn (GetFoo);
end.
program ModDemo2 (Output);
import Catch22 in 'demomod2.pas';
begin
SetFoo (999);
WriteLn (GetFoo);
end.
Somewhat simpler GPC modules are also supported. Please note: This is not supported in the Extended Pascal standard.
This is a simpler module support that does not require exports, imports, module headers etc.
These non-standard simple GPC modules look like the following example. They do not have an export part, do not have a separate module-block, do not use import/export features.
Instead, you have to emulate the exporting/importing yourself using `attribute' and `external name'.
module DemoMod3;
type
FooType = Integer;
var
Foo: FooType;
procedure SetFoo (f: FooType); attribute (name = 'SetFoo');
begin
Foo := f
end;
function GetFoo: FooType; attribute (name = 'GetFoo');
begin
GetFoo := Foo;
end;
end.
program ModDemo3 (Output);
{$L demomod3.pas} { explicitly link module }
{ Manually do the "import" from DemoMod3 }
type
FooType = Integer;
procedure SetFoo (f: FooType); external name 'SetFoo';
function GetFoo: FooType; external name 'GetFoo';
begin
SetFoo (999);
WriteLn (GetFoo)
end.
Module initialization and finalization:
The to begin do module initialization and to end do
module finalization constructs now work on every target.
By the way: The “GPC specific” module definition is almost identical to the PXSC standard. With an additional keyword `global' which puts a declaration into an export interface with the name of the module, it will be the same. @@This is planned.
A generic GNU Pascal unit looks like the following:
unit name;
interface
import_part
interface_part
implementation
implementation_part
initialization_part
end.
The name of the unit should coincide with the name of the file with the extension stripped. (If not, you can tell GPC the file name with `uses foo in 'bar.pas'', see uses.)
The import_part is either empty or contains a `uses' clause to import other units. It may also consist of an ISO-style `import' specification. Note that the implementation part is not preceeded by a second import part in GPC (see import).
The interface_part consists of constant, type, and variable declarations, procedure and function headings which may be freely mixed.
The implementation_part is like the declaration part of a program, but the headers of procedures and functions may be abbreviated: Parameter lists and function results may be omitted for procedures and functions already declared in the interface part.
The initialization_part may be missing, or it may be a `begin' followed by one or more statements, such that the unit has a statement part between this `begin' and the final `end'. Alternatively, a unit may have ISO-style module initializers and finalizers, see to begin do, to end do.
Note that GPC does not yet check whether all interface declarations are resolved in the same unit. The implementation of procedures and functions which are in fact not used may be omitted, and/or procedures and functions may be implemented somewhere else, even in a different language. However, relying on a GPC bug (that will eventually be fixed) is not a good idea, so this is not recommended. Instead, declare such routines as `external'.
A unit exports everything declared in the interface section. The exported interface has the name of the unit and is compatible with Extended Pascal module interfaces since GPC uses the same code to handle both.
As described in Type Declaration, a type declaration part looks like this:
type
type_identifier = type_definition;
...
type_identifier = type_definition;
where the left side is the type declaration and the right one the type definition side. GNU Pascal offers various possibilities to implement highly specialized and problem-specific data types.
An ordinal type is one that can be mapped to a range of whole numbers. It includes integer types, character types, enumerated types and subrange types of them.
A character type is represented by the intrinsic type `Char'
which can hold elements of the operating system's character set
(usually ASCII). Conversion between character types and integer
types is possible with the intrinsic functions Ord and
Chr.
An enumerated type defines a range of elements which are referred to
by identifiers. Conversion from enumerated types to integer types is
possible with the intrinsic function Ord. Conversion from
integer to ordinal types is only possible by type-casting or using
the extended form of `Succ'.
var
Foo: Char; { foo can hold a character }
Num: '0' .. '9'; { Can hold decimal digits, is a subrange type of Char }
Day: (Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
Friday, Saturday, Sunday); { Can hold weekdays }
Ord, Chr, Type Casts
Besides `Integer', GNU Pascal supports a large zoo of integer types. Some of them you will find in other compilers, too, but most are GNU Pascal extensions, introduced for particular needs. Many of these types are synonyms for each other. In total, GPC provides 20 built-in integer types, plus seven families you can play with. (Four of these “families” are signed and unsigned, packed and unpacked subrange types; the others are explained below.)
See also: Subrange Types.
For most purposes, you will always use `Integer', a signed integer type which has the “natural” size of such types for the machine. On most machines GPC runs on, this is a size of 32 bits, so `Integer' usually has a range of `-2147483648..2147483647' (see Integer).
If you need an unsigned integer type, the “natural” choice is `Cardinal', also called `Word'. Like `Integer', it has 32 bits on most machines and thus a range of `0..4294967295' (see Cardinal, Word).
These natural integer types should be your first choice for best performance. For instance on an IA32 CPU operations with `Integer' usually work faster than operations with shorter integer types like `ShortInt' or `ByteInt' (see below).
`Integer', `Cardinal', and `Word' define the three “main branches” of GPC's integer types. You won't always be able to deal with the natural size; sometimes something smaller or longer will be needed. Especially when interfacing with libraries written in other languages such as C, you will need equivalents for their integer types.
The following variants of integer types (plus one Boolean type) are guaranteed to be compatible to the respective types of GNU C as listed below (whereas `Integer', `Cardinal' and `Word' themselves are not guaranteed to be compatible to any given C type). The sizes given, however, are not guaranteed. They are just typical values currently used on some platforms, but they may be actually shorter or longer on any given platform.
| signed | unsigned | also unsigned | GNU C equivalent | size in bits (example)
|
| ByteInt | ByteCard | Byte | [un]signed char | 8
|
| ShortInt | ShortCard | ShortWord | [unsigned] short int | 16
|
| CInteger | CCardinal | CWord | [unsigned] int | 32
|
| MedInt | MedCard | MedWord | [unsigned] long int | 32
|
| LongInt | LongCard | LongWord | [unsigned] long long int | 64
|
| — | SizeType | — | size_t | 32
|
| PtrDiffType | — | — | ptrdiff_t | 32
|
| PtrInt | PtrCard | PtrWord | — | 32
|
| — | CBoolean | — | _Bool, bool | 8
|
Since we don't know whether `LongInt' will always remain the “longest” integer type available – maybe GNU C will get `long long long int', one day, which we will support as `LongLongInt' – we have added the synonym `LongestInt' for the longest available singed integer type, and the same holds for `LongestCard' and `LongestWord'.
In some situations you will need an integer type of a well-defined size. For this purpose, GNU Pascal provides type attributes (see attribute). The type
Integer attribute (Size = 42)
is guaranteed to have a precision of 42 bits. In a realistic context, you will most often give a power of two as the number of bits, and the machine you will need it on will support variables of that size. If this is the case, the specified precision will simultaneously be the amount of storage needed for variables of this type.
In short: If you want to be sure that you have a signed integer with 32 bits width, write `Integer attribute (Size = 32)', not just `Integer' which might be bigger. The same works with unsigned integer types such as `Cardinal' and `Word' and with Boolean types.
This way, you can't get a higher precision than that of `LongestInt' or `LongestCard' (see Main Branch Integer Types). If you need higher precision, you can look at the `GMP' unit (see GMP) which provides integer types with arbitrary precision, but their usage is different from normal integer types.
If you care about ISO compliance, only use `Integer' and subranges of `Integer'.
Some of GPC's non-ISO integer types exist in Borland Pascal, too: `Byte', `ShortInt', `Word', and `LongInt'. The sizes of these types, however, are not the same as in Borland Pascal. Even for `Byte' this is not guaranteed (while probable, though).
When designing GNU Pascal, we thought about compatibility to Borland Pascal. Since GNU Pascal is (at least) a 32-bit compiler, `Integer' must have (at least) 32 bits. But what to do with `Word'? Same size as `Integer' (like in BP) or 16 bits (like in BP)? We decided to make `Word' the “natural-sized” unsigned integer type, thus making it (at least) 32 bits wide. Similarly, we decided to give `LongInt' twice the size of `Integer' (like in BP) rather than making it 32 bits wide (like in BP). So `LongInt' has 64 bits, and `ShortInt' has 16 bits on the IA32 platform.
On the other hand, to increase compatibility to Borland Pascal and Delphi, GPC provides the alias name `Comp' for `LongInt' (64 bits on IA32) and `SmallInt' for `ShortInt' (16 bits on IA32). Note that BP treats `Comp' as a “real” type and allows assignments like `MyCompVar := 42.0'. Since we don't consider this a feature, GPC does not copy this behaviour.
Here is a summary of all integer types defined in GPC. The sizes and ranges are only typical values, valid on some, but not all platforms. Compatibility to GNU C however is guaranteed.
To specify the number of bits definitely, use type attributes, attribute.
program IntegerTypesDemo (Output);
var
ByteVar: Byte;
ShortIntVar: ShortInt;
Foo: MedCard;
Big: LongestInt;
begin
ShortIntVar := 1000;
Big := MaxInt * ShortIntVar;
ByteVar := 127;
Foo := 16#deadbeef
end.
See also: Subrange Types.
GPC has three built-in floating point types to represent real numbers. Each of them is available under two names (for compatibility to other compilers and languages).
For most purposes, you will always use `Real' which is the only one of them that is part of Standard and Extended Pascal. If memory constraints apply, you might want to choose `ShortReal' for larger arrays. On the other hand, if high precision is needed, you can use `LongReal'. When interfacing with libraries written in other languages such as C, you will need the equivalents for their real types.
Note that not all machines support longer floating point types, so `LongReal' is the same as `Real' on these machines. Also, some machines may support a longer type, but not do all arithmetic operations (e.g. the `Sin' function, Sin) in a precision higher than that of `Real'. If you need higher precision, you can look at the `GMP' unit (see GMP) which provides rational and real numbers with arbitrary precision, but their usage is different from normal real types.
The following real types are guaranteed to be compatible to the real types of GNU C. The sizes given, however, are not guaranteed. They are just typical values used on any IEEE compatible floating point hardware, but they may be different on some machines.
| type name | alternative name | GNU C equivalent | size in bits (typically)
|
| ShortReal | Single | float | 32
|
| Real | Double | double | 64
|
| LongReal | Extended | long double | 80
|
There are several ways to use strings in GNU Pascal. One of them is
the use of the intrinsic string type `String' which is a
predefined schema type. The schema discriminant of this type holds
the maximal length, which is of type Integer, so values up to
MaxInt can be specified. For `String', an assignment is
defined. There are many built-in functions and procedures for
comfortable strings handling.
@@ ???? String procedures and functions.
Another way to use strings is to use arrays of type `Char'. For these, an intrinsic assignment is defined as well. Besides, `String' and `Char' are assignment compatible. The preferred way, however, is `String' because of the numerous possibilities for string handling.
Character types are a special case of ordinal types.
Ordinal Types, Chr, Ord, Pred, Succ.
type
enum_type_identifier = (identifier, ..., identifier);
An enumerated type is a a special case of ordinal types and
defines a range of elements which are referred to by
identifiers. Enumerated types are ordered by occurence in the identifier
list. So, they can be used as index types in an array
definition, and it is possible to define subranges of them. Since they are
ordered, they can be compared to one another. The intrinsic function
Ord applied to name_identifier returns the number of occurence
in the identifier list (beginning with zero), Pred and Succ
return the predecessor and successor of name_identifier.
`Boolean' is a special case of an enumerated type.
Ordinal Types, Array Types, Subrange Types, Ord, Boolean, Char, Pred, Succ.
Files are used to store data permanently, normally on hard drives or floppies. There are tree types of files available: text files, typed and untyped files.
Text files are used to store text in them, where typed files are used to store many entries of the same type in them, e.g. addresses. Text files and typed files are accessible by `Read' and `Write' operations and do not need the parameter `BlockSize' in `Reset' or `Rewrite'. On the other hand, untyped files are used to store any type of information in them but you need to use `BlockWrite' or `BlockRead' to store or retrieve data out of this file.
var
F1: Text; { a textfile }
F2: file of Real; { a typed filed used to store real values in it }
F3: File; { an untyped file }
File Routines, Write, Read, BlockRead, BlockWrite, Reset, Rewrite
The intrinsic Boolean represents boolean values, i.e. it can only assume true and false (which are predefined constants). This type corresponds to the enumerated type
type
Boolean = (False, True);
Since it is declared this way, it follows:
Ord (False) = 0
Ord (True) = 1
False < True
There are four intrinsic logical operators. The logical and,
or and not. In Borland Pascal and GNU Pascal, there is
a logical “exclusive or” xor.
Enumerated Types, and, or, not, xor
The intrinsic Pointer Type is a so-called unspecified or typeless pointer (i.e. a pointer which does not point to any type but holds simply a memory address).
GNU Pascal supports Standard Pascal's subrange types:
program SubrangeDemo;
type
MonthInt = 1 .. 12;
Capital = 'A' .. 'Z';
ControlChar = ^A .. ^Z; { `^A' = `Chr (1)' is a BP extension }
begin
end.
Also possible: Subranges of enumerated types:
program EnumSubrangeDemo;
type
{ This is an enumerated type. }
Days = (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun);
{ This is a subrange of `Days'. }
Working = Mon .. Fri;
begin
end.
To increase performance, variables of such a type are aligned in a way which makes them fastest to access by the CPU. As a result, `1 .. 12' occupies 4 bytes of storage on an IA32 CPU.
For the case you want to save storage at the expense of speed, GPC provides a `packed' variant of these as an extension:
program PackedSubrangeDemo;
type
MonthInt = packed 1 .. 12;
begin
end.
A variable of this type occupies the shortest possible (i.e., addressable) space in memory – one byte on an IA32 compatible CPU.
See also: packed.
type
array_type_identifier = array [index_type] of element_type
or
type
array_type_identifier = array [index_type, ..., index_type] of element_type
The reserved word array defines an array type. index_type
has to be an ordinal type, subrange type or an enumerated type, where
several index types, separated by commas, are allowed. element_type
is an arbitrary type. An element of an array is accessed
by array_type_variable [index_number]. The upper and
lower index bounds can be determined by the intrinsic functions High
and Low.
type
IntArray = array [1 .. 20] of Integer;
Foo = array [(Mo, Tu, We, Th, Fr, Sa, Su)] of Char;
Bar = array [0 .. 9, 'a' .. 'z', (Qux, Glork1, Fred)] of Real;
Baz1 = array [1 .. 10] of IntArray;
{ equal (but declared differently): }
Baz2 = array [1 .. 10, 1 .. 20] of Integer;
type
record_type_identifier = record
field_identifier: type_definition;
...
field_identifier: type_definition;
end;
or, with a variant part,
type
record_type_identifier = record
field_identifier: type_definition;
...
field_identifier: type_definition;
case bar: variant_type of
selector: (field_declarations);
selector: (field_declarations);
...
end;
or, without a variant selector field,
type
record_type_identifier = record
field_identifier: type_definition;
...
field_identifier: type_definition;
case variant_type of
selector: (field_declarations);
selector: (field_declarations);
...
end;
The reserved word record defines a structure of fields.
Records can be `packed' to save memory usage at the expense of
speed.
The reserved word `record' and record types are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal. According to ISO Pascal, the variant type must be an identifier. GNU Pascal, like UCSD and Borland Pascal, also allows a subrange here.
A record field is accessed by record_type_variable . field_identifier
See also: packed, case Statement.
GPC supports variant records like in EP and BP. The following construction is not allowed in Extended Pascal, but in BP and GPC:
program BPVariantRecordDemo;
type
PersonRec = record
Age: Integer;
case EyeColor: (Red, Green, Blue, Brown) of
Red, Green : (WearsGlasses: Boolean);
Blue, Brown: (LengthOfLashes: Integer);
end;
begin
end.
In EP, the variant field needs a type identifier, which, of course, also works in GPC:
program EPVariantRecordDemo;
type
EyeColorType = (Red, Green, Blue, Brown);
PersonRec = record
Age: Integer;
case EyeColor: EyeColorType of
Red, Green : (WearsGlasses: Boolean);
Blue, Brown: (LengthOfLashes: Integer);
end;
begin
end.
Schemata are types that depend on one or more variables, called discriminants. They are an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal feature.
type
RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real;
Matrix (n, m: PositiveInteger) = array [1 .. n, 1 .. m] of Integer;
The type `RealArray' in this example is called a Schema with the discriminant `n'.
To declare a variable of such a type, write:
var
Foo: RealArray (42);
The discriminants of every global or local schema variable are initialized at the beginning of the procedure, function or program where the schema variable is declared.
Schema-typed variables “know” about their discriminants. Discriminants can be accessed just like record fields:
program Schema1Demo;
type
PositiveInteger = 1 .. MaxInt;
RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real;
Matrix (n, m: PositiveInteger) = array [1 .. n, 1 .. m] of Integer;
var
Foo: RealArray (42);
begin
WriteLn (Foo.n) { yields 42 }
end.
Schemata may be passed as parameters. While types of schema variables must always have specified discriminants (which may be other variables), formal parameters (by reference or by value) may be of a schema type without specified discriminant. In this, the actual parameter may posses any discriminant. The discriminants of the parameters get their values from the actual parameters.
Also, pointers to schema variables may be declared without a discriminant:
program Schema2Demo;
type
RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real;
RealArrayPtr = ^RealArray;
var
Bar: RealArrayPtr;
begin
end.
When applying `New' to such a pointer, you must specify the intended value of the discriminant as a parameter:
New (Bar, 137)
As a GNU Pascal extension, the above can also be written as
Bar := New (RealArrayPtr, 137)
The allocated variable behaves like any other schema variable:
program Schema3Demo;
type
RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real;
RealArrayPtr = ^RealArray;
var
Bar: RealArrayPtr;
i: Integer;
begin
Bar := New (RealArrayPtr, 137);
for i := 1 to Bar^.n do
Bar^[i] := 42
end.
Since the schema variable “knows” its size, pointers to schemata can be disposed just like other pointers:
Dispose (Bar)
Schemata are not limited to arrays. They can be of any type that normally requires constant values in its definition, for instance subrange types, or records containing arrays etc. (Sets do not yet work.)
References to the schema discriminants are allowed, and the
with statement is also allowed, so one can say:
program SchemaWithDemo;
type
RealArray (n: Integer) = array [1 .. n] of Real;
var
MyArray: RealArray (42);
begin
WriteLn (MyArray.n); { writes 42 }
with MyArray do
WriteLn (n); { writes 42 }
end.
Finally, here is a somewhat exotic example. Here, a `ColoredInteger' behaves just like an ordinary integer, but it has an additional property `Color' which can be accessed like a record field.
program SchemaExoticDemo;
type
ColorType = (Red, Green, Blue);
ColoredInteger (Color: ColorType) = Integer;
var
Foo: ColoredInteger (Green);
begin
Foo := 7;
if Foo.Color = Red then
Inc (Foo, 2)
else
Foo := Foo div 3
end.
An important schema is the predefined `String' schema
(according to Extended Pascal). It has one predefined discriminant
identifier Capacity. GPC implements the String schema
as follows:
type
String (Capacity: Cardinal) = record
Length: 0 .. Capacity;
Chars: packed array [1 .. Capacity + 1] of Char
end;
The Capacity field may be directly referenced by the user,
the Length field is referenced by a predefined string
function Length (Str) and contains the current string length.
Chars contains the chars in the string. The Chars and
Length fields cannot be directly referenced by a user
program.
If a formal value parameter is of type `String' (with or
without discriminant), the actual parameter may be either a
String schema, a fixed string (character array), a single
character, a string literal or a string expression. If the actual
parameter is a `String' schema, it is copied for the parameter
in the usual way. If it is not a schema, a `String' schema is
created automatically, the actual parameter is copied to the new
variable and the Capacity field of the new variable is set to
the length of the actual parameter.
Actual parameters to `var' parameters of type `String' must be `String' schemata, not string literals or character arrays.
program StringDemo (Output);
type
SType = String (10);
SPtr = ^String;
var
Str : SType;
Str2: String (100000);
Str3: String (20) value 'string expression';
DStr: ^String;
ZStr: SPtr;
Len : Integer value 256;
Ch : Char value 'R';
{ `String' accepts any length of strings }
procedure Foo (z: String);
begin
WriteLn ('Capacity: ', z.Capacity);
WriteLn ('Length : ', Length (z));
WriteLn ('Contents: ', z);
end;
{ Another way to use dynamic strings }
procedure Bar (SLen: Integer);
var
LString: String (SLen);
FooStr: type of LString;
begin
LString := 'Hello world!';
Foo (LString);
FooStr := 'How are you?';
Foo (FooStr);
end;
begin
Str := 'KUKKUU';
Str2 := 'A longer string variable';
New (DStr, 1000); { Select the string Capacity with `New' }
DStr^ := 'The maximum length of this is 1000 chars';
New (ZStr, Len);
ZStr^ := 'This should fit here';
Foo (Str);
Foo (Str2);
Foo ('This is a constant string');
Foo ('This is a ' + Str3);
Foo (Ch); { A char parameter to string routine }
Foo (''); { An empty string }
Foo (DStr^);
Foo (ZStr^);
Bar (10000);
end.
In the above example, the predefined procedure New was used
to select the capacity of the strings. Procedure Bar also has
a string whose size depends of the parameter passed to it and
another string whose type will be the same as the type of the first
string, using the type of construct.
All string and character types are compatible as long as the destination string is long enough to hold the source in assignments. If the source string is shorter than the destination, the destination is automatically blank padded if the destination string is not of string schema type.
set_type_identifier = set of set_element_type;
set_type_identifier is a set of elements from set_element_type which is either an ordinal type, an enumerated type or a subrange type. Set element representatives are joined together into a set by brackets:
[set_element, ..., set_element]
`[]' indicates the empty set, which is compatible with all set types. Note: Borland Pascal restricts the maximal set size (i.e. the range of the set element type) to 256, GNU Pascal has no such restriction. The number of elements a set variable is holding can be determined by the intrinsic set function Card (which is a GNU Pascal extension, in Extended Pascal and Borland Pascal you can use SizeOf instead but note the element type size in bytes, then) to the set. There are four intrinsic binary set operations: the union `+', the intersection `*' and the difference `-'. The symmetric difference `><' is an Extended Pascal extension.
pointer_type_identifier = ^type_identifier;
A pointer of the type pointer_type_identifier holds the address at which data of the type type_identifier is situated. Unlike other identifier declarations, where all identifiers in definition part have to be declared before, in a pointer type declaration type_identifier may be declared after pointer_type_identifier. The data pointed to is accessed by `pointer_type_variable^'. To mark an unassigned pointer, the `nil' constant (which stands for “not in list”) has to be assigned to it, which is compatible with all pointer types.
type
ItselfFoo = ^ItselfFoo; { possible but mostly senseless }
PInt = ^Integer; { Pointer to an Integer }
PNode = ^TNode; { Linked list }
TNode = record
Key : Integer;
NextNode: PNode;
end;
var
Foo, Bar: PInt;
begin
Foo := Bar; { Modify address which foo is holding }
Foo^ := 5; { Access data foo is pointing to }
end.
GPC also suports pointers to procedures or function and calls through them. This is a non-standard feature.
program ProcPtrDemo (Output);
type
ProcPtr = ^procedure (i: Integer);
var
PVar: ProcPtr;
procedure WriteInt (i: Integer);
begin
WriteLn ('Integer: ', i : 1)
end;
begin
{ Let PVar point to function WriteInt }
PVar := @WriteInt;
{ Call the function by dereferencing the function pointer }
PVar^ (12345)
end.
See also: Pointer (Intrinsic).
For procedures without a parameter list:
procedure_type_identifier = procedure name_identifier;
or functions:
function_type_identifier =
function name_identifier: function_result_type;
For procedures with a parameter list:
procedure_type_identifier =
procedure name_identifier (parameter_list);
or functions:
function_type_identifier =
function name_identifier (parameter_list): function_result_type;
Procedural types can be used as procedures or functions respectively, but also a value can be assigned to them. Procedural types are a Borland Pascal extension. In Borland Pascal, function_result_type can only be one of these types: ordinal types, real types, pointer types, the intrinsic `String' type. In GNU Pascal every function result type for procedural types is allowed.
BP has procedural and functional types:
type
CompareFunction = function (Key1, Key2: String): Integer;
function Sort (Compare: CompareFunction);
begin
...
end;
Standard Pascal has procedural and functional parameters:
function Sort (function Compare (Key1, Key2: String): Integer);
begin
...
end;
Both ways have pros and cons, e.g. in BP you can save, compare, trade, etc. procedural values, or build arrays of them, while the SP way does not require a type declaration and prevents problems with uninitialized or invalid pointers (which in BP will usually crash the program).
GPC supports both ways. An important feature of Standard Pascal (but not BP) that GPC also supports is the possibility to pass local routines as procedural or functional parameters, even if the called routine is declared far remote. The called routine can then call the passed local routine and it will have access to the original caller's local variables.
program LocalProceduralParameterDemo;
procedure CallProcedure (procedure Proc);
begin
Proc
end;
procedure MainProcedure;
var LocalVariable: Integer;
procedure LocalProcedure;
begin
WriteLn (LocalVariable)
end;
begin
LocalVariable := 42;
CallProcedure (LocalProcedure)
end;
begin
MainProcedure
end.
See also: The Procedure, The Function, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration, Procedure Call.
Object types are used to encapsulate data and methods. Furthermore, they implement a mechanism for inheritance.
A type may be initialized to a value of expression when it is declared, like a variable, as in:
program TypeVarInitDemo;
type
Int10 = Integer value 10;
FooType = Real;
MyType = Char value Pred ('A');
EType = (a, b, c, d, e, f, g) value d;
const
Answer = 42;
var
ii : Int10; { Value of ii set to 10 }
ch : MyType value Pred ('z');
aa : Integer value Answer + 10;
foo: FooType value Sqr (Answer);
e1 : EType; { value set to d }
e2 : EType value g; { value set to g }
begin
end.
Extended Pascal requires the type initializers to be constant expressions. GPC allows any valid expression.
Note, however, that the expressions that affect the size of storage allocated for objects (e.g. the length of arrays) may contain variables only inside functions or procedures.
GPC evaluates the initial values used for the type when an identifier is declared for that type. If a variable is declared with a type-denoter that uses a type-name which already has an initial value the latter initialization has precedence.
@@ GPC does not know how to calculate constant values for math functions in the runtime library at compile time, e.g. `Exp (Sin (2.4567))', so you should not use these kind of expressions in object size expressions. (Extended Pascal allows this.)
GPC supports `restricted' types, defined in Extended Pascal. A value of a restricted type may be passed as a value parameter to a formal parameter possessing its underlying type, or returned as the result of a function. A variable of a restricted type may be passed as a variable parameter to a formal parameter possessing the same type or its underlying type. No other operations, such as accessing a component of a restricted type value or performing arithmetic, are possible.
program RestrictedDemo;
type
UnrestrictedRecord = record
a: Integer;
end;
RestrictedRecord = restricted UnrestrictedRecord;
var
r1: UnrestrictedRecord;
r2: RestrictedRecord;
i: restricted Integer;
k: Integer;
function AccessRestricted (p: UnrestrictedRecord): RestrictedRecord;
var URes: UnrestrictedRecord;
begin
{ The parameter is treated as unrestricted, even though the actual
parameter may be restricted }
URes.a := p.a;
{ It is allowed to assign a function result }
AccessRestricted := URes;
end;
begin
r1.a := 354;
{ Assigning a restricted function result to a restricted variable }
{ @@ Verify if this should really be allowed????? }
r2 := AccessRestricted (r1);
{ Passing a restricted value to unrestricted formal parameter is ok }
r2 := AccessRestricted (r2);
{$ifdef BUG}
{ *** The following statements are not allowed *** }
k := r2.a; { field access (reading) }
r2.a := 100; { field access (writing) }
r1 := r2; { assignment source is restricted }
r2 := r1; { assignment target is restricted }
r1 := AccessRestricted (r2); { assigning a restricted function
result to an unrestricted object }
i := 16#ffff; { assignment target is restricted }
k := i + 2; { arithmetic with restricted value }
{$endif}
end.
Endianness means the order in which the bytes of a value larger than one byte are stored in memory. This affects, e.g., integer values and pointers while, e.g., arrays of single-byte characters are not affected. The GPC `String' schema, however, contains `Capacity' and `Length' fields before the character array. These fields are integer values larger than one byte, so the `String' schema is affected by endianness.
Endianness depends on the hardware, especially the CPU. The most common forms are:
Little-endian machines store the least significant byte on the lowest memory address (the word is stored little-end-first).
E.g., if the 32 bit value $deadbeef is stored on memory
address $1234 on a little-endian machine, the following bytes
will occupy the memory positions:
| Address | Value
|
| $1234 | $ef
|
| $1235 | $be
|
| $1236 | $ad
|
| $1237 | $de
|
Examples for little-endian machines are IA32 and compatible microprocessors and Alpha processors.
Big-endian machines store the most significant byte on the lowest memory address (the word is stored big-end-first).
E.g., if the 32 bit value $deadbeef is stored on memory
address $1234 on a big-endian machine, the following bytes
will occupy the memory positions:
| Address | Value
|
| $1234 | $de
|
| $1235 | $ad
|
| $1236 | $be
|
| $1237 | $ef
|
Examples for big-endian machines are the Sparc and Motorola m68k CPU families and most RISC processors. Big-endian byte order is also used in the Internet protocols.
Note: There are processors which can run in both little-endian and big-endian mode, e.g. the MIPS processors. A single program, however, (unless it uses special machine code instructions) will always run in one endianness.
Under normal circumstances, programs do not need to worry about endianness, the CPU handles it by itself. Endianness becomes important when exchanging data between different machines, e.g. via binary files or over a network. To avoid problems, one has to choose the endianness to use for the data exchange. E.g., the Internet uses big-endian data, and most known data formats have a specified endianness (usually that of the CPU on which the format was originally created). If you define your own binary data format, you're free to choose the endianness to use.
To deal with endianness, GPC predefines the symbol `__BYTES_LITTLE_ENDIAN__' on little-endian machines and `__BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN__' on big-endian machines. Besides, the Run Time System defines the constant `BytesBigEndian' as False on little-endian machines and True on big-endian machines.
There are also the symbols `__BITS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__', `__BITS_BIG_ENDIAN__', `__WORDS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__', `__WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN__' and the constants `BitsBigEndian' and `WordsBigEndian' which concern the order of bits within a byte (e.g., in packed records) or of words within multiword-numbers, but these are usually less important.
The Run Time System also contains a number of routines to convert endianness and to read or write data from/to binary files in a given endianness, independent of the CPU's endianness. These routines are described in the RTS reference (see Run Time System), under `endianness'. The demo program endiandemo.pas contains an example on how to use these routines.
GNU Pascal supports all operators of ISO Pascal and Borland Pascal. In addition, you can define your own operators according to the Pascal-SC (PXSC) syntax.
The following table lists all built-in GNU Pascal operators, ordered by precedence: `<' etc. have the lowest precedence, `not' etc. the highest. As usual, the precedence of operators can be superseded with parentheses.
In an assignment statement, `:=' has lower precedence than all operators. (This is rather obvious from the syntax of assignment statements, and is merely noted for programmers familiar with C where `=' is an operator.)
< = > in <> >= <=
+ - or +< -< +> ->
* / div mod and shl shr xor *< /< *> />
pow ** ><
not @
The Pascal-SC (PXSC) operators `+<', `-<', `+>', `->', `*<', `/<', `*>', and `/>' are not yet implemented into GNU Pascal but may be defined by the user (see below).
GNU Pascal allows the (re-)definition of binary operators according to the Pascal-SC (PXSC) syntax. The following vector addition example illustrates how to do this:
program OperatorDemo;
type
Vector3 = record
x, y, z: Real;
end;
var
a, b, c: Vector3 = (1, 2, 3);
operator + (u, v: Vector3) w: Vector3;
begin
w.x := u.x + v.x;
w.y := u.y + v.y;
w.z := u.z + v.z;
end;
begin
c := a + b
end.
Between the closing parenthesis of the argument list and the result variable (`w' in the above example), GPC allows an optional equal sign. This is not allowed in PXSC, but it is consistent with Extended Pascal's function result variable definitions, where the equal sign is obligatory (but also optional in GPC).
The argument types needn't be equal, and the name of the operator may be an identifier instead of a known symbol. You cannot define new symbols in GPC.
The PXSC operators `+>', `+<', etc. for exact numerical calculations currently are not implemented in GPC, but you can define them. Also, the other real-type operators do not meet the requirements of PXSC; a module which fixes that would be a welcome contribution.
All the following works in GPC:
procedure Foo (protected a, b, c: Integer); { 3 arguments }
procedure Foo (a, b, c, protected: Integer); { 4 arguments }
procedure Foo (a, b, protected, c: Integer); { 4 arguments }
procedure Foo (protected: Integer); { 1 argument }
procedure Foo (var protected: Integer); { 1 argument }
procedure Foo (protected protected: Integer); { 1 argument }
Furthermore, GPC supports const, according to BP, which is
equivalent to either protected or protected var, up to
the compiler's discretion.
A feature of Standard Pascal level 1.
Borland Pascal “open array” formal parameters are implemented into GPC. Within the function body, they have integer type index with lower bound 0.
In constrast to conformant arrays (which are not supported by BP), open arrays allow any ordinal type as the index of the actual parameter (which is useful, e.g., if you want to be able to pass values of any enumeration type). However, they lose information about the lower bound (which is a problem, e.g., if you want to return information to the caller that relates to the actual array index, like the function `IOSelect' in the Run Time System does).
GPC allows the access of parts (“slices”) of strings as defined in Extended Pascal. For example:
program StringSliceDemo;
const
HelloWorld = 'Hello, world!';
begin
WriteLn (HelloWorld[8 .. 12]) { yields `world' }
end.
As an extension, it also allows write access to a string slice:
program SliceWriteDemo;
var
s: String (42) = 'Hello, world!';
begin
s[8 .. 12] := 'folks';
WriteLn (s) { yields `Hello, folks!' }
end.
As a further extension, GPC allows slice access also to non-string arrays. However, the usefulness of this feature is rather limited because of Pascal's strict type checking rules: If you have, e.g., an `array [1 .. 10] of Integer' and take a slice `[1 .. 5]' of it, it will not be compatible to another `array [1 .. 5] of Integer' because distinct array types are not compatible in Pascal, even if they look the same.
However, array slice access can be used in connection with conformant or open array parameters. See the program arrayslicedemo.pas (in the demos directory) for an example.
GPC allows to increment, decrement, compare, and subtract pointers or to use them in `for' loops just like the C language.
GPC implements the address operator @ (a Borland Pascal
extension).
program PointerArithmeticDemo;
var
a: array [1 .. 7] of Char;
p, q: ^Char;
i: Integer;
{$X+} { We need extended syntax for pointer arithmetic }
begin
for p := @a[1] to @a[7] do
p^ := 'x';
p := @a[7];
q := @a[3];
while p > q do
begin
p^ := 'y';
Dec (p)
end;
p := @a[7];
q := @a[3];
i := q - p; { yields 4 }
end.
Incrementing a pointer by one means to increment the address it contains by the size of the variable it is pointing to. For typeless pointers (`Pointer'), the address is incremented by one instead.
Similar things hold when decrementing a pointer.
Subtracting two pointers yields the number of variables pointed to between both pointers, i.e. the difference of the addresses divided by the size of the variables pointed to. The pointers must be of the same type.
In some cases, especially in low-level situations, Pascal's strong typing can be an obstacle. To temporarily circumvent this, GPC defines explicit “type casts” in a Borland Pascal compatible way.
There are two kinds of type casts, value type casts and variable type casts.
Value type casts
To convert a value of one data type into another type, you can use the target type like the name of a function that is called. The value to be converted can be a variable or an expression. Both the value's type and the destination type must be ordinal or pointer types. The ordinal value (extended to pointers to mean the address) is preserved in the cast.
An example:
program TypeCastDemo;
var
Ch: Char;
i: Integer;
begin
i := Integer (Ch)
end.
Another, more complicated, example:
program TypeCst2Demo;
type
CharPtr = ^Char;
CharArray = array [0 .. 99] of Char;
CharArrayPtr = ^CharArray;
var
Foo1, Foo2: CharPtr;
Bar: CharArrayPtr;
{$X+} { We need extended syntax in order to use ``Succ'' on a pointer }
begin
Foo1 := CharPtr (Bar);
Foo2 := CharPtr (Succ (Bar))
end.
However, because of risks involved with type casts, explained below, and because type-casts are non-standard, you should try to avoid type casts whenever possible – and it should be possible in most cases. For instance, the first example above could use the built-in function “Ord” instead of the type cast:
i := Ord (Ch);
The assignments in the second example could be written in the following way without any type casts:
Foo1 := @Bar^[0];
Foo2 := @Bar^[1];
Note: In the case of pointers, a warning is issued if the dereferenced target type requires a bigger alignment than the dereferenced source type (see Alignment).
Variable type casts
It is also possible to temporarily change the type of a variable (more generally, any “lvalue”, i.e. something whose address can be taken), without converting its contents in any way. This is called variable type casting.
The syntax is the same as for value type casting. The type-casted variable is still the same variable (memory location) as the original one, just with a different type. Outside of the type cast, the variable keeps its original type.
There are some important differences between value and variable type casting:
There are cases where a type-cast could be either a value or a variable cast. This is when both types are ordinal or pointer, and of the same size, and the value is an lvalue. Fortunately, in those cases, the results of both forms are the same, since the same ordinal values (or pointer addresses) are represented by the same bit patterns (when of the same size). Therefore, it doesn't matter which form of type-casting is actually used in these cases.
When dealing with objects (see OOP), it is sometimes necessary to cast a polymorphic pointer to an object into a pointer to a more specialized (derived) object (after checking the actual type). However, the `as' operator is a safer approach, so type-casts should be used there only for backward-compatibility (e.g., to BP).
See also: absolute, Alignment, Endianness, OOP, Ord, Chr, Round, Trunc.
GNU Pascal allows multiple object models. The oldest one follows the object model of Borland Pascal 7.0. The BP object extensions are almost fully implemented into GPC. This includes inheritance, virtual and non-virtual methods, constructors, destructors, pointer compatibility, extended `New' syntax (with constructor call and/or as a Boolean function), extended `Dispose' syntax (with destructor call).
The Borland object model is different from the ISO draft, but now we have also partial support of ISO draft (plus the Borland Delphi Object Extensions which are quite similar to the ISO draft). Moreover most of traditional Mac Pascal object model is covered.
The syntax for an object type declaration is as follows:
program ObjectDemo;
type
Str100 = String (100);
FooParentPtr = ^FooParent;
FooPtr = ^Foo;
FooParent = object
constructor Init;
destructor Done; virtual;
procedure Bar (c: Real); virtual;
function Baz (b, a, z: Char) = s: Str100; { not virtual }
end;
Foo = object (FooParent)
x, y: Integer;
constructor Init (a, b: Integer);
destructor Done; virtual;
procedure Bar (c: Real); virtual; { overrides `FooParent.Bar' }
z: Real; { GPC extension: data fields after methods }
function Baz: Boolean; { new function }
end;
constructor FooParent.Init;
begin
WriteLn ('FooParent.Init')
end;
destructor FooParent.Done;
begin
WriteLn ('I''m also done.')
end;
procedure FooParent.Bar (c: Real);
begin
WriteLn ('FooParent.Bar (', c, ')')
end;
function FooParent.Baz (b, a, z: Char) = s: Str100;
begin
WriteStr (s, 'FooParent.Baz (', b, ', ', a, ', ', z, ')')
end;
constructor Foo.Init (a, b: Integer);
begin
inherited Init;
x := a;
y := b;
z := 3.4;
FooParent.Bar (1.7)
end;
destructor Foo.Done;
begin
WriteLn ('I''m done.');
inherited Done
end;
procedure Foo.Bar (c: Real);
begin
WriteLn ('Foo.Bar (', c, ')')
end;
function Foo.Baz: Boolean;
begin
Baz := True
end;
var
Ptr: FooParentPtr;
begin
Ptr := New (FooPtr, Init (2, 3));
Ptr^.Bar (3);
Dispose (Ptr, Done);
New (Ptr, Init);
with Ptr^ do
WriteLn (Baz ('b', 'a', 'z'))
end.
Remarks:
A pointer to `FooParent' may be assigned the address of a `Foo' object. A `FooParent' formal `var' parameter may get a `Foo' object as the actual parameter. In such cases, a call to a `virtual' method calls the child's method, whereas a call to a non-`virtual' method selects the parent's one:
var
MyFooParent: FooParentPtr;
SomeFoo: Foo;
[...]
SomeFoo.Init (4, 2);
MyFooParent := @SomeFoo;
MyFooParent^.bar (3.14); { calls `foo.bar' }
MyFooParent^.baz ('b', 'a', 'z'); { calls `fooParent.baz' }
if SomeFoo.baz then { calls `foo.baz' }
WriteLn ('Baz!');
In a method, an overwritten method of a parent object can be called either prefixing it with the parent type name, or using the keyword `inherited':
procedure Foo.Bar (c: Real);
begin
z := c;
inherited bar (z) { or: FooParent.Bar (z) }
end;
Use `FooParent.bar (z)' if you want to be sure that this method is called, even if somebody decides not to derive `foo' directly from `fooParent' but to have some intermediate object. If you want to call the method `bar' of the immediate parent – whether it be `fooParent' or whatever – use `inherited bar (z)'.
To allocate an object on the heap, use `New' in one of the following manners:
var
MyFoo: FooPtr;
[...]
New (MyFoo, Init (4, 2));
MyFooParent := New (FooPtr, Init (4, 2))
The second possibility has the advantage that `MyFoo' needn't be a `FooPtr' but can also be a `FooParentPtr', i.e. a pointer to an ancestor of `foo'.
Destructors can and should be called within Dispose:
Dispose (MyFooParent, Fini)
GPC, like UCSD Pascal and BP, treats comments beginning with a
`$' immediately following the opening `{' or `(*' as
a compiler directive. As in Borland Pascal, {$...} and
(*$...*) are equivalent. When a single character plus a
`+' or `-' follows, this is also called a compiler switch.
All of these directives are case-insensitive (but some of them have
case-sensitive arguments). Directives are local and can be changed
during one compilation (except include files etc. where this makes
no sense).
In general, compiler directives are compiler-dependent. (E.g., only
the include directive {$I FileName} is common to UCSD and
BP.) Because of BP's popularity, GPC supports all of BP's compiler
directives (and ignores those that are unnecessary on its platforms
– these are those not listed below), but it knows a lot more
directives.
Some BP directives are – of course not by chance – just an
alternative notation for C preprocessor directives. But there are
differences: BP's conditional definitions
(`{$define Foo}') go into another name space than the
program's definitions. Therefore you can define conditionals and
check them via {$ifdef Foo}, but the program will not see
them as an identifier `Foo', so macros do not exist in Borland
Pascal.
GPC does support macros, but disables this feature when the `--no-macros' option or the dialect option `--borland-pascal' or `--delphi' is given, to mimic BP's behaviour. Therefore, the following program will react differently when compiled with GPC either without special options or with, e.g., the `--borland-pascal' option (and in the latter case, it behaves the same as when compiled with BP).
program MacroDemo;
const Foo = 'Borland Pascal';
{$define Foo 'Default'}
begin
WriteLn (Foo)
end.
Of course, you should not rely on such constructs in your programs. To test if the program is compiled with GPC, you can test the `__GPC__' conditional, and to test the dialect used in GPC, you can test the dialect, e.g., with `{$ifopt borland-pascal}'.
In general, almost every GPC specific command line option (see GPC Command Line Options) can be turned into a compiler directive (exceptions are those options that contain directory names, such as `--unit-path', because they refer to the installation on a particular system, and therefore should be set system-wide, rather than in a source file):
--foo {$foo}
--no-foo {$no-foo}
-Wbar {$W bar} { note the space after the `W' }
-Wno-bar {$W no-bar}
The following table lists some such examples as well as all those directives that do not correspond to command-line options or have syntactical alternatives (for convenience and/or BP compatibility).
--[no-]short-circuit $B+ $B- like in Borland Pascal:
$B- means short-circuit Boolean
operators; $B+ complete evaluation
--[no-]io-checking $I+ $I- like in Borland Pascal:
enable/disable I/O checking
--[no-]range-checking $R+ $R- like in Borland Pascal:
enable/disable range checking
--[no-]stack-checking $S+ $S- like in Borland Pascal:
enable/disable stack checking
--[no-]typed-address $T+ $T- like in Borland Pascal:
make the result of the address
operator and the Addr function a
typed or untyped pointer
-W[no-]warnings $W+ $W- enable/disable warnings. Note: in
`--borland-pascal' mode, the
short version is disabled because
$W+/$W- has a different meaning in
Borland Pascal (which can safely be
ignored in GPC), but the long version
is still available.
--[no-]extended-syntax $X+ $X- mostly like in Borland Pascal:
enable/disable extended syntax
(ignore function resuls, operator
definitions, `PChar', pointer
arithmetic, ...)
--borland-pascal disable or warn about GPC features
--extended-pascal not supported by the standard or
--pascal-sc dialect given, do not warn about its
etc. ``dangerous'' features (especially BP).
The dialect can be changed during one
compilation via directives like,
e.g., `{$borland-pascal}'.
{$M Hello!} write message `Hello!' to
standard error during compilation. In
`--borland-pascal' mode, it is
ignored it if only numbers follow
(for compatibility to Borland
Pascal's memory directive)
{$define FOO} like in Borland Pascal:
or define FOO (for conditional compilation)
{$CIDefine FOO} (case-insensitively)
--cidefine=FOO the same on the command line
{$CSDefine FOO} define FOO case-sensitively
-D FOO the same on the command line
or Note: `--define' on the command
--csdefine=FOO line is case-sensitive like in GCC,
or but `{$define}' in the source code
--define=FOO is case-insensitive like in BP
{$define loop while True do} define `loop' to be `while True do'
or as a macro like in C. The name of the
{$CIDefine loop ...} macro is case-insensitive. Note:
Macros are disabled in
`--borland-pascal' mode because BP
doesn't support macros.
--cidefine="loop=..." the same on the command line
{$CSDefine loop ...} define a case-sensitive macro
--csdefine="loop=..." the same on the command line
or
--define="loop=..."
{$I FileName} like in Borland Pascal:
include filename.pas
(the name is converted to lower case)
{$undef FOO} like in Borland Pascal: undefine FOO
{$ifdef FOO} conditional compilation
... (like in Borland Pascal).
{$else} Note: GPC predefines the symbol
... `__GPC__' (with two leading
{$endif} and trailing underscores).
{$include "filename.pas"} include (case-sensitive)
{$include <filename.pas>} the same, but don't search in the
current directory
...and all the other C preprocessor directives.
You also can use the preprocessor directives in C style, e.g. `#include', but this is deprecated because of possible confusion with Borland Pascal style `#42' character constants. Besides, in the Pascal style, e.g. `{$include "foo.bar"}', there may be more than one directive in the same line.
In this section we describe the routines and other declarations that are built into the compiler or part of the Run Time System, sorted by topics.
Extended Pascal treats files quite differently from Borland Pascal. GPC supports both forms, even in mixed ways, and provides many extensions.
@@ A lot missing here
function FileSize (FileName : String) : LongInt;
var
f: bindable file [0 .. MaxInt] of Char;
b: BindingType;
begin
Unbind (f);
b := Binding (f);
b.Name := FileName;
Bind(f, b);
b := Binding(f);
SeekRead (f, 0);
if Empty (f) then
FileSize := 0
else
FileSize := LastPosition (f) + 1;
Unbind(f);
end;
Prospero's Extended Pascal has a bug in this case. Replace the MaxInt in the type definition of f by a sufficiently large integer. GNU Pascal works correct in this case.
Put as
soon as possible and a Get as late as possible. This should
avoid most of the problems sometimes considered to be the most
stupid feature of Pascal. When passing a file buffer as parameter
the buffer is validated when the parameter is passed.
program DirectAccessFileDemo;
type
DFile = file [1 .. 100] of Integer;
var
F: DFile;
P, N: 1 .. 100;
begin
Rewrite (F);
P := 42;
N := 17;
SeekWrite (F, P);
Write (F, N)
end.
The following direct access routines may be applied to a direct access file:
SeekRead (F, N); { Open file in inspection mode, seek to record N }SeekWrite (F, N); { Open file in generation mode, seek to record N }SeekUpdate (F, N); { Open file in update mode, seek to record N }Update (F); { Writes F^, position not changed. F^ kept. }p := Position (F); { Yield the current record number }p := LastPosition (F); { Yield the last record number in file }If the file is open for inspection or update, Get may be applied.
If the file is open for generation or update, Put may be applied.
program AssignTextDemo;
var
t: Text;
Line: String (4096);
begin
Assign (t, 'mytext.txt');
Reset (t);
while not EOF (t) do
begin
ReadLn (t, Line);
WriteLn (Line)
end
end.
GPC supports these routines when applied to files. The compiler will reject binding of other object types.
Only the fields `Bound' and `Name' of the predefined record type `BindingType' are required by Extended Pascal. Additionally, GPC implements some extensions. For the full definition of `BindingType', see BindingType.
The following is an example of binding:
program BindingDemo (Input, Output, f);
var
f: bindable Text;
b: BindingType;
procedure BindFile (var f: Text);
var
b: BindingType;
begin
Unbind (f);
b := Binding (f);
repeat
Write ('Enter a file name: ');
ReadLn (b.Name);
Bind (f, b);
b := Binding (f);
if not b.Bound then
WriteLn ('File not bound -- try again.')
until b.Bound
end;
begin
BindFile (f);
{ Now the file f is bound to an external file. We can use the
implementation defined fields of BindingType to check if the
file exists and is readable, writable or executable. }
b := Binding (f);
Write ('The file ');
if b.Existing then
WriteLn ('exists.')
else
WriteLn ('does not exist.');
Write ('It is ');
if not b.Readable then Write ('not ');
Write ('readable, ');
if not b.Writable then Write ('not ');
Write ('writable and ');
if not b.Executable then Write ('not ');
WriteLn ('executable.')
end.
Note that Prospero's Pascal defaults to creating the file if it does
not exists! You need to use Prospero's local addition of setting
b.Existing to True to work-around this. GPC does not
behave like this.
In the following description, s1 and s2 may be
arbitrary string expressions, s is a variable of string type.
WriteStr (s, write-parameter-list)ReadStr (s1, read-parameter-list)Text files. The semantics is closely modeled after file I/O.
Index (s1, s2)s2 is empty, return 1 else if s1 is empty return 0
else returns the position of s2 in s1 (an integer).
Length (s1)s1 (an integer from 0 .. s1.Capacity).
Trim (s1)s.
SubStr (s1, i)SubStr (s1, i, j)s1 that contains j
characters starting from i. If j is missing, return
all the characters starting from i.
EQ (s1, s2)NE (s1, s2)LT (s1, s2)LE (s1, s2)GT (s1, s2)GE (s1, s2)s1 and s2. Returns
a boolean result. Strings are not padded with spaces.
s1 = s2s1 <> s2s1 < s2s1 <= s2s1 > s2s1 >= s2s1 and s2. Returns a
boolean result. The shorter string is blank padded to length of the
longer one, but only in `--extended-pascal' mode.
GPC supports string catenation with the + operator or the
`Concat' function. All string-types are compatible, so you may
catenate any chars, fixed length strings and variable length
strings.
program ConcatDemo (Input, Output);
var
Ch : Char;
Str : String (100);
Str2: String (50);
FStr: packed array [1 .. 20] of Char;
begin
Ch := '$';
FStr := 'demo'; { padded with blanks }
Write ('Give me some chars to play with: ');
ReadLn (Str);
Str := '^' + 'prefix:' + Str + ':suffix:' + FStr + Ch;
WriteLn (Concat ('Le', 'ng', 'th'), ' = ', Length (Str));
WriteLn (Str)
end.
Note: The length of strings in GPC is limited only by the range of `Integer' (at least 32 bits, i.e., 2 GB, on most platforms), or the available memory, whichever is smaller).
When trying to write programs portable to other EP compilers, it is however safe to assume a limit of about 32 KB. At least Prospero's Extended Pascal compiler limits strings to 32760 bytes. DEC Pascal limits strings to 65535 bytes.
GPC supports access to the command line arguments with the
BP compatible ParamStr and ParamCount functions.
ParamStr[0] is the program name,
ParamStr[1] .. ParamStr[ParamCount] are the arguments.
The program below accesses the command line arguments.
program CommandLineArgumentsDemo (Output);
var
Counter: Integer;
begin
WriteLn ('This program displays command line arguments one per line.');
for Counter := 0 to ParamCount do
WriteLn ('Command line argument #', Counter, ' is `',
ParamStr (Counter), '''')
end.
Besides the standard `New' and `Dispose' routines, GPC
also allows BP style dynamic memory management with GetMem
and FreeMem:
GetMem (MyPtr, 1024);
FreeMem (MyPtr, 1024);
One somehow strange feature of Borland is not supported:
You cannot free parts of a variable with FreeMem, while the
rest is still used and can be freed later by another FreeMem
call:
program PartialFreeMemDemo;
type
Vector = array [0 .. 1023] of Integer;
VecPtr = ^Vector;
var
p, q: VecPtr;
begin
GetMem (p, 1024 * SizeOf (Integer));
q := VecPtr (@p^[512]);
{ ... }
FreeMem (p, 512 * SizeOf (Integer));
{ ... }
FreeMem (q, 512 * SizeOf (Integer));
end.
shl and
shr exist in GPC as well as bitwise and, or,
xor and not for integer values.
2#100101 and (1 shl 5) = 2#100000
GPC also supports and, or, xor and not
as procedures:
program BitOperatorProcedureDemo;
var x: Integer;
begin
x := 7;
and (x, 14); { sets x to 6 }
xor (x, 3); { sets x to 5 }
end.
Inc and Dec exist in GPC.
program IncDecDemo;
var
i: Integer;
c: Char;
begin
Inc (i); { i := i + 1; }
Dec (i, 7); { i := i - 7; }
Inc (c, 3); { c := Succ (c, 3); }
end.
Min, Max:
These are a GNU Pascal extension and work for reals as well as for
ordinal types. Mixing reals and integers is okay, the result is real
then.
@@ A lot of details missing here
+, -, *, / and
unary -, +
pow and **)
Sqr, SqRt, Exp, Ln,
Sin, Cos, ArcSin, ArcCos, ArcTan)
Re, Im and Arg functions
Cmplx or Polar
The following sample programs illustrates most of the Complex
type operations.
program ComplexOperationsDemo (Output);
var
z1, z2: Complex;
Len, Angle: Real;
begin
z1 := Cmplx (2, 1);
WriteLn;
WriteLn ('Complex number z1 is: (', Re (z1) : 1, ',', Im (z1) : 1, ')');
WriteLn;
z2 := Conjugate(z1); { GPC extension }
WriteLn ('Conjugate of z1 is: (', Re (z2) : 1, ',', Im (z2) : 1, ')');
WriteLn;
Len := Abs (z1);
Angle := Arg (z1);
WriteLn ('The polar representation of z1 is: Length=', Len : 1,
', Angle=', Angle : 1);
WriteLn;
z2 := Polar (Len, Angle);
WriteLn ('Converting (Length, Angle) back to (x, y) gives: (',
Re (z2) : 1, ',', Im (z2) : 1, ')');
WriteLn;
WriteLn ('The following operations operate on the complex number z1');
WriteLn;
z2 := ArcTan (z1);
WriteLn ('ArcTan (z1) = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')');
WriteLn;
z2 := z1 ** 3.141;
WriteLn ('z1 ** 3.141 =', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')');
WriteLn;
z2 := Sin (z1);
WriteLn ('Sin (z1) = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')');
WriteLn ('(Cos, Ln, Exp, SqRt and Sqr exist also.)');
WriteLn;
z2 := z1 pow 8;
WriteLn ('z1 pow 8 = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')');
WriteLn;
z2 := z1 pow (-8);
WriteLn ('z1 pow (-8) = (', Re (z2), ', ', Im (z2), ')');
end.
GPC supports Standard Pascal set operations. In addition it supports
the Extended Pascal set operation symmetric difference
(set1 >< set2) operation whose result consists of those
elements which are in exactly one of the operannds.
It also has a function that counts the elements in the set: `a := Card (set1)'.
In the following description, S1 and S2 are variables of set type, s is of the base type of the set.
S1 := S2S1 + S2S1 - S2S1 * S2S1 >< S2S1 = S2True if
S1 has the same elements as S2.
S1 <> S2True if
S1 does not have the same elements as S2.
S1 < S2S2 > S1True if
S1 is a strict subset of S2.
S1 <= S2S2 >= S1True if
S1 is a subset of (or equal to) S2.
s in S1s and a set. Returns
boolean result. True if s is an element of S1.
The following example demonstrates some set operations. The results
of the operations are given in the comments.
program SetOpDemo;
type
TCharSet = set of Char;
var
S1, S2, S3: TCharSet;
Result: Boolean;
begin
S1 := ['a', 'b', 'c'];
S2 := ['c', 'd', 'e'];
S3 := S1 + S2; { S3 = ['a', 'b', 'c', 'd', 'e'] }
S3 := S1 * S2; { S3 = ['c'] }
S3 := S1 - S2; { S3 = ['a', 'b'] }
S3 := S1 >< S2; { S3 = ['a', 'b', 'd', 'e'] }
S1 := ['c', 'd', 'e'];
Result := S1 = S2; { False }
Result := S1 < S2; { False }
Result := S1 <= S2; { True }
S1 := ['c', 'd'];
Result := S1 <> S2; { True }
Result := S2 > S1; { True }
Result := S2 >= S1 { True }
end.
procedure GetTimeStamp (var t: TimeStamp);function Date (t: TimeStamp): packed array [1 .. DateLength] of Char;function Time (t: TimeStamp): packed array [1 .. TimeLength] of Char;DateLength and TimeLength are implementation dependent
constants.
GetTimeStamp (t) fills the record `t' with values. If
they are valid, the Boolean flags are set to True.
TimeStamp is a predefined type in the Extended Pascal
standard. It may be extended in an implementation, and is indeed
extended in GPC. For the full definition of `TimeStamp', see
TimeStamp.
The standardized GNU compiler back-end makes it relatively easy to share libraries between GNU Pascal and other GNU compilers. On Unix-like platforms (not on Dos-like platforms), the GNU compiler back-end usually complies to the standards defined for that system, so communication with other compilers should be easy, too.
In this chapter we discuss how to import libraries written in other languages, and how to import libraries written in GNU Pascal from other languages. While the examples will specialize to compatibility to GNU C, generalization is straightforward if you are familiar with the other language in question.
To use a function written in another language, you need to provide an external declaration for it – either in the program, or in the interface part of a unit, or a module.
Let's say you want to use the following C library from Pascal:
File `callc.c':
#include <unistd.h>
#include "callc.h"
int foo = 1;
void bar (void)
{
sleep (foo);
}
File `callc.h':
/* Actually, we wouldn't need this header file, and could instead
put these prototypes into callc.c, unless we want to use callc.c
also from other C source files. */
extern int foo;
extern void bar (void);
Then your program can look like this:
program CallCDemo;
{$L callc.c} { Or: `callc.o' if you don't have the source }
var
MyFoo: CInteger; external name 'foo';
procedure Bar; external name 'bar';
begin
MyFoo := 42;
Bar
end.
Or, if you want to provide a `CallCUnit' unit:
unit CallCUnit;
interface
var
MyFoo: CInteger; external name 'foo';
procedure Bar; external name 'bar';
implementation
{$L callc.c} { Or: `callc.o' if you don't have the source }
end.
program CallCUDemo;
uses CallCUnit;
begin
MyFoo := 42;
Bar
end.
You can either link your program manually with `callc.o' or put a compiler directive `{$L callc.o}' into your program or unit, and then GPC takes care of correct linking. If you have the source of the C library (you always have it if it is Free Software), you can even write `{$L callc.c}' in the program (like above). Then GPC will also link with callc.o, but in addition GPC will run the C compiler whenever callc.c has changed if `--automake' is given, too.
While it is often convenient, there is no must to give the C function `bar' the name `Bar' in Pascal; you can name it as you like (e.g., the variable `MyFoo' has a C name of `foo' in the example above).
If you omit the `name', the default is the Pascal identifier, converted to lower-case. So, in this example, the `name' could be omitted for `Bar', but not for `MyFoo'.
It is important that data types of both languages are mapped correctly onto each other. C's `int', for instance, translates to GPC's `CInteger', and C's `unsigned long' to `MedCard'. For a complete list of integer types with their C counterparts, see Integer Types.
In some cases it can be reasonable to translate a C pointer parameter to a Pascal `var' parameter. Since const parameters in GPC can be passed by value or by reference internally, possibly depending on the system, `const foo *' parameters to C functions cannot reliably be declared as `const' in Pascal. However, Extended Pascal's `protected var' can be used since this guarantees passing by reference.
Some libraries provide a `main' function and require your program's “main” to be named differently. To achive this with GPC, invoke it with an option `--gpc-main="GPCmain"' (where `GPCmain' is an example how you might want to name the program). You can also write it into your source as a directive `{$gpc-main="GPCmain"}'.
The .o files produced by GPC are in the same format as those of all other GNU compilers, so there is no problem in writing libraries for other languages in Pascal. To use them, you will need to write kind of interface – a header file in C. However there are some things to take into account, especially if your Pascal unit exports objects:
procedure FooBAR; attribute (name = 'FooBAR');
begin
WriteLn ('FooBAR')
end;
This one can be imported from C with `extern void FooBar()'.
type
VMT = record
ObjectSize: PtrInt; { Size of object in bytes }
NegObjectSize: PtrInt; { Negated size }
Methods: array [1 .. n] of procedure;
{ Pointers to the virtual methods. The entries are of the
repective procedure or function types. }
end;
You can call a virtual method of an object from C if you explicitly declare this `struct' and explicitly dereference the `Fun' array. The VMT of an object `FooBAR' is an external (in C sense) variable `vmt_Foobar' internally.
This chapter discusses shortly how to use the Internationalization (I18N) features of GNU Pascal.
You need to have gettext installed. Try to compile demos/gettextdemo.pas. Furthermore, you should download a tool named `pas2po' from http://www.gnu-pascal.org/contrib/eike/.
We would like to translate the messages provided with this simple example different languages (here: German) without touching the source for each language:
program Hello1;
begin
WriteLn ('Hello, World!');
WriteLn ('The answer of the questions is: ', 42)
end.
To do so, we must prepare the source to use gettext:
program Hello2;
uses GPC, Intl;
var s: TString;
begin
Discard (BindTextDomain ('hello2', '/usr/share/locale/'));
Discard (TextDomain ('hello2'));
WriteLn (GetText ('Hello, World!'));
s := FormatString (GetText ('The answer of the questions is %s'), 42);
WriteLn (s)
end.
`BindTextDomain' sets the path to find our message catalogs in the system. This path is system dependent. `TextDomain' tells the program to use this catalog. `GetText' looks up the given string in the catalog and returns a translated string within the current locale settings. `FormatString' replaces some format specifiers with the following argument. `%s' is the first following argument. After this step is done, we do not need to touch the sourcefile any longer. The output of this program is as follows:
Hello, World!
The answer of the questions is 42
There are lots of strings in the above example, but only those surrounded with `GetText' should be translated. We use `pas2po hello2.pas -o hello2.po' to extract the messages. The output is:
# This file was created by pas2po with 'hello2.pas'.
# Please change this file manually.
# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
# Copyright (C) YEAR Free Software Foundation, Inc.
# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
#
#, fuzzy
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2003-04-27 20:48+0200\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=CHARSET\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
#hello2.pas:10
msgid "Hello, World!"
msgstr ""
#hello2.pas:11
msgid "The answer of the questions is %s"
msgstr ""
Now we translate the message ids into German language, and set some needful informations at their appropriate places. The following steps must be repeated for each language we would like to support:
# This file was created by pas2po with 'hello2.pas'.
# Copyright (C) 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
# Eike Lange <eike@g-n-u.de>, 2003.
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: Hello2 1.0\n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2003-04-27 12:00+0200\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2003-04-27 12:06+0200\n"
"Last-Translator: Eike Lange <eike@g-n-u.de>\n"
"Language-Team: de <de@li.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=utf-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
#hello2.pas:10
msgid "Hello, World!"
msgstr "Hallo, Welt!"
#hello2.pas:11
msgid "The answer of the questions is %s"
msgstr "'%s' lautet die Antwort auf die Frage."
Please note that we swapped text and numeric arguments and added some single quotes arround the first argument. We compile the message catalog with `msgfmt -vv hello2.po -o hello2.mo' and install the file hello2.mo at /usr/share/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/ With a german locale setting, the output should be as follows:
Hallo, Welt!
'42' lautet die Antwort auf die Frage.
The topmost path where message catalogs reside is system dependent:
Below is a Pascal source of the declarations in GPC's Run Time System (RTS). A file gpc.pas with the same contents is included in the GPC distribution in a units subdirectory of the directory containing libgcc.a. (To find out the correct directory for your installation, type `gpc --print-file-name=units' on the command line.)
{ This file was generated automatically by make-gpc-pas.
DO NOT CHANGE THIS FILE MANUALLY! }
{ Pascal declarations of the GPC Run Time System that are visible to
each program.
This unit contains Pascal declarations of many RTS routines which
are not built into the compiler and can be called from programs.
Don't copy the declarations from this unit into your programs, but
rather include this unit with a `uses' statement. The reason is
that the internal declarations, e.g. the linker names, may change,
and this unit will be changed accordingly. @@In the future, this
unit might be included into every program automatically, so there
will be no need for a `uses' statement to make the declarations
here available.
Note about `protected var' parameters:
Since `const' parameters in GPC may be passed by value *or* by
reference internally, possibly depending on the system,
`const foo *' parameters to C functions *cannot* reliably be
declared as `const' in Pascal. However, Extended Pascal's
`protected var' can be used since this guarantees passing by
reference.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Authors: Jukka Virtanen <jtv@hut.fi>
Peter Gerwinski <peter@gerwinski.de>
Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
J.J. v.der Heijden <j.j.vanderheijden@student.utwente.nl>
Nicola Girardi <nicola@g-n-u.de>
Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com>
Emil Jerabek <jerabek@math.cas.cz>
Maurice Lombardi <Maurice.Lombardi@ujf-grenoble.fr>
Toby Ewing <ewing@iastate.edu>
Mirsad Todorovac <mtodorov_69@yahoo.com>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ <> 20060325}
{$error
Trying to compile gpc.pas with a non-matching GPC version is likely
to cause problems.
In case you are building the RTS separately from GPC, make sure you
install a current GPC version previously. If you are building GPC
now and this message appears, something is wrong -- if you are
overriding the GCC_FOR_TARGET or GPC_FOR_TARGET make variables, this
might be the problem. If you are cross-building GPC, build and
install a current GPC cross-compiler first, sorry. If that's not the
case, please report it as a bug.
If you are not building GPC or the RTS currently, you might have
installed things in the wrong place, so the compiler and RTS
versions do not match.}
{$endif}
{ Command-line options must not change the layout of RTS types
declared here. }
{$no-pack-struct, maximum-field-alignment 0}
module GPC;
export
GPC = all;
GPC_CP = (ERead { @@ not really, but an empty export doesn't work
} );
GPC_EP = (ERead { @@ not really, but an empty export doesn't work
} );
GPC_BP = (MaxLongInt, ExitCode, ErrorAddr, FileMode, Pos);
GPC_Delphi = (MaxLongInt, Int64, InitProc, EConvertError,
ExitCode, ErrorAddr, FileMode, Pos, SetString,
StringOfChar,
TextFile, AssignFile, CloseFile);
type
GPC_FDR = AnyFile;
{ Pascal declarations of the GPC Run Time System routines that are
implemented in C, from rtsc.pas }
const
{ Maximum size of a variable }
MaxVarSize = MaxInt div 8;
{ If set, characters >= #$80 are assumed to be letters even if the
locale routines don't say so. This is a kludge because some
systems don't have correct non-English locale tables. }
var
FakeHighLetters: Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_FakeHighLetters');
external;
type
PCStrings = ^TCStrings;
TCStrings = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (CString) - 1] of
CString;
Int64 = Integer attribute (Size = 64);
UnixTimeType = LongInt; { This is hard-coded in the compiler. Do
not change here. }
MicroSecondTimeType = LongInt;
FileSizeType = LongInt;
SignedSizeType = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (SizeType));
TSignalHandler = procedure (Signal: CInteger);
StatFSBuffer = record
BlockSize, BlocksTotal, BlocksFree: LongInt;
FilesTotal, FilesFree: CInteger
end;
InternalSelectType = record
Handle: CInteger;
Read, Write, Exception: Boolean
end;
PString = ^String;
{ `Max' so the range of the array does not become invalid for
Count = 0 }
PPStrings = ^TPStrings;
TPStrings (Count: Cardinal) = array [1 .. Max (Count, 1)] of
PString;
GlobBuffer = record
Result: PPStrings;
Internal1: Pointer;
Internal2: PCStrings;
Internal3: CInteger
end;
{ Mathematical routines }
function SinH (x: Real): Real; attribute (const); external
name '_p_SinH';
function CosH (x: Real): Real; attribute (const); external
name '_p_CosH';
function ArcTan2 (y: Real; x: Real): Real; attribute (const);
external name '_p_ArcTan2';
function IsInfinity (x: LongReal): Boolean; attribute (const);
external name '_p_IsInfinity';
function IsNotANumber (x: LongReal): Boolean; attribute (const);
external name '_p_IsNotANumber';
procedure SplitReal (x: LongReal; var Exponent: CInteger; var
Mantissa: LongReal); external name '_p_SplitReal';
{ Character routines }
{ Convert a character to lower case, according to the current
locale. }
function LoCase (ch: Char): Char; attribute (const); external
name '_p_LoCase';
function IsUpCase (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external
name '_p_IsUpCase';
function IsLoCase (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external
name '_p_IsLoCase';
function IsAlpha (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external
name '_p_IsAlpha';
function IsAlphaNum (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const);
external name '_p_IsAlphaNum';
function IsAlphaNumUnderscore (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute
(const); external name '_p_IsAlphaNumUnderscore';
function IsSpace (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const); external
name '_p_IsSpace';
function IsPrintable (ch: Char): Boolean; attribute (const);
external name '_p_IsPrintable';
{ Time routines }
{ Sleep for a given number of seconds. }
procedure Sleep (Seconds: CInteger); external name '_p_Sleep';
{ Sleep for a given number of microseconds. }
procedure SleepMicroSeconds (MicroSeconds: CInteger); external
name '_p_SleepMicroSeconds';
{ Set an alarm timer. }
function Alarm (Seconds: CInteger): CInteger; external
name '_p_Alarm';
{ Convert a Unix time value to broken-down local time.
All parameters except Time may be Null. }
procedure UnixTimeToTime (Time: UnixTimeType; var Year: CInteger;
var Month: CInteger; var Day: CInteger; var Hour: CInteger; var
Minute: CInteger; var Second: CInteger;
var TimeZone: CInteger; var DST:
Boolean; var TZName1: CString; var TZName2: CString); external
name '_p_UnixTimeToTime';
{ Convert broken-down local time to a Unix time value. }
function TimeToUnixTime (Year: CInteger; Month: CInteger; Day:
CInteger; Hour: CInteger; Minute: CInteger; Second: CInteger):
UnixTimeType; external name '_p_TimeToUnixTime';
{ Get the real time. MicroSecond can be Null and is ignored then. }
function GetUnixTime (var MicroSecond: CInteger): UnixTimeType;
external name '_p_GetUnixTime';
{ Get the CPU time used. MicroSecond can be Null and is ignored
then. }
function GetCPUTime (var MicroSecond: CInteger): CInteger; external
name '_p_GetCPUTime';
{ Signal and process routines }
{ Extract information from the status returned by PWait }
function StatusExited (Status: CInteger): Boolean; attribute
(const); external name '_p_StatusExited';
function StatusExitCode (Status: CInteger): CInteger; attribute
(const); external name '_p_StatusExitCode';
function StatusSignaled (Status: CInteger): Boolean; attribute
(const); external name '_p_StatusSignaled';
function StatusTermSignal (Status: CInteger): CInteger; attribute
(const); external name '_p_StatusTermSignal';
function StatusStopped (Status: CInteger): Boolean; attribute
(const); external name '_p_StatusStopped';
function StatusStopSignal (Status: CInteger): CInteger; attribute
(const); external name '_p_StatusStopSignal';
{ Install a signal handler and optionally return the previous
handler. OldHandler and OldRestart may be Null. }
function InstallSignalHandler (Signal: CInteger; Handler:
TSignalHandler; Restart: Boolean; UnlessIgnored: Boolean;
var OldHandler: TSignalHandler; var OldRestart: Boolean): Boolean;
external name '_p_InstallSignalHandler';
{ Block or unblock a signal. }
procedure BlockSignal (Signal: CInteger; Block: Boolean); external
name '_p_BlockSignal';
{ Test whether a signal is blocked. }
function SignalBlocked (Signal: CInteger): Boolean; external
name '_p_SignalBlocked';
{ Sends a signal to a process. Returns True if successful. If Signal
is 0, it doesn't send a signal, but still checks whether it would
be possible to send a signal to the given process. }
function Kill (PID: CInteger; Signal: CInteger): Boolean; external
name '_p_Kill';
{ Constant for WaitPID }
const
AnyChild = -1;
{ Waits for a child process with the given PID (or any child process
if PID = AnyChild) to terminate or be stopped. Returns the PID of
the process. WStatus will contain the status and can be evaluated
with StatusExited etc.. If nothing happened, and Block is False,
the function will return 0, and WStatus will be 0. If an error
occurred (especially on single tasking systems where WaitPID is
not possible), the function will return a negative value, and
WStatus will be 0. }
function WaitPID (PID: CInteger; var WStatus: CInteger; Block:
Boolean): CInteger; external name '_p_WaitPID';
{ Returns the process ID. }
function ProcessID: CInteger; external name '_p_ProcessID';
{ Returns the process group. }
function ProcessGroup: CInteger; external name '_p_ProcessGroup';
{ Returns the real or effective user ID of the process. }
function UserID (Effective: Boolean): CInteger; external
name '_p_UserID';
{ Tries to change the real and/or effective user ID. }
function SetUserID (Real: CInteger; Effective: CInteger): Boolean;
external name '_p_SetUserID';
{ Returns the real or effective group ID of the process. }
function GroupID (Effective: Boolean): CInteger; external
name '_p_GroupID';
{ Tries to change the real and/or effective group ID. }
function SetGroupID (Real: CInteger; Effective: CInteger): Boolean;
external name '_p_SetGroupID';
{ Low-level file routines. Mostly for internal use. }
{ Get information about a file system. }
function StatFS (Path: CString; var Buf: StatFSBuffer): Boolean;
external name '_p_StatFS';
function CStringOpenDir (DirName: CString): Pointer; external
name '_p_CStringOpenDir';
function CStringReadDir (Dir: Pointer): CString; external
name '_p_CStringReadDir';
procedure CStringCloseDir (Dir: Pointer); external
name '_p_CStringCloseDir';
{ Returns the value of the symlink FileName in a CString allocated
from the heap. Returns nil if it is no symlink or the function
is not supported. }
function ReadLink (FileName: CString): CString; external
name '_p_ReadLink';
{ Returns a pointer to a *static* buffer! }
function CStringRealPath (Path: CString): CString; external
name '_p_CStringRealPath';
{ File mode constants that are ORed for BindingType.Mode, ChMod,
CStringChMod and Stat. The values below are valid for all OSs
(as far as supported). If the OS uses different values, they're
converted internally. }
const
fm_SetUID = 8#4000;
fm_SetGID = 8#2000;
fm_Sticky = 8#1000;
fm_UserReadable = 8#400;
fm_UserWritable = 8#200;
fm_UserExecutable = 8#100;
fm_GroupReadable = 8#40;
fm_GroupWritable = 8#20;
fm_GroupExecutable = 8#10;
fm_OthersReadable = 8#4;
fm_OthersWritable = 8#2;
fm_OthersExecutable = 8#1;
{ Constants for Access and OpenHandle }
const
MODE_EXEC = 1 shl 0;
MODE_WRITE = 1 shl 1;
MODE_READ = 1 shl 2;
MODE_FILE = 1 shl 3;
MODE_CREATE = 1 shl 4;
MODE_EXCL = 1 shl 5;
MODE_TRUNCATE = 1 shl 6;
MODE_APPEND = 1 shl 7;
MODE_BINARY = 1 shl 8;
{ Check if a file name is accessible. }
function Access (FileName: CString; Request: CInteger): CInteger;
external name '_p_Access';
{ Get information about a file. Any argument except FileName can
be Null. }
function Stat (FileName: CString; var Size: FileSizeType;
var ATime: UnixTimeType; var MTime: UnixTimeType; var CTime:
UnixTimeType;
var User: CInteger; var Group: CInteger; var Mode: CInteger; var
Device: CInteger; var INode: CInteger; var Links: CInteger;
var SymLink: Boolean; var Dir: Boolean; var Special: Boolean):
CInteger; external name '_p_Stat';
function OpenHandle (FileName: CString; Mode: CInteger): CInteger;
external name '_p_OpenHandle';
function ReadHandle (Handle: CInteger; Buffer: Pointer; Size:
SizeType): SignedSizeType; external name '_p_ReadHandle';
function WriteHandle (Handle: CInteger; Buffer: Pointer; Size:
SizeType): SignedSizeType; external name '_p_WriteHandle';
function CloseHandle (Handle: CInteger): CInteger; external
name '_p_CloseHandle';
procedure FlushHandle (Handle: CInteger); external
name '_p_FlushHandle';
function DupHandle (Src: CInteger; Dest: CInteger): CInteger;
external name '_p_DupHandle';
function SetFileMode (Handle: CInteger; Mode: CInteger; On:
Boolean): CInteger; attribute (ignorable); external
name '_p_SetFileMode';
function CStringRename (OldName: CString; NewName: CString):
CInteger; external name '_p_CStringRename';
function CStringUnlink (FileName: CString): CInteger; external
name '_p_CStringUnlink';
function CStringChDir (FileName: CString): CInteger; external
name '_p_CStringChDir';
function CStringMkDir (FileName: CString): CInteger; external
name '_p_CStringMkDir';
function CStringRmDir (FileName: CString): CInteger; external
name '_p_CStringRmDir';
function UMask (Mask: CInteger): CInteger; attribute (ignorable);
external name '_p_UMask';
function CStringChMod (FileName: CString; Mode: CInteger):
CInteger; external name '_p_CStringChMod';
function CStringChOwn (FileName: CString; Owner: CInteger; Group:
CInteger): CInteger; external name '_p_CStringChOwn';
function CStringUTime (FileName: CString; AccessTime: UnixTimeType;
ModificationTime: UnixTimeType): CInteger; external
name '_p_CStringUTime';
{ Constants for SeekHandle }
const
SeekAbsolute = 0;
SeekRelative = 1;
SeekFileEnd = 2;
{ Seek to a position on a file handle. }
function SeekHandle (Handle: CInteger; Offset: FileSizeType;
Whence: CInteger): FileSizeType; external name '_p_SeekHandle';
function TruncateHandle (Handle: CInteger; Size: FileSizeType):
CInteger; external name '_p_TruncateHandle';
function LockHandle (Handle: CInteger; WriteLock: Boolean; Block:
Boolean): Boolean; external name '_p_LockHandle';
function UnlockHandle (Handle: CInteger): Boolean; external
name '_p_UnlockHandle';
function SelectHandle (Count: CInteger; var Events:
InternalSelectType; MicroSeconds: MicroSecondTimeType): CInteger;
external name '_p_SelectHandle';
{ Constants for MMapHandle and MemoryMap }
const
mm_Readable = 1;
mm_Writable = 2;
mm_Executable = 4;
{ Try to map (a part of) a file to memory. }
function MMapHandle (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType; Access:
CInteger; Shared: Boolean; Handle: CInteger; Offset:
FileSizeType): Pointer; external name '_p_MMapHandle';
{ Unmap a previous memory mapping. }
function MUnMapHandle (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType): CInteger;
external name '_p_MUnMapHandle';
{ Returns the file name of the terminal device that is open on
Handle. Returns nil if (and only if) Handle is not open or not
connected to a terminal. If NeedName is False, it doesn't bother
to search for the real name and just returns DefaultName if it
is a terminal and nil otherwise. DefaultName is also returned if
NeedName is True, Handle is connected to a terminal, but the
system does not provide information about the real file name. }
function GetTerminalNameHandle (Handle: CInteger; NeedName:
Boolean; DefaultName: CString): CString; external
name '_p_GetTerminalNameHandle';
{ System routines }
{ Sets the process group of Process (or the current one if Process
is 0) to ProcessGroup (or its PID if ProcessGroup is 0). Returns
True if successful. }
function SetProcessGroup (Process: CInteger; ProcessGroup:
CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_SetProcessGroup';
{ Sets the process group of a terminal given by Terminal (as a file
handle) to ProcessGroup. ProcessGroup must be the ID of a process
group in the same session. Returns True if successful. }
function SetTerminalProcessGroup (Handle: CInteger; ProcessGroup:
CInteger): Boolean; external name '_p_SetTerminalProcessGroup';
{ Returns the process group of a terminal given by Terminal (as a
file handle), or -1 on error. }
function GetTerminalProcessGroup (Handle: CInteger): CInteger;
external name '_p_GetTerminalProcessGroup';
{ Set the standard input's signal generation, if it is a terminal. }
procedure SetInputSignals (Signals: Boolean); external
name '_p_SetInputSignals';
{ Get the standard input's signal generation, if it is a terminal. }
function GetInputSignals: Boolean; external
name '_p_GetInputSignals';
{ Internal routines }
{ Returns system information if available. Fields not available will
be set to nil. }
procedure CStringSystemInfo (var SysName: CString; var NodeName:
CString; var Release: CString; var Version: CString; var Machine:
CString; var DomainName: CString); external
name '_p_CStringSystemInfo';
{ Returns the path of the running executable *if possible*. }
function CStringExecutablePath (Buffer: CString): CString; external
name '_p_CStringExecutablePath';
{ Sets ErrNo to the value of `errno' and returns the description
for this error. May return nil if not supported! ErrNo may be
Null (then only the description is returned). }
function CStringStrError (var ErrNo: CInteger): CString; external
name '_p_CStringStrError';
{ Mathematical routines, from math.pas }
function Ln1Plus (x: Real) = y: Real; attribute (const, name
= '_p_Ln1Plus'); external;
{ String handling routines (lower level), from string1.pas }
{ TString is a string type that is used for function results and
local variables, as long as undiscriminated strings are not
allowed there. The default size of 2048 characters should be
enough for file names on any system, but can be changed when
necessary. It should be at least as big as MAXPATHLEN. }
const
MaxLongInt = High (LongInt);
TStringSize = 2048;
SpaceCharacters = [' ', #9];
NewLine = "\n"; { the separator of lines within a string }
LineBreak = {$if defined (__OS_DOS__) and not defined (__CYGWIN__)
and not defined (__MSYS__)}
"\r\n"
{$else}
"\n"
{$endif}; { the separator of lines within a file }
type
TString = String (TStringSize);
TStringBuf = packed array [0 .. TStringSize] of Char;
CharSet = set of Char;
Str64 = String (64);
TInteger2StringBase = Cardinal(2) .. Cardinal(36);
TInteger2StringWidth = 0 .. High (TString);
var
NumericBaseDigits: array [0 .. 35] of Char; attribute (const, name
= '_p_NumericBaseDigits'); external;
NumericBaseDigitsUpper: array [0 .. 35] of Char; attribute (const,
name = '_p_NumericBaseDigitsUpper'); external;
CParamCount: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CParamCount');
external;
CParameters: PCStrings; attribute (name = '_p_CParameters');
external;
function MemCmp (const s1, s2; Size: SizeType): CInteger;
external name 'memcmp';
function MemComp (const s1, s2; Size: SizeType): CInteger;
external name 'memcmp';
function MemCompCase (const s1, s2; Size: SizeType): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_MemCompCase'); external;
procedure UpCaseString (var s: String); attribute (name
= '_p_UpCaseString'); external;
procedure LoCaseString (var s: String); attribute (name
= '_p_LoCaseString'); external;
function UpCaseStr (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_UpCaseStr'); external;
function LoCaseStr (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_LoCaseStr'); external;
function StrEqualCase (const s1, s2: String): Boolean; attribute
(name = '_p_StrEqualCase'); external;
function Pos (const SubString, s: String): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_Pos'); external;
function PosChar (const ch: Char; const s: String):
Integer; attribute (name = '_p_PosChar'); external;
function LastPos (const SubString, s: String): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_LastPos'); external;
function PosCase (const SubString, s: String): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_PosCase'); external;
function LastPosCase (const SubString, s: String): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_LastPosCase'); external;
function CharPos (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String):
Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CharPos'); external;
function LastCharPos (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String):
Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastCharPos'); external;
function PosFrom (const SubString, s: String; From:
Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_PosFrom'); external;
function LastPosTill (const SubString, s: String; Till:
Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastPosTill'); external;
function PosFromCase (const SubString, s: String; From:
Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_PosFromCase'); external;
function LastPosTillCase (const SubString, s: String; Till:
Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastPosTillCase');
external;
function CharPosFrom (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String;
From: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CharPosFrom');
external;
function LastCharPosTill (const Chars: CharSet; const s: String;
Till: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_LastCharPosTill');
external;
function IsPrefix (const Prefix, s: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_IsPrefix'); external;
function IsSuffix (const Suffix, s: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_IsSuffix'); external;
function IsPrefixCase (const Prefix, s: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_IsPrefixCase'); external;
function IsSuffixCase (const Suffix, s: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_IsSuffixCase'); external;
function CStringLength (Src: CString): SizeType; attribute
(inline, name = '_p_CStringLength'); external;
function CStringEnd (Src: CString): CString; attribute
(inline, name = '_p_CStringEnd'); external;
function CStringNew (Src: CString): CString; attribute
(name = '_p_CStringNew'); external;
function CStringComp (s1, s2: CString): Integer; attribute
(name = '_p_CStringComp'); external;
function CStringCaseComp (s1, s2: CString): Integer; attribute
(name = '_p_CStringCaseComp'); external;
function CStringLComp (s1, s2: CString; MaxLen: SizeType):
Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CStringLComp'); external;
function CStringLCaseComp (s1, s2: CString; MaxLen: SizeType):
Integer; attribute (name = '_p_CStringLCaseComp'); external;
function CStringCopy (Dest, Source: CString): CString;
attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringCopy'); external;
function CStringCopyEnd (Dest, Source: CString): CString;
attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringCopyEnd'); external;
function CStringLCopy (Dest, Source: CString; MaxLen:
SizeType): CString; attribute (ignorable, name
= '_p_CStringLCopy'); external;
function CStringMove (Dest, Source: CString; Count:
SizeType): CString; attribute (ignorable, name
= '_p_CStringMove'); external;
function CStringCat (Dest, Source: CString): CString;
attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_CStringCat'); external;
function CStringLCat (Dest, Source: CString; MaxLen:
SizeType): CString; attribute (ignorable, name
= '_p_CStringLCat'); external;
function CStringChPos (Src: CString; ch: Char): CString;
attribute (inline, name = '_p_CStringChPos'); external;
function CStringLastChPos (Src: CString; ch: Char): CString;
attribute (inline, name = '_p_CStringLastChPos'); external;
function CStringPos (s, SubString: CString): CString;
attribute (name = '_p_CStringPos'); external;
function CStringLastPos (s, SubString: CString): CString;
attribute (name = '_p_CStringLastPos'); external;
function CStringCasePos (s, SubString: CString): CString;
attribute (name = '_p_CStringCasePos'); external;
function CStringLastCasePos (s, SubString: CString): CString;
attribute (name = '_p_CStringLastCasePos'); external;
function CStringUpCase (s: CString): CString; attribute (name
= '_p_CStringUpCase'); external;
function CStringLoCase (s: CString): CString; attribute (name
= '_p_CStringLoCase'); external;
function CStringIsEmpty (s: CString): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_CStringIsEmpty'); external;
function NewCString (const Source: String): CString;
attribute (name = '_p_NewCString'); external;
function CStringCopyString (Dest: CString; const Source: String):
CString; attribute (name = '_p_CStringCopyString'); external;
procedure CopyCString (Source: CString; var Dest: String);
attribute (name = '_p_CopyCString'); external;
function NewString (const s: String) = Result: PString;
attribute (name = '_p_NewString'); external;
procedure DisposeString (p: PString); external name '_p_Dispose';
procedure SetString (var s: String; Buffer: PChar; Count:
Integer); attribute (name = '_p_SetString'); external;
function StringOfChar (ch: Char; Count: Integer) = s: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_StringOfChar'); external;
procedure TrimLeft (var s: String); attribute (name
= '_p_TrimLeft'); external;
procedure TrimRight (var s: String); attribute (name
= '_p_TrimRight'); external;
procedure TrimBoth (var s: String); attribute (name
= '_p_TrimBoth'); external;
function TrimLeftStr (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_TrimLeftStr'); external;
function TrimRightStr (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_TrimRightStr'); external;
function TrimBothStr (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_TrimBothStr'); external;
function LTrim (const s: String) = Result: TString;
external name '_p_TrimLeftStr';
function GetStringCapacity (const s: String): Integer; attribute
(name = '_p_GetStringCapacity'); external;
{ A shortcut for a common use of WriteStr as a function }
function Integer2String (i: Integer) = s: Str64; attribute (name
= '_p_Integer2String'); external;
{ Convert integer n to string in base Base. }
function Integer2StringBase (n: LongestInt; Base:
TInteger2StringBase): TString; attribute (name
= '_p_Integer2StringBase'); external;
{ Convert integer n to string in base Base, with sign, optionally in
uppercase representation and with printed base, padded with
leading zeroes between `[<Sign>]<Base>#' and the actual digits to
specified Width. }
function Integer2StringBaseExt (n: LongestInt; Base:
TInteger2StringBase; Width: TInteger2StringWidth; Upper: Boolean;
PrintBase: Boolean): TString; attribute (name
= '_p_Integer2StringBaseExt'); external;
{ String handling routines (higher level), from string2.pas }
type
PChars0 = ^TChars0;
TChars0 = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (Char) - 1] of Char;
PPChars0 = ^TPChars0;
TPChars0 = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (PChars0) - 1] of
PChars0;
PChars = ^TChars;
TChars = packed array [1 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (Char)] of Char;
{ Under development. Interface subject to change.
Use with caution. }
{ When a const or var AnyString parameter is passed, internally
these records are passed as const parameters. Value AnyString
parameters are passed like value string parameters. }
ConstAnyString = record
Length: Integer;
Chars: PChars
end;
{ Capacity is the allocated space (used internally). Count is the
actual number of environment strings. The CStrings array
contains the environment strings, terminated by a nil pointer,
which is not counted in Count. @CStrings can be passed to libc
routines like execve which expect an environment (see
GetCEnvironment). }
PEnvironment = ^TEnvironment;
TEnvironment (Capacity: Integer) = record
Count: Integer;
CStrings: array [1 .. Capacity + 1] of CString
end;
var
Environment: PEnvironment; attribute (name = '_p_Environment');
external;
{ Get an environment variable. If it does not exist, GetEnv returns
the empty string, which can't be distinguished from a variable
with an empty value, while CStringGetEnv returns nil then. Note,
Dos doesn't know empty environment variables, but treats them as
non-existing, and does not distinguish case in the names of
environment variables. However, even under Dos, empty environment
variables and variable names with different case can now be set
and used within GPC programs. }
function GetEnv (const EnvVar: String): TString; attribute (name
= '_p_GetEnv'); external;
function CStringGetEnv (EnvVar: CString): CString; attribute (name
= '_p_CStringGetEnv'); external;
{ Sets an environment variable with the name given in VarName to the
value Value. A previous value, if any, is overwritten. }
procedure SetEnv (const VarName, Value: String); attribute (name
= '_p_SetEnv'); external;
{ Un-sets an environment variable with the name given in VarName. }
procedure UnSetEnv (const VarName: String); attribute (name
= '_p_UnSetEnv'); external;
{ Returns @Environment^.CStrings, converted to PCStrings, to be
passed to libc routines like execve which expect an environment. }
function GetCEnvironment: PCStrings; attribute (name
= '_p_GetCEnvironment'); external;
type
FormatStringTransformType = ^function (const Format: String):
TString;
var
FormatStringTransformPtr: FormatStringTransformType; attribute
(name = '_p_FormatStringTransformPtr'); external;
{ Runtime error and signal handling routines, from error.pas }
const
EAssert = 306;
EAssertString = 307;
EOpen = 405;
EMMap = 408;
ERead = 413;
EWrite = 414;
EWriteReadOnly = 422;
ENonExistentFile = 436;
EOpenRead = 442;
EOpenWrite = 443;
EOpenUpdate = 444;
EReading = 464;
EWriting = 466;
ECannotWriteAll = 467;
ECannotFork = 600;
ECannotSpawn = 601;
EProgramNotFound = 602;
EProgramNotExecutable = 603;
EPipe = 604;
EPrinterRead = 610;
EIOCtl = 630;
EConvertError = 875;
ELibraryFunction = 952;
EExitReturned = 953;
RuntimeErrorExitValue = 42;
var
{ Error number (after runtime error) or exit status (after Halt)
or 0 (during program run and after succesful termination). }
ExitCode: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_ExitCode'); external;
{ Contains the address of the code where a runtime occurred, nil
if no runtime error occurred. }
ErrorAddr: Pointer; attribute (name = '_p_ErrorAddr'); external;
{ Error message }
ErrorMessageString: TString; attribute (name
= '_p_ErrorMessageString'); external;
{ String parameter to some error messages, *not* the text of the
error message (the latter can be obtained with
GetErrorMessage). }
InOutResString: PString; attribute (name = '_p_InOutResString');
external;
{ Optional libc error string to some error messages. }
InOutResCErrorString: PString; attribute (name
= '_p_InOutResCErrorString'); external;
RTSErrorFD: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_ErrorFD'); external;
RTSErrorFileName: PString; attribute (name = '_p_ErrorFileName');
external;
function GetErrorMessage (n: Integer): CString;
attribute (name = '_p_GetErrorMessage'); external;
procedure RuntimeError (n: Integer); attribute
(noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeError'); external;
procedure RuntimeErrorErrNo (n: Integer); attribute
(noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeErrorErrNo'); external;
procedure RuntimeErrorInteger (n: Integer; i: MedInt);
attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeErrorInteger'); external;
procedure RuntimeErrorCString (n: Integer; s: CString);
attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_RuntimeErrorCString'); external;
procedure InternalError (n: Integer); attribute
(noreturn, name = '_p_InternalError'); external;
procedure InternalErrorInteger (n: Integer; i: MedInt);
attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_InternalErrorInteger'); external;
procedure InternalErrorCString (n: Integer; s: CString);
attribute (noreturn, name = '_p_InternalErrorCString'); external;
procedure RuntimeWarning (Message: CString);
attribute (name = '_p_RuntimeWarning'); external;
procedure RuntimeWarningInteger (Message: CString; i:
MedInt); attribute (name = '_p_RuntimeWarningInteger'); external;
procedure RuntimeWarningCString (Message: CString; s:
CString); attribute (name = '_p_RuntimeWarningCString'); external;
procedure IOError (n: Integer; ErrNoFlag:
Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_IOError'); external;
procedure IOErrorInteger (n: Integer; i: MedInt;
ErrNoFlag: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_IOErrorInteger'); external;
procedure IOErrorCString (n: Integer; s: CString;
ErrNoFlag: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_IOErrorCString'); external;
function GetIOErrorMessage = Res: TString; attribute (name
= '_p_GetIOErrorMessage'); external;
procedure CheckInOutRes; attribute (name = '_p_CheckInOutRes');
external;
{ Registers a procedure to be called to restore the terminal for
another process that accesses the terminal, or back for the
program itself. Used e.g. by the CRT unit. The procedures must
allow for being called multiple times in any order, even at the
end of the program (see the comment for RestoreTerminal). }
procedure RegisterRestoreTerminal (ForAnotherProcess: Boolean;
procedure Proc); attribute (name = '_p_RegisterRestoreTerminal');
external;
{ Unregisters a procedure registered with RegisterRestoreTerminal.
Returns False if the procedure had not been registered, and True
if it had been registered and was unregistered successfully. }
function UnregisterRestoreTerminal (ForAnotherProcess: Boolean;
procedure Proc): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_UnregisterRestoreTerminal'); external;
{ Calls the procedures registered by RegisterRestoreTerminal. When
restoring the terminal for another process, the procedures are
called in the opposite order of registration. When restoring back
for the program, they are called in the order of registration.
`RestoreTerminal (True)' will also be called at the end of the
program, before outputting any runtime error message. It can also
be used if you want to write an error message and exit the program
(especially when using e.g. the CRT unit). For this purpose, to
avoid side effects, call RestoreTerminal immediately before
writing the error message (to StdErr, not to Output!), and then
exit the program (e.g. with Halt). }
procedure RestoreTerminal (ForAnotherProcess: Boolean); attribute
(name = '_p_RestoreTerminal'); external;
procedure AtExit (procedure Proc); attribute (name = '_p_AtExit');
external;
function ReturnAddr2Hex (p: Pointer) = s: TString; attribute (name
= '_p_ReturnAddr2Hex'); external;
{ This function is used to write error messages etc. It does not use
the Pascal I/O system here because it is usually called at the
very end of a program after the Pascal I/O system has been shut
down. }
function WriteErrorMessage (const s: String; StdErrFlag: Boolean):
Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_WriteErrorMessage'); external;
procedure SetReturnAddress (Address: Pointer); attribute (name
= '_p_SetReturnAddress'); external;
procedure RestoreReturnAddress; attribute (name
= '_p_RestoreReturnAddress'); external;
{ Returns a description for a signal }
function StrSignal (Signal: Integer) = Res: TString; attribute
(name = '_p_StrSignal'); external;
{ Installs some signal handlers that cause runtime errors on certain
signals. This procedure runs only once, and returns immediately
when called again (so you can't use it to set the signals again if
you changed them meanwhile). @@Does not work on all systems (since
the handler might have too little stack space). }
procedure InstallDefaultSignalHandlers; attribute (name
= '_p_InstallDefaultSignalHandlers'); external;
var
{ Signal actions }
SignalDefault: TSignalHandler; attribute (const); external
name '_p_SIG_DFL';
SignalIgnore : TSignalHandler; attribute (const); external
name '_p_SIG_IGN';
SignalError : TSignalHandler; attribute (const); external
name '_p_SIG_ERR';
{ Signals. The constants are set to the signal numbers, and
are 0 for signals not defined. }
{ POSIX signals }
SigHUp : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGHUP';
SigInt : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGINT';
SigQuit : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGQUIT';
SigIll : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGILL';
SigAbrt : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGABRT';
SigFPE : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGFPE';
SigKill : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGKILL';
SigSegV : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGSEGV';
SigPipe : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPIPE';
SigAlrm : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGALRM';
SigTerm : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTERM';
SigUsr1 : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGUSR1';
SigUsr2 : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGUSR2';
SigChld : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGCHLD';
SigCont : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGCONT';
SigStop : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGSTOP';
SigTStp : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTSTP';
SigTTIn : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTTIN';
SigTTOu : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTTOU';
{ Non-POSIX signals }
SigTrap : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGTRAP';
SigIOT : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGIOT';
SigEMT : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGEMT';
SigBus : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGBUS';
SigSys : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGSYS';
SigStkFlt: Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_SIGSTKFLT';
SigUrg : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGURG';
SigIO : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGIO';
SigPoll : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPOLL';
SigXCPU : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGXCPU';
SigXFSz : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGXFSZ';
SigVTAlrm: Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_SIGVTALRM';
SigProf : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPROF';
SigPwr : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGPWR';
SigInfo : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGINFO';
SigLost : Integer; attribute (const); external name '_p_SIGLOST';
SigWinCh : Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_SIGWINCH';
{ Signal subcodes (only used on some systems, -1 if not used) }
FPEIntegerOverflow : Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_FPE_INTOVF_TRAP';
FPEIntegerDivisionByZero: Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_FPE_INTDIV_TRAP';
FPESubscriptRange : Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_FPE_SUBRNG_TRAP';
FPERealOverflow : Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_FPE_FLTOVF_TRAP';
FPERealDivisionByZero : Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_FPE_FLTDIV_TRAP';
FPERealUnderflow : Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_FPE_FLTUND_TRAP';
FPEDecimalOverflow : Integer; attribute (const); external
name '_p_FPE_DECOVF_TRAP';
{ Routines called implicitly by the compiler. }
procedure GPC_Assert (Condition: Boolean; const Message: String);
attribute (name = '_p_Assert'); external;
function ObjectTypeIs (Left, Right: PObjectType): Boolean;
attribute (const, name = '_p_ObjectTypeIs'); external;
procedure ObjectTypeAsError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_ObjectTypeAsError'); external;
procedure DisposeNilError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_DisposeNilError'); external;
procedure CaseNoMatchError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_CaseNoMatchError'); external;
procedure DiscriminantsMismatchError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_DiscriminantsMismatchError'); external;
procedure NilPointerError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_NilPointerError'); external;
procedure InvalidPointerError (p: Pointer); attribute (noreturn,
name = '_p_InvalidPointerError'); external;
procedure InvalidObjectError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_InvalidObjectError'); external;
procedure RangeCheckError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_RangeCheckError'); external;
procedure IORangeCheckError; attribute (name
= '_p_IORangeCheckError'); external;
procedure SubrangeError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_SubrangeError'); external;
procedure ModRangeError; attribute (noreturn, name
= '_p_ModRangeError'); external;
{ Pointer checking with `--pointer-checking-user-defined' }
procedure DefaultValidatePointer (p: Pointer); attribute (name
= '_p_DefaultValidatePointer'); external;
type
ValidatePointerType = ^procedure (p: Pointer);
var
ValidatePointerPtr: ValidatePointerType; attribute (name
= '_p_ValidatePointerPtr'); external;
{ Time and date routines, from time.pas }
const
InvalidYear = -MaxInt;
var
{ DayOfWeekName is a constant and therefore does not respect the
locale. Therefore, it's recommended to use FormatTime instead. }
DayOfWeekName: array [0 .. 6] of String [9]; attribute (const,
name = '_p_DayOfWeekName'); external;
{ MonthName is a constant and therefore does not respect the
locale. Therefore, it's recommended to use FormatTime instead. }
MonthName: array [1 .. 12] of String [9]; attribute (const, name
= '_p_MonthName'); external;
function GetDayOfWeek (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_GetDayOfWeek'); external;
function GetDayOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_GetDayOfYear'); external;
function GetSundayWeekOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_GetSundayWeekOfYear'); external;
function GetMondayWeekOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_GetMondayWeekOfYear'); external;
procedure GetISOWeekOfYear (Day, Month, Year: Integer; var ISOWeek,
ISOWeekYear: Integer); attribute (name = '_p_GetISOWeekOfYear');
external;
procedure UnixTimeToTimeStamp (UnixTime: UnixTimeType; var
aTimeStamp: TimeStamp); attribute (name
= '_p_UnixTimeToTimeStamp'); external;
function TimeStampToUnixTime (protected var aTimeStamp: TimeStamp):
UnixTimeType; attribute (name = '_p_TimeStampToUnixTime');
external;
function GetMicroSecondTime: MicroSecondTimeType; attribute (name
= '_p_GetMicroSecondTime'); external;
{ Is the year a leap year? }
function IsLeapYear (Year: Integer): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_IsLeapYear'); external;
{ Returns the length of the month, taking leap years into account. }
function MonthLength (Month, Year: Integer): Integer; attribute
(name = '_p_MonthLength'); external;
{ Formats a TimeStamp value according to a Format string. The format
string can contain date/time items consisting of `%', followed by
the specifiers listed below. All characters outside of these items
are copied to the result unmodified. The specifiers correspond to
those of the C function strftime(), including POSIX.2 and glibc
extensions and some more extensions. The extensions are also
available on systems whose strftime() doesn't support them.
The following modifiers may appear after the `%':
`_' The item is left padded with spaces to the given or default
width.
`-' The item is not padded at all.
`0' The item is left padded with zeros to the given or default
width.
`/' The item is right trimmed if it is longer than the given
width.
`^' The item is converted to upper case.
`~' The item is converted to lower case.
After zero or more of these flags, an optional width may be
specified for padding and trimming. It must be given as a decimal
number (not starting with `0' since `0' has a meaning of its own,
see above).
Afterwards, the following optional modifiers may follow. Their
meaning is locale-dependent, and many systems and locales just
ignore them.
`E' Use the locale's alternate representation for date and time.
In a Japanese locale, for example, `%Ex' might yield a date
format based on the Japanese Emperors' reigns.
`O' Use the locale's alternate numeric symbols for numbers. This
modifier applies only to numeric format specifiers.
Finally, exactly one of the following specifiers must appear. The
padding rules listed here are the defaults that can be overriden
with the modifiers listed above.
`a' The abbreviated weekday name according to the current locale.
`A' The full weekday name according to the current locale.
`b' The abbreviated month name according to the current locale.
`B' The full month name according to the current locale.
`c' The preferred date and time representation for the current
locale.
`C' The century of the year. This is equivalent to the greatest
integer not greater than the year divided by 100.
`d' The day of the month as a decimal number (`01' .. `31').
`D' The date using the format `%m/%d/%y'. NOTE: Don't use this
format if it can be avoided. Things like this caused Y2K
bugs!
`e' The day of the month like with `%d', but padded with blanks
(` 1' .. `31').
`F' The date using the format `%Y-%m-%d'. This is the form
specified in the ISO 8601 standard and is the preferred form
for all uses.
`g' The year corresponding to the ISO week number, but without
the century (`00' .. `99'). This has the same format and
value as `y', except that if the ISO week number (see `V')
belongs to the previous or next year, that year is used
instead. NOTE: Don't use this format if it can be avoided.
Things like this caused Y2K bugs!
`G' The year corresponding to the ISO week number. This has the
same format and value as `Y', except that if the ISO week
number (see `V') belongs to the previous or next year, that
year is used instead.
`h' The abbreviated month name according to the current locale.
This is the same as `b'.
`H' The hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock
(`00' .. `23').
`I' The hour as a decimal number, using a 12-hour clock
(`01' .. `12').
`j' The day of the year as a decimal number (`001' .. `366').
`k' The hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock like `H',
but padded with blanks (` 0' .. `23').
`l' The hour as a decimal number, using a 12-hour clock like `I',
but padded with blanks (` 1' .. `12').
`m' The month as a decimal number (`01' .. `12').
`M' The minute as a decimal number (`00' .. `59').
`n' A single newline character.
`p' Either `AM' or `PM', according to the given time value; or
the corresponding strings for the current locale. Noon is
treated as `PM' and midnight as `AM'.
`P' Either `am' or `pm', according to the given time value; or
the corresponding strings for the current locale, printed in
lowercase characters. Noon is treated as `pm' and midnight as
`am'.
`Q' The fractional part of the second. This format has special
effects on the modifiers. The width, if given, determines the
number of digits to output. Therefore, no actual clipping or
trimming is done. However, if padding with spaces is
specified, any trailing (i.e., right!) zeros are converted to
spaces, and if "no padding" is specified, they are removed.
The default is "padding with zeros", i.e. trailing zeros are
left unchanged. The digits are cut when necessary without
rounding (otherwise, the value would not be consistent with
the seconds given by `S' and `s'). Note that GPC's TimeStamp
currently provides for microsecond resolution, so there are
at most 6 valid digits (which is also the default width), any
further digits will be 0 (but if TimeStamp will ever change,
this format will be adjusted). However, the actual resolution
provided by the operating system via GetTimeStamp etc. may be
far lower (e.g., ~1/18s under Dos).
`r' The complete time using the AM/PM format of the current
locale.
`R' The hour and minute in decimal numbers using the format
`%H:%M'.
`s' Unix time, i.e. the number of seconds since the epoch, i.e.,
since 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC. Leap seconds are not counted
unless leap second support is available.
`S' The seconds as a decimal number (`00' .. `60').
`t' A single tab character.
`T' The time using decimal numbers using the format `%H:%M:%S'.
`u' The day of the week as a decimal number (`1' .. `7'), Monday
being `1'.
`U' The week number of the current year as a decimal number
(`00' .. `53'), starting with the first Sunday as the first
day of the first week. Days preceding the first Sunday in the
year are considered to be in week `00'.
`V' The ISO 8601:1988 week number as a decimal number
(`01' .. `53'). ISO weeks start with Monday and end with
Sunday. Week `01' of a year is the first week which has the
majority of its days in that year; this is equivalent to the
week containing the year's first Thursday, and it is also
equivalent to the week containing January 4. Week `01' of a
year can contain days from the previous year. The week before
week `01' of a year is the last week (`52' or `53') of the
previous year even if it contains days from the new year.
`w' The day of the week as a decimal number (`0' .. `6'), Sunday
being `0'.
`W' The week number of the current year as a decimal number
(`00' .. `53'), starting with the first Monday as the first
day of the first week. All days preceding the first Monday in
the year are considered to be in week `00'.
`x' The preferred date representation for the current locale, but
without the time.
`X' The preferred time representation for the current locale, but
with no date.
`y' The year without a century as a decimal number
(`00' .. `99'). This is equivalent to the year modulo 100.
NOTE: Don't use this format if it can be avoided. Things like
this caused Y2K bugs!
`Y' The year as a decimal number, using the Gregorian calendar.
Years before the year `1' are numbered `0', `-1', and so on.
`z' RFC 822/ISO 8601:1988 style numeric time zone (e.g., `-0600'
or `+0100'), or nothing if no time zone is determinable.
`Z' The time zone abbreviation (empty if the time zone can't be
determined).
`%' (i.e., an item `%%') A literal `%' character. }
function FormatTime (const Time: TimeStamp; const Format: String) =
Res: TString; attribute (name = '_p_FormatTime'); external;
{ Pseudo random number generator, from random.pas }
type
RandomSeedType = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32);
RandomizeType = ^procedure;
SeedRandomType = ^procedure (Seed: RandomSeedType);
RandRealType = ^function: LongestReal;
RandIntType = ^function (MaxValue: LongestCard): LongestCard;
procedure SeedRandom (Seed: RandomSeedType); attribute (name
= '_p_SeedRandom'); external;
var
RandomizePtr : RandomizeType; attribute (name
= '_p_RandomizePtr'); external;
SeedRandomPtr: SeedRandomType; attribute (name
= '_p_SeedRandomPtr'); external;
RandRealPtr : RandRealType; attribute (name = '_p_RandRealPtr');
external;
RandIntPtr : RandIntType; attribute (name = '_p_RandIntPtr');
external;
{ File name routines, from fname.pas }
{ Define constants for different systems:
OSDosFlag: flag to indicate whether the target system is
Dos
QuotingCharacter: the character used to quote wild cards and
other special characters (#0 if not available)
PathSeparator: the separator of multiple paths, e.g. in the
PATH environment variable
DirSeparator: the separator of the directories within a full
file name
DirSeparators: a set of all possible directory and drive name
separators
ExtSeparator: the separator of a file name extension
DirRoot: the name of the root directory
DirSelf: the name of a directory in itself
DirParent: the name of the parent directory
MaskNoStdDir: a file name mask that matches all names except
the standard directories DirSelf and DirParent
NullDeviceName: the full file name of the null device
TtyDeviceName: the full file name of the current Tty
ConsoleDeviceName: the full file name of the system console. On
Dos systems, this is the same as the Tty, but
on systems that allow remote login, this is a
different thing and may reach a completely
different user than the one running the
program, so use it with care.
EnvVarCharsFirst: the characters accepted at the beginning of the
name of an environment variable without quoting
EnvVarChars: the characters accepted in the name of an
environment variable without quoting
PathEnvVar: the name of the environment variable which
(usually) contains the executable search path
ShellEnvVar: the name of the environment variable which
(usually) contains the path of the shell
executable (see GetShellPath)
ShellExecCommand: the option to the (default) shell to execute
the command specified in the following argument
(see GetShellPath)
ConfigFileMask: a mask for the option file name as returned by
ConfigFileName
FileNamesCaseSensitive:
flag to indicate whether file names are case
sensitive }
const
UnixShellEnvVar = 'SHELL';
UnixShellExecCommand = '-c';
{$ifdef __OS_DOS__}
{$if defined (__CYGWIN__) or defined(__MSYS__)}
{$define __POSIX_WIN32__}
{$endif}
const
OSDosFlag = True;
QuotingCharacter = #0;
PathSeparator = {$ifdef __POSIX_WIN32__} ':' {$else} ';'
{$endif};
DirSeparator = '\';
DirSeparators = [':', '\', '/'];
ExtSeparator = '.';
DirRoot = '\';
DirSelf = '.';
DirParent = '..';
MaskNoStdDir = '{*,.[^.]*,..?*}';
NullDeviceName = 'nul';
TtyDeviceName = 'con';
ConsoleDeviceName = 'con';
EnvVarCharsFirst = ['A' .. 'Z', 'a' .. 'z', '_'];
EnvVarChars = EnvVarCharsFirst + ['0' .. '9'];
PathEnvVar = 'PATH';
ShellEnvVar = 'COMSPEC';
ShellExecCommand = '/c';
ConfigFileMask = '*.cfg';
FileNamesCaseSensitive = False;
{$else}
const
OSDosFlag = False;
QuotingCharacter = '\';
PathSeparator = ':';
DirSeparator = '/';
DirSeparators = ['/'];
ExtSeparator = '.';
DirRoot = '/';
DirSelf = '.';
DirParent = '..';
MaskNoStdDir = '{*,.[^.]*,..?*}';
NullDeviceName = '/dev/null';
TtyDeviceName = '/dev/tty';
ConsoleDeviceName = '/dev/console';
EnvVarCharsFirst = ['A' .. 'Z', 'a' .. 'z', '_'];
EnvVarChars = EnvVarCharsFirst + ['0' .. '9'];
PathEnvVar = 'PATH';
ShellEnvVar = UnixShellEnvVar;
ShellExecCommand = UnixShellExecCommand;
ConfigFileMask = '.*';
FileNamesCaseSensitive = True;
{$endif}
const
WildCardChars = ['*', '?', '[', ']'];
FileNameSpecialChars = (WildCardChars + SpaceCharacters +
['{', '}', '$', QuotingCharacter]) - DirSeparators;
type
DirPtr = Pointer;
{ Convert ch to lower case if FileNamesCaseSensitive is False, leave
it unchanged otherwise. }
function FileNameLoCase (ch: Char): Char; attribute (name
= '_p_FileNameLoCase'); external;
{ Change a file name to use the OS dependent directory separator }
function Slash2OSDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_Slash2OSDirSeparator'); external;
{ Change a file name to use '/' as directory separator }
function OSDirSeparator2Slash (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_OSDirSeparator2Slash'); external;
{ Like Slash2OSDirSeparator for CStrings. *Note*: overwrites the
CString }
function Slash2OSDirSeparator_CString (s: CString): CString;
attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_Slash2OSDirSeparator_CString');
external;
{ Like OSDirSeparator2Slash for CStrings. *Note*: overwrites the
CString }
function OSDirSeparator2Slash_CString (s: CString): CString;
attribute (ignorable, name = '_p_OSDirSeparator2Slash_CString');
external;
{ Add a DirSeparator to the end of s, if there is not already one
and s denotes an existing directory }
function AddDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_AddDirSeparator'); external;
{ Like AddDirSeparator, but also if the directory does not exist }
function ForceAddDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_ForceAddDirSeparator'); external;
{ Remove all trailing DirSeparators from s, if there are any, as
long as removing them doesn't change the meaning (i.e., they don't
denote the root directory. }
function RemoveDirSeparator (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_RemoveDirSeparator'); external;
{ Returns the current directory using OS dependent directory
separators }
function GetCurrentDirectory: TString; attribute (name
= '_p_GetCurrentDirectory'); external;
{ Returns a directory suitable for storing temporary files using OS
dependent directory separators. If found, the result always ends
in DirSeparator. If no suitable directory is found, an empty
string is returned. }
function GetTempDirectory: TString; attribute (name
= '_p_GetTempDirectory'); external;
{ Returns a non-existing file name in the directory given. If the
directory doesn't exist or the Directory name is empty, an I/O
error is raised, and GetTempFileNameInDirectory returns the empty
string. }
function GetTempFileNameInDirectory (const Directory: String) =
Result: TString; attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_GetTempFileNameInDirectory'); external;
{ Returns a non-existing file name in GetTempDirectory. If no temp
directory is found, i.e. GetTempDirectory returns the empty
string, an I/O error is raised, and GetTempFileName returns the
empty string as well. }
function GetTempFileName: TString; attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_GetTempFileName'); external;
{ The same as GetTempFileName, but returns a CString allocated from
the heap. }
function GetTempFileName_CString: CString; attribute (iocritical,
name = '_p_GetTempFileName_CString'); external;
{ Returns True if the given file name is an existing plain file }
function FileExists (const aFileName: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_FileExists'); external;
{ Returns True if the given file name is an existing directory }
function DirectoryExists (const aFileName: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_DirectoryExists'); external;
{ Returns True if the given file name is an existing file, directory
or special file (device, pipe, socket, etc.) }
function PathExists (const aFileName: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_PathExists'); external;
{ If a file of the given name exists in one of the directories given
in DirList (separated by PathSeparator), returns the full path,
otherwise returns an empty string. If aFileName already contains
an element of DirSeparators, returns Slash2OSDirSeparator
(aFileName) if it exists. }
function FSearch (const aFileName, DirList: String): TString;
attribute (name = '_p_FSearch'); external;
{ Like FSearch, but only find executable files. Under Dos, if not
found, the function tries appending '.com', '.exe', '.bat' and
`.cmd' (the last one only if $COMSPEC points to a `cmd.exe'), so
you don't have to specify these extensions in aFileName (and with
respect to portability, it might be preferable not to do so). }
function FSearchExecutable (const aFileName, DirList: String) =
Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_FSearchExecutable');
external;
{ Replaces all occurrences of `$FOO' and `~' in s by the value of
the environment variables FOO or HOME, respectively. If a variable
is not defined, the function returns False, and s contains the
name of the undefined variable (or the empty string if the
variable name is invalid, i.e., doesn't start with a character
from EnvVarCharsFirst). Otherwise, if all variables are found, s
contains the replaced string, and True is returned. }
function ExpandEnvironment (var s: String): Boolean; attribute
(name = '_p_ExpandEnvironment'); external;
{ Expands the given path name to a full path name. Relative paths
are expanded using the current directory, and occurrences of
DirSelf and DirParent are resolved. Under Dos, the result is
converted to lower case and a trailing ExtSeparator (except in a
trailing DirSelf or DirParent) is removed, like Dos does. If the
directory, i.e. the path without the file name, is invalid, the
empty string is returned. }
function FExpand (const Path: String): TString; attribute
(name = '_p_FExpand'); external;
{ Like FExpand, but unquotes the directory before expanding it, and
quotes WildCardChars again afterwards. Does not check if the
directory is valid (because it may contain wild card characters).
Symlinks are expanded only in the directory part, not the file
name. }
function FExpandQuoted (const Path: String): TString; attribute
(name = '_p_FExpandQuoted'); external;
{ FExpands Path, and then removes the current directory from it, if
it is a prefix of it. If OnlyCurDir is set, the current directory
will be removed only if Path denotes a file in, not below, it. }
function RelativePath (const Path: String; OnlyCurDir, Quoted:
Boolean) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_RelativePath');
external;
{ Is aFileName a UNC filename? (Always returns False on non-Dos
systems.) }
function IsUNC (const aFileName: String): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_IsUNC'); external;
{ Splits a file name into directory, name and extension. Each of
Dir, BaseName and Ext may be Null. }
procedure FSplit (const Path: String; var Dir, BaseName, Ext:
String); attribute (name = '_p_FSplit'); external;
{ Functions that extract one or two of the parts from FSplit.
DirFromPath returns DirSelf + DirSeparator if the path contains no
directory. }
function DirFromPath (const Path: String) = Dir: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_DirFromPath'); external;
function NameFromPath (const Path: String) = BaseName: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_NameFromPath'); external;
function ExtFromPath (const Path: String) = Ext: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_ExtFromPath'); external;
function NameExtFromPath (const Path: String): TString; attribute
(name = '_p_NameExtFromPath'); external;
{ Start reading a directory. If successful, a pointer is returned
that can be used for subsequent calls to ReadDir and finally
CloseDir. On failure, an I/O error is raised and (in case it is
ignored) nil is returned. }
function OpenDir (const DirName: String) = Res: DirPtr; attribute
(iocritical, name = '_p_OpenDir'); external;
{ Reads one entry from the directory Dir, and returns the file name.
On errors or end of directory, the empty string is returned. }
function ReadDir (Dir: DirPtr): TString; attribute (name
= '_p_ReadDir'); external;
{ Closes a directory opened with OpenDir. }
procedure CloseDir (Dir: DirPtr); attribute (name = '_p_CloseDir');
external;
{ Returns the first position of a non-quoted character of CharSet in
s, or 0 if no such character exists. }
function FindNonQuotedChar (Chars: CharSet; const s: String; From:
Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FindNonQuotedChar');
external;
{ Returns the first occurence of SubString in s that is not quoted
at the beginning, or 0 if no such occurence exists. }
function FindNonQuotedStr (const SubString, s: String; From:
Integer): Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FindNonQuotedStr');
external;
{ Does a string contain non-quoted wildcard characters? }
function HasWildCards (const s: String): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_HasWildCards'); external;
{ Does a string contain non-quoted wildcard characters, braces or
spaces? }
function HasWildCardsOrBraces (const s: String): Boolean; attribute
(name = '_p_HasWildCardsOrBraces'); external;
{ Insert QuotingCharacter into s before any special characters }
function QuoteFileName (const s: String; const SpecialCharacters:
CharSet) = Result: TString; attribute (name = '_p_QuoteFileName');
external;
{ Remove QuotingCharacter from s }
function UnQuoteFileName (const s: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_UnQuoteFileName'); external;
{ Splits s at non-quoted spaces and expands non-quoted braces like
bash does. The result and its entries should be disposed after
usage, e.g. with DisposePPStrings. }
function BraceExpand (const s: String) = Result: PPStrings;
attribute (name = '_p_BraceExpand'); external;
{ Dispose of a PPStrings array as well as the strings it contains.
If you want to keep the strings (by assigning them to other string
pointers), you should instead free the PPStrings array with
`Dispose'. }
procedure DisposePPStrings (Strings: PPStrings); attribute (name
= '_p_DisposePPStrings'); external;
{ Tests if a file name matches a shell wildcard pattern (?, *, []) }
function FileNameMatch (const Pattern, FileName: String): Boolean;
attribute (name = '_p_FileNameMatch'); external;
{ FileNameMatch with BraceExpand }
function MultiFileNameMatch (const Pattern, FileName: String):
Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_MultiFileNameMatch'); external;
{ File name globbing }
{ GlobInit is implied by Glob and MultiGlob, not by GlobOn and
MultiGlobOn. GlobOn and MultiGlobOn must be called after GlobInit,
Glob or MultiGlob. MultiGlob and MultiGlobOn do brace expansion,
Glob and GlobOn do not. GlobFree frees the memory allocated by the
globbing functions and invalidates the results in Buf. It should
be called after globbing. }
procedure GlobInit (var Buf: GlobBuffer); attribute (name
= '_p_GlobInit'); external;
procedure Glob (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String);
attribute (name = '_p_Glob'); external;
procedure GlobOn (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String);
attribute (name = '_p_GlobOn'); external;
procedure MultiGlob (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String);
attribute (name = '_p_MultiGlob'); external;
procedure MultiGlobOn (var Buf: GlobBuffer; const Pattern: String);
attribute (name = '_p_MultiGlobOn'); external;
procedure GlobFree (var Buf: GlobBuffer); attribute (name
= '_p_GlobFree'); external;
type
TPasswordEntry = record
UserName, RealName, Password, HomeDirectory, Shell: PString;
UID, GID: Integer
end;
PPasswordEntries = ^TPasswordEntries;
TPasswordEntries (Count: Integer) = array [1 .. Max (1, Count)] of
TPasswordEntry;
{ Finds a password entry by user name. Returns True if found, False
otherwise. }
function GetPasswordEntryByName (const UserName: String; var Entry:
TPasswordEntry) = Res: Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_GetPasswordEntryByName'); external;
{ Finds a password entry by UID. Returns True if found, False
otherwise. }
function GetPasswordEntryByUID (UID: Integer; var Entry:
TPasswordEntry) = Res: Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_GetPasswordEntryByUID'); external;
{ Returns all password entries, or nil if none found. }
function GetPasswordEntries = Res: PPasswordEntries; attribute
(name = '_p_GetPasswordEntries'); external;
{ Dispose of a TPasswordEntry. }
procedure DisposePasswordEntry (Entry: TPasswordEntry); attribute
(name = '_p_DisposePasswordEntry'); external;
{ Dispose of a PPasswordEntries. }
procedure DisposePasswordEntries (Entries: PPasswordEntries);
attribute (name = '_p_DisposePasswordEntries'); external;
{ Returns the mount point (Unix) or drive (Dos) which is part of the
given path. If the path does not contain any (i.e., is a relative
path), an empty string is returned. Therefore, if you want to get
the mount point or drive in any case, apply `FExpand' or
`RealPath' to the argument. }
function GetMountPoint (const Path: String) = Result: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_GetMountPoint'); external;
type
TSystemInfo = record
OSName,
OSRelease,
OSVersion,
MachineType,
HostName,
DomainName: TString
end;
{ Returns system information if available. Fields not available will
be empty. }
function SystemInfo = Res: TSystemInfo; attribute (name
= '_p_SystemInfo'); external;
{ Returns the path to the shell (as the result) and the option that
makes it execute the command specified in the following argument
(in `Option'). Usually these are the environment value of
ShellEnvVar, and ShellExecCommand, but on Dos systems, the
function will first try UnixShellEnvVar, and UnixShellExecCommand
because ShellEnvVar will usually point to command.com, but
UnixShellEnvVar can point to bash which is usually a better choice
when present. If UnixShellEnvVar is not set, or the shell given
does not exist, it will use ShellEnvVar, and ShellExecCommand.
Option may be Null (in case you want to invoke the shell
interactively). }
function GetShellPath (var Option: String) = Res: TString;
attribute (name = '_p_GetShellPath'); external;
{ Returns the path of the running executable. *Note*: On most
systems, this is *not* guaranteed to be the full path, but often
just the same as `ParamStr (0)' which usually is the name given on
the command line. Only on some systems with special support, it
returns the full path when `ParamStr (0)' doesn't. }
function ExecutablePath: TString; attribute (name
= '_p_ExecutablePath'); external;
{ Returns a file name suitable for a global (system-wide) or local
(user-specific) configuration file, depending on the Global
parameter. The function does not guarantee that the file name
returned exists or is readable or writable.
In the following table, the base name `<base>' is given with the
BaseName parameter. If it is empty, the base name is the name of
the running program (as returned by ExecutablePath, without
directory and extension. `<prefix>' (Unix only) stands for the
value of the Prefix parameter (usual values include '', '/usr' and
'/usr/local'). `<dir>' (Dos only) stands for the directory where
the running program resides. `$foo' stands for the value of the
environment variable `foo'.
Global Local
Unix: <prefix>/etc/<base>.conf $HOME/.<base>
DJGPP: $DJDIR\etc\<base>.ini $HOME\<base>.cfg
<dir>\<base>.ini <dir>\<base>.cfg
Other $HOME\<base>.ini $HOME\<base>.cfg
Dos: <dir>\<base>.ini <dir>\<base>.cfg
As you see, there are two possibilities under Dos. If the first
file exists, it is returned. Otherwise, if the second file exists,
that is returned. If none of them exists (but the program might
want to create a file), if the environment variable (DJDIR or
HOME, respectively) is set, the first file name is returned,
otherwise the second one. This rather complicated scheme should
give the most reasonable results for systems with or without DJGPP
installed, and with or without already existing config files. Note
that DJDIR is always set on systems with DJGPP installed, while
HOME is not. However, it is easy for users to set it if they want
their config files in a certain directory rather than with the
executables. }
function ConfigFileName (const Prefix, BaseName: String; Global:
Boolean): TString; attribute (name = '_p_ConfigFileName');
external;
{ Returns a directory name suitable for global, machine-independent
data. The function garantees that the name returned ends with a
DirSeparator, but does not guarantee that it exists or is
readable or writable.
Note: If the prefix is empty, it is assumed to be '/usr'. (If you
really want /share, you could pass '/' as the prefix, but that's
very uncommon.)
Unix: <prefix>/share/<base>/
DJGPP: $DJDIR\share\<base>\
<dir>\
Other $HOME\<base>\
Dos: <dir>\
About the symbols used above, and the two possibilities under Dos,
see the comments for ConfigFileName. }
function DataDirectoryName (const Prefix, BaseName: String):
TString; attribute (name = '_p_DataDirectoryName'); external;
{ Executes a command line. Reports execution errors via the IOResult
mechanism and returns the exit status of the executed program.
Execute calls RestoreTerminal with the argument True before and
False after executing the process, ExecuteNoTerminal does not. }
function Execute (const CmdLine: String): Integer; attribute
(iocritical, name = '_p_Execute'); external;
function ExecuteNoTerminal (const CmdLine: String): Integer;
attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ExecuteNoTerminal'); external;
{ File handling routines, from files.pas }
type
TextFile = Text;
TOpenMode = (fo_None, fo_Reset, fo_Rewrite, fo_Append,
fo_SeekRead, fo_SeekWrite, fo_SeekUpdate);
PAnyFile = ^AnyFile;
TOpenProc = procedure (var PrivateData; Mode: TOpenMode);
TSelectFunc = function (var PrivateData; Writing: Boolean):
Integer; { called before SelectHandle, must return a file handle
}
TSelectProc = procedure (var PrivateData; var ReadSelect,
WriteSelect, ExceptSelect: Boolean); { called before and after
SelectHandle }
TReadFunc = function (var PrivateData; var Buffer; Size:
SizeType): SizeType;
TWriteFunc = function (var PrivateData; const Buffer; Size:
SizeType): SizeType;
TFileProc = procedure (var PrivateData);
TFlushProc = TFileProc;
TCloseProc = TFileProc;
TDoneProc = TFileProc;
{ Flags that can be `or'ed into FileMode. The default value of
FileMode is FileMode_Reset_ReadWrite. The somewhat confusing
numeric values are meant to be compatible to BP (as far as
BP supports them). }
const
{ Allow writing to binary files opened with Reset }
FileMode_Reset_ReadWrite = 2;
{ Do not allow reading from files opened with Rewrite }
FileMode_Rewrite_WriteOnly = 4;
{ Do not allow reading from files opened with Extend }
FileMode_Extend_WriteOnly = 8;
{ Allow writing to text files opened with Reset }
FileMode_Text_Reset_ReadWrite = $100;
var
FileMode: Integer; attribute (name = '_p_FileMode'); external;
{ Get the external name of a file }
function FileName (protected var f: GPC_FDR): TString; attribute
(name = '_p_FileName'); external;
procedure IOErrorFile (n: Integer; protected var f: GPC_FDR;
ErrNoFlag: Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_IOErrorFile'); external;
procedure GetBinding (protected var f: GPC_FDR; var b: BindingType);
attribute (name = '_p_GetBinding'); external;
procedure ClearBinding (var b: BindingType); attribute (name
= '_p_ClearBinding'); external;
{ TFDD interface @@ Subject to change! Use with caution! }
procedure AssignTFDD (var f: GPC_FDR;
aOpenProc: TOpenProc;
aSelectFunc: TSelectFunc;
aSelectProc: TSelectProc;
aReadFunc: TReadFunc;
aWriteFunc: TWriteFunc;
aFlushProc: TFlushProc;
aCloseProc: TCloseProc;
aDoneProc: TDoneProc;
aPrivateData: Pointer); attribute (name
= '_p_AssignTFDD'); external;
procedure SetTFDD (var f: GPC_FDR;
aOpenProc: TOpenProc;
aSelectFunc: TSelectFunc;
aSelectProc: TSelectProc;
aReadFunc: TReadFunc;
aWriteFunc: TWriteFunc;
aFlushProc: TFlushProc;
aCloseProc: TCloseProc;
aDoneProc: TDoneProc;
aPrivateData: Pointer); attribute (name
= '_p_SetTFDD'); external;
{ Any parameter except f may be Null }
procedure GetTFDD (var f: GPC_FDR;
var aOpenProc: TOpenProc;
var aSelectFunc: TSelectFunc;
var aSelectProc: TSelectProc;
var aReadFunc: TReadFunc;
var aWriteFunc: TWriteFunc;
var aFlushProc: TFlushProc;
var aCloseProc: TCloseProc;
var aDoneProc: TDoneProc;
var aPrivateData: Pointer); attribute (name
= '_p_GetTFDD'); external;
procedure FileMove (var f: GPC_FDR; NewName: CString; Overwrite:
Boolean); attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_FileMove'); external;
const
NoChange = -1; { can be passed to ChOwn for Owner and/or Group to
not change that value }
procedure CloseFile (var f: GPC_FDR); attribute (name
= '_p_CloseFile'); external;
procedure ChMod (var f: GPC_FDR; Mode: Integer); attribute
(iocritical, name = '_p_ChMod'); external;
procedure ChOwn (var f: GPC_FDR; Owner, Group: Integer); attribute
(iocritical, name = '_p_ChOwn'); external;
{ Checks if data are available to be read from f. This is
similar to `not EOF (f)', but does not block on "files" that
can grow, like Ttys or pipes. }
function CanRead (var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_CanRead'); external;
{ Checks if data can be written to f. }
function CanWrite (var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_CanWrite'); external;
{ Get the file handle. }
function FileHandle (protected var f: GPC_FDR): Integer; attribute
(name = '_p_FileHandle'); external;
{ Lock/unlock a file. }
function FileLock (var f: GPC_FDR; WriteLock, Block: Boolean):
Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_FileLock'); external;
function FileUnlock (var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_FileUnlock'); external;
{ Try to map (a part of) a file to memory. }
function MemoryMap (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType; Access:
Integer; Shared: Boolean;
var f: GPC_FDR; Offset: FileSizeType): Pointer;
attribute (name = '_p_MemoryMap'); external;
{ Unmap a previous memory mapping. }
procedure MemoryUnMap (Start: Pointer; Length: SizeType); attribute
(name = '_p_MemoryUnMap'); external;
type
Natural = 1 .. MaxInt;
IOSelectEvents = (SelectReadOrEOF, SelectRead, SelectEOF,
SelectWrite, SelectException, SelectAlways);
type
IOSelectType = record
f: PAnyFile;
Wanted: set of IOSelectEvents;
Occurred: set of Low (IOSelectEvents) .. Pred (SelectAlways)
end;
{ Waits for one of several events to happen. Returns when one or
more of the wanted events for one of the files occur. If they have
already occurred before calling the function, it returns
immediately. MicroSeconds can specify a timeout. If it is 0, the
function will return immediately, whether or not an event has
occurred. If it is negative, the function will wait forever until
an event occurs. The Events parameter can be Null, in which case
the function only waits for the timeout. If any of the file
pointers (f) in Events are nil or the files pointed to are closed,
they are simply ignored for convenience.
It returns the index of one of the files for which any event has
occurred. If events have occurred for several files, is it
undefined which of these file's index is returned. If no event
occurs until the timeout, 0 is returned. If an error occurs or the
target system does not have a `select' system call and Events is
not Null, a negative value is returned. In the Occurred field of
the elements of Events, events that have occurred are set. The
state of events not wanted is undefined.
The possible events are:
SelectReadOrEOF: the file is at EOF or data can be read now.
SelectRead: data can be read now.
SelectEOF: the file is at EOF.
SelectWrite: data can be written now.
SelectException: an exception occurred on the file.
SelectAlways: if this is set, *all* requested events will be
checked for this file in any case. Otherwise,
checks may be skipped if already another event
for this or another file was found.
Notes:
Checking for EOF requires some reading ahead internally (just like
the EOF function) which can be avoided by setting SelectReadOrEOF
instead of SelectRead and SelectEOF. If this is followed by, e.g.,
a BlockRead with 4 parameters, the last parameter will be 0 if and
only the file is at EOF, and otherwise, data will be read directly
from the file without reading ahead and buffering.
SelectAlways should be set for files whose events are considered
to be of higher priority than others. Otherwise, if one is
interested in just any event, not setting SelectAlways may be a
little faster. }
function IOSelect (var Events: array [m .. n: Natural] of
IOSelectType; MicroSeconds: MicroSecondTimeType): Integer;
attribute (name = '_p_IOSelect'); external;
{ A simpler interface to SelectIO for the most common use. Waits for
SelectReadOrEOF on all files and returns an index. }
function IOSelectRead (const Files: array [m .. n: Natural] of
PAnyFile; MicroSeconds: MicroSecondTimeType): Integer; attribute
(name = '_p_IOSelectRead'); external;
{ Bind a filename to an external file }
procedure AssignFile (var t: AnyFile; const FileName: String);
attribute (name = '_p_AssignFile'); external;
procedure AssignBinary (var t: Text; const FileName: String);
attribute (name = '_p_AssignBinary'); external;
procedure AssignHandle (var t: AnyFile; Handle: Integer; CloseFlag:
Boolean); attribute (name = '_p_AssignHandle'); external;
{ Under development }
procedure AnyStringTFDD_Reset (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf:
ConstAnyString); attribute (name = '_p_AnyStringTFDD_Reset');
external;
{ @@ procedure AnyStringTFDD_Rewrite (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf:
VarAnyString); attribute (name = '_p_AnyStringTFDD_Rewrite'); }
procedure StringTFDD_Reset (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf: ConstAnyString;
var s: array [m .. n: Integer] of Char); attribute (name
= '_p_StringTFDD_Reset'); external;
{ @@ procedure StringTFDD_Rewrite (var f: GPC_FDR; var Buf:
VarAnyString; var s: String); attribute (name
= '_p_StringTFDD_Rewrite'); }
{ Returns True is a terminal device is open on the file f, False if
f is not open or not connected to a terminal. }
function IsTerminal (protected var f: GPC_FDR): Boolean; attribute
(name = '_p_IsTerminal'); external;
{ Returns the file name of the terminal device that is open on the
file f. Returns the empty string if (and only if) f is not open or
not connected to a terminal. }
function GetTerminalName (protected var f: GPC_FDR): TString;
attribute (name = '_p_GetTerminalName'); external;
{ Command line option parsing, from getopt.pas }
const
EndOfOptions = #255;
NoOption = #1;
UnknownOption = '?';
LongOption = #0;
UnknownLongOption = '?';
var
FirstNonOption : Integer; attribute (name
= '_p_FirstNonOption'); external;
HasOptionArgument : Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_HasOptionArgument'); external;
OptionArgument : TString; attribute (name
= '_p_OptionArgument'); external;
UnknownOptionCharacter: Char; attribute (name
= '_p_UnknownOptionCharacter'); external;
GetOptErrorFlag : Boolean; attribute (name
= '_p_GetOptErrorFlag'); external;
{ Parses command line arguments for options and returns the next
one.
If a command line argument starts with `-', and is not exactly `-'
or `--', then it is an option element. The characters of this
element (aside from the initial `-') are option characters. If
`GetOpt' is called repeatedly, it returns successively each of the
option characters from each of the option elements.
If `GetOpt' finds another option character, it returns that
character, updating `FirstNonOption' and internal variables so
that the next call to `GetOpt' can resume the scan with the
following option character or command line argument.
If there are no more option characters, `GetOpt' returns
EndOfOptions. Then `FirstNonOption' is the index of the first
command line argument that is not an option. (The command line
arguments have been permuted so that those that are not options
now come last.)
OptString must be of the form `[+|-]abcd:e:f:g::h::i::'.
a, b, c are options without arguments
d, e, f are options with required arguments
g, h, i are options with optional arguments
Arguments are text following the option character in the same
command line argument, or the text of the following command line
argument. They are returned in OptionArgument. If an option has no
argument, OptionArgument is empty. The variable HasOptionArgument
tells whether an option has an argument. This is mostly useful for
options with optional arguments, if one wants to distinguish an
empty argument from no argument.
If the first character of OptString is `+', GetOpt stops at the
first non-option argument.
If it is `-', GetOpt treats non-option arguments as options and
return NoOption for them.
Otherwise, GetOpt permutes arguments and handles all options,
leaving all non-options at the end. However, if the environment
variable POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, the default behaviour is to stop
at the first non-option argument, as with `+'.
The special argument `--' forces an end of option-scanning
regardless of the first character of OptString. In the case of
`-', only `--' can cause GetOpt to return EndOfOptions with
FirstNonOption <= ParamCount.
If an option character is seen that is not listed in OptString,
UnknownOption is returned. The unrecognized option character is
stored in UnknownOptionCharacter. Unless GetOptErrorFlag is set to
False, an error message is printed to StdErr automatically. }
function GetOpt (const OptString: String): Char; attribute (name
= '_p_GetOpt'); external;
type
OptArgType = (NoArgument, RequiredArgument, OptionalArgument);
OptionType = record
OptionName: CString;
Argument : OptArgType;
Flag : ^Char; { if nil, v is returned. Otherwise, Flag^ is
... }
v : Char { ... set to v, and LongOption is returned }
end;
{ Recognize short options, described by OptString as above, and long
options, described by LongOptions.
Long-named options begin with `--' instead of `-'. Their names may
be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unique or is an
exact match for some defined option. If they have an argument, it
follows the option name in the same argument, separated from the
option name by a `=', or else the in next argument. When GetOpt
finds a long-named option, it returns LongOption if that option's
`Flag' field is non-nil, and the value of the option's `v' field
if the `Flag' field is nil.
LongIndex, if not Null, returns the index in LongOptions of the
long-named option found. It is only valid when a long-named option
has been found by the most recent call.
If LongOnly is set, `-' as well as `--' can indicate a long
option. If an option that starts with `-' (not `--') doesn't match
a long option, but does match a short option, it is parsed as a
short option instead. If an argument has the form `-f', where f is
a valid short option, don't consider it an abbreviated form of a
long option that starts with `f'. Otherwise there would be no way
to give the `-f' short option. On the other hand, if there's a
long option `fubar' and the argument is `-fu', do consider that an
abbreviation of the long option, just like `--fu', and not `-f'
with argument `u'. This distinction seems to be the most useful
approach.
As an additional feature (not present in the C counterpart), if
the last character of OptString is `-' (after a possible starting
`+' or `-' character), or OptString is empty, all long options
with a nil `Flag' field will automatically be recognized as short
options with the character given by the `v' field. This means, in
the common (and recommended) case that all short options have long
equivalents, you can simply pass an empty OptString (or pass `+-'
or `--' as OptString if you want this behaviour, see the comment
for GetOpt), and you will only have to maintain the LongOptions
array when you add or change options. }
function GetOptLong (const OptString: String; const LongOptions:
array [m .. n: Integer] of OptionType { can be Null };
var LongIndex: Integer { can be Null };
LongOnly: Boolean): Char; attribute (name = '_p_GetOptLong');
external;
{ Reset GetOpt's state and make the next GetOpt or GetOptLong start
(again) with the StartArgument'th argument (may be 1). This is
useful for special purposes only. It is *necessary* to do this
after altering the contents of CParamCount/CParameters (which is
not usually done, either). }
procedure ResetGetOpt (StartArgument: Integer); attribute (name
= '_p_ResetGetOpt'); external;
{ Set operations, from sets.pas }
{ All set operations are built-in identifiers and not declared in
gpc.pas. }
{ Heap management routines, from heap.pas }
{ GPC implements both Mark/Release and Dispose. Both can be mixed
freely in the same program. Dispose should be preferred, since
it's faster. }
{ C heap management routines. NOTE: if Release is used anywhere in
the program, CFreeMem and CReAllocMem may not be used for pointers
that were not allocated with CGetMem. }
function CGetMem (Size: SizeType): Pointer; external
name 'malloc';
procedure CFreeMem (aPointer: Pointer); external name 'free';
function CReAllocMem (aPointer: Pointer; NewSize: SizeType):
Pointer; external name 'realloc';
type
GetMemType = ^function (Size: SizeType): Pointer;
FreeMemType = ^procedure (aPointer: Pointer);
ReAllocMemType = ^function (aPointer: Pointer; NewSize: SizeType):
Pointer;
{ These variables can be set to user-defined routines for memory
allocation/deallocation. GetMemPtr may return nil when
insufficient memory is available. GetMem/New will produce a
runtime error then. }
var
GetMemPtr : GetMemType; attribute (name = '_p_GetMemPtr');
external;
FreeMemPtr : FreeMemType; attribute (name = '_p_FreeMemPtr');
external;
ReAllocMemPtr: ReAllocMemType; attribute (name
= '_p_ReAllocMemPtr'); external;
{ Address of the lowest byte of heap used }
HeapLow: PtrCard; attribute (name = '_p_HeapLow'); external;
{ Address of the highest byte of heap used }
HeapHigh: PtrCard; attribute (name = '_p_HeapHigh'); external;
{ If set to true, `Dispose' etc. will raise a runtime error if
given an invalid pointer. }
HeapChecking: Boolean; attribute (name = '_p_HeapChecking');
external;
const
UndocumentedReturnNil = Pointer (-1);
function SuspendMark: Pointer; attribute (name = '_p_SuspendMark');
external;
procedure ResumeMark (p: Pointer); attribute (name
= '_p_ResumeMark'); external;
{ Calls the procedure Proc for each block that would be released
with `Release (aMark)'. aMark must have been marked with Mark. For
an example of its usage, see the HeapMon unit. }
procedure ForEachMarkedBlock (aMark: Pointer; procedure Proc
(aPointer: Pointer; aSize: SizeType; aCaller: Pointer)); attribute
(name = '_p_ForEachMarkedBlock'); external;
procedure ReAllocMem (var aPointer: Pointer; NewSize: SizeType);
attribute (name = '_p_ReAllocMem'); external;
{ Memory transfer procedures, from move.pas }
{ The move operations are built-in identifiers and not declared in
gpc.pas. }
{ Routines to handle endianness, from endian.pas }
{ Boolean constants about endianness and alignment }
const
BitsBigEndian = {$ifdef __BITS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__}
False
{$elif defined (__BITS_BIG_ENDIAN__)}
True
{$else}
{$error Bit endianness is not defined!}
{$endif};
BytesBigEndian = {$ifdef __BYTES_LITTLE_ENDIAN__}
False
{$elif defined (__BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN__)}
True
{$else}
{$error Byte endianness is not defined!}
{$endif};
WordsBigEndian = {$ifdef __WORDS_LITTLE_ENDIAN__}
False
{$elif defined (__WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN__)}
True
{$else}
{$error Word endianness is not defined!}
{$endif};
NeedAlignment = {$ifdef __NEED_ALIGNMENT__}
True
{$elif defined (__NEED_NO_ALIGNMENT__)}
False
{$else}
{$error Alignment is not defined!}
{$endif};
{ Convert single variables from or to little or big endian format.
This only works for a single variable or a plain array of a simple
type. For more complicated structures, this has to be done for
each component separately! Currently, ConvertFromFooEndian and
ConvertToFooEndian are the same, but this might not be the case on
middle-endian machines. Therefore, we provide different names. }
procedure ReverseBytes (var Buf; ElementSize, Count:
SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_ReverseBytes'); external;
procedure ConvertFromLittleEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count:
SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_ConvertLittleEndian'); external;
procedure ConvertFromBigEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count:
SizeType); attribute (name = '_p_ConvertBigEndian'); external;
procedure ConvertToLittleEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count:
SizeType); external name '_p_ConvertLittleEndian';
procedure ConvertToBigEndian (var Buf; ElementSize, Count:
SizeType); external name '_p_ConvertBigEndian';
{ Read a block from a file and convert it from little or
big endian format. This only works for a single variable or a
plain array of a simple type, note the comment for
`ConvertFromLittleEndian' and `ConvertFromBigEndian'. }
procedure BlockReadLittleEndian (var aFile: File; var Buf;
ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_BlockRead_LittleEndian'); external;
procedure BlockReadBigEndian (var aFile: File; var Buf;
ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_BlockRead_BigEndian'); external;
{ Write a block variable to a file and convert it to little or big
endian format before. This only works for a single variable or a
plain array of a simple type. Apart from this, note the comment
for `ConvertToLittleEndian' and `ConvertToBigEndian'. }
procedure BlockWriteLittleEndian (var aFile: File; const Buf;
ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_BlockWrite_LittleEndian'); external;
procedure BlockWriteBigEndian (var aFile: File; const Buf;
ElementSize, Count: SizeType); attribute (iocritical, name
= '_p_BlockWrite_BigEndian'); external;
{ Read and write strings from/to binary files, where the length is
stored in the given endianness and with a fixed size (64 bits),
and therefore is independent of the system. }
procedure ReadStringLittleEndian (var f: File; var s: String);
attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ReadStringLittleEndian');
external;
procedure ReadStringBigEndian (var f: File; var s: String);
attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_ReadStringBigEndian'); external;
procedure WriteStringLittleEndian (var f: File; const s: String);
attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_WriteStringLittleEndian');
external;
procedure WriteStringBigEndian (var f: File; const s: String);
attribute (iocritical, name = '_p_WriteStringBigEndian');
external;
{ Initialization, from init.pas }
var
InitProc: ^procedure; attribute (name = '_p_InitProc'); external;
GPC distributions now include a number of useful Pascal units and a complete set of BP compatibility units – except for the `Graph' unit (which is currently distributed separately due to its license) and the OOP stuff. The main use of these units is to provide a way to port BP programs to GPC as easily as possible. Some of the units also implement functionaliy not available otherwise.
Most of the BP compatibility units – except `CRT' and `Printer' – are merely meant to let programs written for BP compile with GPC as easily as possible. They should not be used in newly written code, and for code ported from BP to GPC, it is suggested to replace them successively with the more powerful – and often easier to use – alternatives that GPC's Run Time System (see Run Time System) offers.
The following sections describe all units included with GPC (besides the `GPC' module which describes the interface to the Run Time System, Run Time System).
The following listing contains the interface of the CRT unit.
`CRT' is a `curses' based unit for text screen handling. It is compatible to BP's `CRT' unit, even in a lot of minor details like the values of function key codes and includes some routines for compatibility with TP5's `Win' unit as well as BP's `WinCRT' and Turbo Power's `TPCrt' units, and some extensions.
The unit has been extended by many functions that were lacking in BP's unit and required assembler code or direct memory/port access to be implemented under BP. The GPC version is now fully suited for portable, real-world programming without any dirty tricks.
The unit is also available as `WinCRT', completely identical to `CRT'. The only purpose of this “feature” is to let programs written for TPW or BP, with a `uses WinCRT' directive, compile without changes. Unlike TPW/BP's `WinCRT' unit, GPC's unit is not crippled, compared to `CRT'.
To use this unit, you will need the `ncurses' (version 5.0 or newer) or `PDCurses' library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
{ CRT (Crt Replacement Tool)
Portable BP compatible CRT unit for GPC with many extensions
This unit is aware of terminal types. This means programs using
this unit will work whether run locally or while being logged in
remotely from a system with a completely different terminal type
(as long as the appropriate terminfo entry is present on the
system where the program is run).
NOTES:
- The CRT unit needs the ncurses and panel libraries which should
be available for almost any system. For Dos systems, where
ncurses is not available, it is configured to use the PDCurses
and its panel library instead. On Unix systems with X11, it can
also use PDCurses (xcurses) and xpanel to produce X11 programs.
The advantage is that the program won't need an xterm with a
valid terminfo entry, the output may look a little nicer and
function keys work better than in an xterm, but the disadvantage
is that it will only run under X. The ncurses and PDCurses
libraries (including panel and xpanel, resp.) can be found in
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/
(Note that ncurses is already installed on many Unix systems.)
For ncurses, version 5.0 or newer is required.
When an X11 version under Unix is wanted, give `-DX11' when
compiling crt.pas and crtc.c (or when compiling crt.pas or a
program that uses CRT with `--automake'). On pre-X11R6 systems,
give `-DNOX11R6' additionally. You might also have to give the
path to the X11 libraries with `-L', e.g. `-L /usr/X11/lib'.
- A few features cannot be implemented in a portable way and are
only available on some systems:
Sound, NoSound 1) -----------------------.
GetShiftState ------------------. |
TextMode etc. 2) -------------. | |
CRTSavePreviousScreen --------. | | |
Interrupt signal (Ctrl-C) handling ---. | | | |
| | | | |
Linux/IA32 3) (terminal) X X 4) X 5) X 6) X 6)
Other Unix (terminal) X X 7) X 5) - -
Unix (X11 version) X X - X -
Dos (DJGPP) X X X X X
MS-Windows (Cygwin, mingw, MSYS) X - X 8) X -
Notes:
1) If you define NO_CRT_DUMMY_SOUND while compiling CRT, you
will get linking errors when your program tries to use
Sound/NoSound on a platform where it's not supported (which
is useful to detect at compile time if playing sound is a
major task of your program). Otherwise, Sound/NoSound will
simply do nothing (which is usually acceptable if the program
uses these routines just for an occasional beep).
2) Changing to monochrome modes works on all platforms. Changing
the screen size only works on those indicated. However, even
on the platforms not supported, the program will react to
screen size changes by external means (e.g. changing the
window size with the mouse if running in a GUI window or
resizing a console or virtual terminal).
3) Probably also on other processors, but I've had no chance to
test this yet.
4) Only on a local console with access permissions to the
corresponding virtual console memory device or using the
`crtscreen' utility (see crtscreen.c in the demos directory).
5) Only if supported by an external command (e.g., in xterms and
on local Linux consoles). The command to be called can be
defined in the environment variable `RESIZETERM' (where the
variables `columns' and `lines' in the command are set to the
size wanted). If not set, the code will try `resize -s' in an
xterm and otherwise `SVGATextMode' and `setfont'. For this to
work, these utilities need to be present in the PATH or
`/usr/sbin' or `/usr/local/sbin'. Furthermore, SVGATextMode
and setfont require root permissions, either to the
executable of the program compiled with CRT or to resizecons
(called by setfont) or SVGATextMode. To allow the latter, do
"chmod u+s `which resizecons`" and/or
"chmod u+s `which SVGATextMode`", as root once, but only if
you really want each user to be allowed to change the text
mode.
6) Only on local consoles.
7) Some terminals only. Most xterms etc. support it as well as
other terminals that support an "alternate screen" in the
smcup/rmcup terminal capabilities.
8) Only with PDCurses, not with ncurses. Changing the number of
screen *columns* doesn't work in a full-screen session.
- When CRT is initialized (automatically or explicitly; see the
comments for CRTInit), the screen is cleared, and at the end of
the program, the cursor is placed at the bottom of the screen
(curses behaviour).
- All the other things (including most details like color and
function key constants) are compatible with BP's CRT unit, and
there are many extensions that BP's unit does not have.
- When the screen size is changed by an external event (e.g.,
resizing an xterm or changing the screen size from another VC
under Linux), the virtual "function key" kbScreenSizeChanged is
returned. Applications can use the virtual key to resize their
windows. kbScreenSizeChanged will not be returned if the screen
size change was initiated by the program itself (by using
TextMode or SetScreenSize). Note that TextMode sets the current
panel to the full screen size, sets the text attribute to the
default and clears the window (BP compatibility), while
SetScreenSize does not.
- After the screen size has been changed, whether by using
TextMode, SetScreenSize or by an external event, ScreenSize will
return the new screen size. The current window and all panels
will have been adjusted to the new screen size. This means, if
their right or lower ends are outside the new screen size, the
windows are moved to the left and/or top as far as necessary. If
this is not enough, i.e., if they are wider/higher than the new
screen size, they are shrinked to the total screen width/height.
When the screen size is enlarged, window sizes are not changed,
with one exception: Windows that extend through the whole screen
width/height are enlarged to the whole new screen width/height
(in particular, full-screen windows remain full-screen). This
behaviour might not be optimal for all purposes, but you can
always resize your windows in your application after the screen
size change.
- (ncurses only) The environment variable `ESCDELAY' specifies the
number of milliseconds allowed between an `Esc' character and
the rest of an escape sequence (default 1000). Setting it to a
value too small can cause problems with programs not recognizing
escape sequences such as function keys, especially over slow
network connections. Setting it to a value too large can delay
the recognition of an `ESC' key press notably. On local Linux
consoles, e.g., 10 seems to be a good value.
- When trying to write portable programs, don't rely on exactly
the same look of your output and the availability of all the key
combinations. Some kinds of terminals support only some of the
display attributes and special characters, and usually not all
of the keys declared are really available. Therefore, it's safer
to provide the same function on different key combinations and
to not use the more exotic ones.
- CRT supports an additional modifier key (if present), called
`Extra'. On DJGPP, it's the <Scroll Lock> key, under X11 it's
the modifier #4, and on a local Linux console, it's the `CtrlL'
modifier (value 64) which is unused on many keytabs and can be
mapped to any key(s), e.g. to those keys on new keyboards with
these ugly symbols waiting to be replaced by penguins (keycodes
125 and 127) by inserting the following two lines into your
/etc/default.keytab and reloading the keytab with `loadkeys'
(you usually have to do this as root):
keycode 125 = CtrlL
keycode 127 = CtrlL
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License.
Please also note the license of the curses library used. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030722}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030722 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit {$ifdef THIS_IS_WINCRT} WinCRT {$else} CRT {$endif};
interface
uses GPC;
const
{ CRT modes }
BW40 = 0; { 40x25 Black/White }
CO40 = 1; { 40x25 Color }
BW80 = 2; { 80x25 Black/White }
CO80 = 3; { 80x25 Color }
Mono = 7; { 80x25 Black/White }
Font8x8 = 256; { Add-in for 80x43 or 80x50 mode }
{ Mode constants for Turbo Pascal 3.0 compatibility }
C40 = CO40;
C80 = CO80;
{ Foreground and background color constants }
Black = 0;
Blue = 1;
Green = 2;
Cyan = 3;
Red = 4;
Magenta = 5;
Brown = 6;
LightGray = 7;
{ Foreground color constants }
DarkGray = 8;
LightBlue = 9;
LightGreen = 10;
LightCyan = 11;
LightRed = 12;
LightMagenta = 13;
Yellow = 14;
White = 15;
{ Add-in for blinking }
Blink = 128;
type
TTextAttr = Byte;
var
{ If False (default: True), catch interrupt signals (SIGINT;
Ctrl-C), and other flow control characters as well as SIGTERM,
SIGHUP and perhaps other signals }
CheckBreak: Boolean = True; attribute (name = 'crt_CheckBreak');
{ If True (default : False), replace Ctrl-Z by #0 in input }
CheckEOF: Boolean = False; attribute (name = 'crt_CheckEOF');
{ Ignored -- meaningless here }
DirectVideo: Boolean = True;
{ Ignored -- curses or the terminal driver will take care of that
when necessary }
CheckSnow: Boolean = False;
{ Current (sic!) text mode }
LastMode: CCardinal = 3; attribute (name = 'crt_LastMode');
{ Current text attribute }
TextAttr: TTextAttr = 7; attribute (name = 'crt_TextAttr');
{ Window upper left coordinates. *Obsolete*! Please see WindowMin
below. }
WindMin: CCardinal = High (CCardinal); attribute (name
= 'crt_WindMin');
{ Window lower right coordinates. *Obsolete*! Please see WindowMax
below. }
WindMax: CCardinal = High (CCardinal); attribute (name
= 'crt_WindMax');
procedure AssignCRT (var f: Text);
function KeyPressed: Boolean; external name 'crt_KeyPressed';
function ReadKey: Char; external name 'crt_ReadKey';
{ Not effective on all platforms, see above. See also SetScreenSize
and SetMonochrome. }
procedure TextMode (Mode: Integer);
procedure Window (x1, y1, x2, y2: CInteger); external
name 'crt_Window';
procedure GotoXY (x, y: CInteger); external name 'crt_GotoXY';
function WhereX: CInteger; external name 'crt_WhereX';
function WhereY: CInteger; external name 'crt_WhereY';
procedure ClrScr; external name 'crt_ClrScr';
procedure ClrEOL; external name 'crt_ClrEOL';
procedure InsLine; external name 'crt_InsLine';
procedure DelLine; external name 'crt_DelLine';
procedure TextColor (Color: TTextAttr);
procedure TextBackground (Color: TTextAttr);
procedure LowVideo;
procedure HighVideo;
procedure NormVideo;
procedure Delay (MS: CCardinal); external name 'crt_Delay';
{ Not available on all platforms, see above }
procedure Sound (Hz: CCardinal); external name 'crt_Sound';
procedure NoSound; external name 'crt_NoSound';
{ =================== Extensions over BP's CRT =================== }
{ Initializes the CRT unit. Should be called before using any of
CRT's routines.
Note: For BP compatibility, CRT is initizalized automatically when
(almost) any of its routines are used for the first time. In this
case, some defaults are set to match BP more closely. In
particular, the PC charset (see SetPCCharSet) is enabled then
(disabled otherwise), and the update level (see SetCRTUpdate) is
set to UpdateRegularly (UpdateWaitInput otherwise). This feature
is meant for BP compatibility *only*. Don't rely on it when
writing a new program. Use CRTInit then, and set the defaults to
the values you want explicitly.
SetCRTUpdate is one of those few routines which will not cause CRT
to be initialized immediately, and a value set with it will
survive both automatic and explicit initialization, so you can use
it to set the update level without caring which way CRT will be
initialized. (This does not apply to SetPCCharSet. Since it works
on a per-panel basis, it has to initialize CRT first, so there is
a panel to start with.)
If you terminate the program before calling CRTInit or any routine
that causes automatic initialization, curses will never be
initialized, so e.g., the screen won't be cleared. This can be
useful, e.g., to check the command line arguments (or anything
else) and if there's a problem, write an error and abort. Just be
sure to write the error to StdErr, not Output (because Output will
be assigned to CRT, and therefore writing to Output will cause CRT
to be initialized, and because errors belong to StdErr, anyway),
and to call `RestoreTerminal (True)' before (just to be sure, in
case some code -- perhaps added later, or hidden in the
initialization of some unit -- does initialize CRT). }
procedure CRTInit; external name 'crt_Init';
{ Changes the input and output file and the terminal description CRT
uses. Only effective with ncurses, and only if called before CRT
is initialized (automatically or explicitly; see the comments for
CRTInit). If TerminalType is nil, the default will be used. If
InputFile and/or OutputFile are Null, they remain unchanged. }
procedure CRTSetTerminal (TerminalType: CString; var InputFile,
OutputFile: AnyFile); attribute (name = 'crt_SetTerminal');
{ If called with an argument True, it causes CRT to save the
previous screen contents if possible (see the comments at the
beginning of the unit), and restore them when calling
RestoreTerminal (True). After RestoreTerminal (False), they're
saved again, and at the end of the program, they're restored. If
called with an argument False, it will prohibit this behaviour.
The default, if this procedure is not called, depends on the
terminal (generally it is active on most xterms and similar and
not active on most other terminals).
This procedure should be called before initializing CRT (using
CRTInit or automatically), otherwise the previous screen contents
may already have been overwritten. It has no effect under XCurses,
because the program uses its own window, anyway. }
procedure CRTSavePreviousScreen (On: Boolean); external
name 'crt_SavePreviousScreen';
{ Returns True if CRTSavePreviousScreen was called with argument
True and the functionality is really available. Note that the
result is not reliable until CRT is initialized, while
CRTSavePreviousScreen should be called before CRT is initialized.
That's why they are two separate routines. }
function CRTSavePreviousScreenWorks: Boolean; external
name 'crt_SavePreviousScreenWorks';
{ If CRT is initialized automatically, not via CRTInit, and
CRTAutoInitProc is not nil, it will be called before actually
initializing CRT. }
var
CRTAutoInitProc: procedure = nil; attribute (name
= 'crt_AutoInitProc');
{ Aborts with a runtime error saying that CRT was not initialized.
If you set CRTAutoInitProc to this procedure, you can effectively
disable CRT's automatic initialization. }
procedure CRTNotInitialized; attribute (name
= 'crt_NotInitialized');
{ Set terminal to shell or curses mode. An internal procedure
registered by CRT via RegisterRestoreTerminal does this as well,
so CRTSetCursesMode has to be called only in unusual situations,
e.g. after executing a process that changes terminal modes, but
does not restore them (e.g. because it crashed or was killed), and
the process was not executed with the Execute routine, and
RestoreTerminal was not called otherwise. If you set it to False
temporarily, be sure to set it back to True before doing any
further CRT operations, otherwise the result may be strange. }
procedure CRTSetCursesMode (On: Boolean); external
name 'crt_SetCursesMode';
{ Do the same as `RestoreTerminal (True)', but also clear the screen
after restoring the terminal (except for XCurses, because the
program uses its own window, anyway). Does not restore and save
again the previous screen contents if CRTSavePreviousScreen was
called. }
procedure RestoreTerminalClearCRT; attribute (name
= 'crt_RestoreTerminalClearCRT');
{ Keyboard and character graphics constants -- BP compatible! =:-}
{$i crt.inc}
var
{ Tells whether the XCurses version of CRT is used }
XCRT: Boolean = {$ifdef XCURSES} True {$else} False {$endif};
attribute (name = 'crt_XCRT');
{ If True (default: False), the Beep procedure and writing #7 do a
Flash instead }
VisualBell: Boolean = False; attribute (name = 'crt_VisualBell');
{ Cursor shape codes. Only to be used in very special cases. }
CursorShapeHidden: CInteger = 0; attribute (name
= 'crt_CursorShapeHidden');
CursorShapeNormal: CInteger = 1; attribute (name
= 'crt_CursorShapeNormal');
CursorShapeFull: CInteger = 2; attribute (name
= 'crt_CursorShapeFull');
type
TKey = CCardinal;
TCursorShape = (CursorIgnored, CursorHidden, CursorNormal,
CursorFat, CursorBlock);
TCRTUpdate = (UpdateNever, UpdateWaitInput, UpdateInput,
UpdateRegularly, UpdateAlways);
TPoint = record
x, y: CInteger
end;
PCharAttr = ^TCharAttr;
TCharAttr = record
ch : Char;
Attr : TTextAttr;
PCCharSet: Boolean
end;
PCharAttrs = ^TCharAttrs;
TCharAttrs = array [1 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (TCharAttr)] of
TCharAttr;
TWindowXYInternalCard8 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8);
TWindowXYInternalFill = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf
(CCardinal) - 16);
TWindowXY = packed record
{$ifdef __BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN__}
Fill: TWindowXYInternalFill;
y, x: TWindowXYInternalCard8
{$elif defined (__BYTES_LITTLE_ENDIAN__)}
x, y: TWindowXYInternalCard8;
Fill: TWindowXYInternalFill
{$else}
{$error Endianness is not defined!}
{$endif}
end;
{ Make sure TWindowXY really has the same size as WindMin and
WindMax. The value of the constant will always be True, and is of
no further interest. }
const
AssertTWindowXYSize = CompilerAssert ((SizeOf (TWindowXY) = SizeOf
(WindMin)) and
(SizeOf (TWindowXY) = SizeOf
(WindMax)));
var
{ Window upper and left coordinates. More comfortable to access
than WindMin, but also *obsolete*. WindMin and WindowMin still
work, but have the problem that they implicitly limit the window
size to 255x255 characters. Though that's not really small for a
text window, it's easily possible to create bigger ones (e.g. in
an xterm with a small font, on a high resolution screen and/or
extending over several virutal desktops). When using coordinates
greater than 254, the corresponding bytes in WindowMin/WindowMax
will be set to 254, so, e.g., programs which do
`Inc (WindowMin.x)' will not fail quite as badly (but probably
still fail). The routines Window and GetWindow use Integer
coordinates, and don't suffer from any of these problems, so
they should be used instead. }
WindowMin: TWindowXY absolute WindMin;
{ Window lower right coordinates. More comfortable to access than
WindMax, but also *obsolete* (see the comments for WindowMin).
Use Window and GetWindow instead. }
WindowMax: TWindowXY absolute WindMax;
{ The attribute set by NormVideo }
NormAttr: TTextAttr = 7; attribute (name = 'crt_NormAttr');
{ Tells whether the current mode is monochrome }
IsMonochrome: Boolean = False; attribute (name
= 'crt_IsMonochrome');
{ This value can be set to a combination of the shFoo constants
and will be ORed to the actual shift state returned by
GetShiftState. This can be used to easily simulate shift keys on
systems where they can't be accessed. }
VirtualShiftState: CInteger = 0; attribute (name
= 'crt_VirtualShiftState');
{ Returns the size of the screen. Note: In BP's WinCRT unit,
ScreenSize is a variable. But since writing to it from a program
is pointless, anyway, providing a function here should not cause
any incompatibility. }
function ScreenSize: TPoint; attribute (name
= 'crt_GetScreenSize');
{ Change the screen size if possible. }
procedure SetScreenSize (x, y: CInteger); external
name 'crt_SetScreenSize';
{ Turns colors off or on. }
procedure SetMonochrome (Monochrome: Boolean); external
name 'crt_SetMonochrome';
{ Tell which modifier keys are currently pressed. The result is a
combination of the shFoo constants defined in crt.inc, or 0 on
systems where this function is not supported -- but note
VirtualShiftState. If supported, ReadKey automatically converts
kbIns and kbDel keys to kbShIns and kbShDel, resp., if shift is
pressed. }
function GetShiftState: CInteger; external
name 'crt_GetShiftState';
{ Get the extent of the current window. Use this procedure rather
than reading WindMin and WindMax or WindowMin and WindowMax, since
this routine allows for window sizes larger than 255. The
resulting coordinates are 1-based (like in Window, unlike WindMin,
WindMax, WindowMin and WindowMax). Any of the parameters may be
Null in case you're interested in only some of the coordinates. }
procedure GetWindow (var x1, y1, x2, y2: Integer); attribute (name
= 'crt_GetWindow');
{ Determine when to update the screen. The possible values are the
following. The given conditions *guarantee* updates. However,
updates may occur more frequently (even if the update level is set
to UpdateNever). About the default value, see the comments for
CRTInit.
UpdateNever : never (unless explicitly requested with
CRTUpdate)
UpdateWaitInput: before Delay and CRT input, unless typeahead is
detected
UpdateInput : before Delay and CRT input
UpdateRegularly: before Delay and CRT input and otherwise in
regular intervals without causing too much
refresh. This uses a timer on some systems
(currently, Unix with ncurses). This was created
for BP compatibility, but for many applications,
a lower value causes less flickering in the
output, and additionally, timer signals won't
disturb other operations. Under DJGPP, this
always updates immediately, but this fact should
not mislead DJGPP users into thinking this is
always so.
UpdateAlways : after each output. This can be very slow. (Not so
under DJGPP, but this fact should not mislead
DJGPP users ...) }
procedure SetCRTUpdate (UpdateLevel: TCRTUpdate); external
name 'crt_SetUpdateLevel';
{ Do an update now, independently of the update level }
procedure CRTUpdate; external name 'crt_Update';
{ Do an update now and completely redraw the screen }
procedure CRTRedraw; external name 'crt_Redraw';
{ Return Ord (key) for normal keys and $100 * Ord (fkey) for
function keys }
function ReadKeyWord: TKey; external name 'crt_ReadKeyWord';
{ Extract the character and scan code from a TKey value }
function Key2Char (k: TKey): Char;
function Key2Scan (k: TKey): Char;
{ Convert a key to upper/lower case if it is a letter, leave it
unchanged otherwise }
function UpCaseKey (k: TKey): TKey;
function LoCaseKey (k: TKey): TKey;
{ Return key codes for the combination of the given key with Ctrl,
Alt, AltGr or Extra, resp. Returns 0 if the combination is
unknown. }
function CtrlKey (ch: Char): TKey; attribute (name
= 'crt_CtrlKey');
function AltKey (ch: Char): TKey; external name 'crt_AltKey';
function AltGrKey (ch: Char): TKey; external name 'crt_AltGrKey';
function ExtraKey (ch: Char): TKey; external name 'crt_ExtraKey';
{ Check if k is a pseudo key generated by a deadly signal trapped }
function IsDeadlySignal (k: TKey): Boolean;
{ Produce a beep or a screen flash }
procedure Beep; external name 'crt_Beep';
procedure Flash; external name 'crt_Flash';
{ Get size of current window (calculated using GetWindow) }
function GetXMax: Integer;
function GetYMax: Integer;
{ Get/goto an absolute position }
function WhereXAbs: Integer;
function WhereYAbs: Integer;
procedure GotoXYAbs (x, y: Integer);
{ Turn scrolling on or off }
procedure SetScroll (State: Boolean); external name 'crt_SetScroll';
{ Read back whether scrolling is enabled }
function GetScroll: Boolean; external name 'crt_GetScroll';
{ Determine whether to interpret non-ASCII characters as PC ROM
characters (True), or in a system dependent way (False). About the
default, see the comments for CRTInit. }
procedure SetPCCharSet (PCCharSet: Boolean); external
name 'crt_SetPCCharSet';
{ Read back the value set by SetPCCharSet }
function GetPCCharSet: Boolean; external name 'crt_GetPCCharSet';
{ Determine whether to interpret #7, #8, #10, #13 as control
characters (True, default), or as graphics characters (False) }
procedure SetControlChars (UseControlChars: Boolean); external
name 'crt_SetControlChars';
{ Read back the value set by SetControlChars }
function GetControlChars: Boolean; external
name 'crt_GetControlChars';
procedure SetCursorShape (Shape: TCursorShape); external
name 'crt_SetCursorShape';
function GetCursorShape: TCursorShape; external
name 'crt_GetCursorShape';
procedure HideCursor;
procedure HiddenCursor;
procedure NormalCursor;
procedure FatCursor;
procedure BlockCursor;
procedure IgnoreCursor;
{ Simulates a block cursor by writing a block character onto the
cursor position. The procedure automatically finds the topmost
visible panel whose shape is not CursorIgnored and places the
simulated cursor there (just like the hardware cursor), with
matching attributes, if the cursor shape is CursorFat or
CursorBlock (otherwise, no simulated cursor is shown).
Calling this procedure again makes the simulated cursor disappear.
In particular, to get the effect of a blinking cursor, you have to
call the procedure repeatedly (say, 8 times a second). CRT will
not do this for you, since it does not intend to be your main
event loop. }
procedure SimulateBlockCursor; external
name 'crt_SimulateBlockCursor';
{ Makes the cursor simulated by SimulateBlockCursor disappear if it
is active. Does nothing otherwise. You should call this procedure
after using SimulateBlockCursor before doing any further CRT
output (though failing to do so should not hurt except for
possibly leaving the simulated cursor in its old position longer
than it should). }
procedure SimulateBlockCursorOff; external
name 'crt_SimulateBlockCursorOff';
function GetTextColor: Integer;
function GetTextBackground: Integer;
{ Write string at the given position without moving the cursor.
Truncated at the right margin. }
procedure WriteStrAt (x, y: Integer; const s: String; Attr:
TTextAttr);
{ Write (several copies of) a char at then given position without
moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. }
procedure WriteCharAt (x, y, Count: Integer; ch: Char; Attr:
TTextAttr);
{ Write characters with specified attributes at the given position
without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. }
procedure WriteCharAttrAt (x, y, Count: CInteger; CharAttr:
PCharAttrs); external name 'crt_WriteCharAttrAt';
{ Write a char while moving the cursor }
procedure WriteChar (ch: Char);
{ Read a character from a screen position }
procedure ReadChar (x, y: CInteger; var ch: Char; var Attr:
TTextAttr); external name 'crt_ReadChar';
{ Change only text attributes, leave characters. Truncated at the
right margin. }
procedure ChangeTextAttr (x, y, Count: Integer; NewAttr: TTextAttr);
{ Fill current window }
procedure FillWin (ch: Char; Attr: TTextAttr); external
name 'crt_FillWin';
{ Calculate size of memory required for ReadWin in current window. }
function WinSize: SizeType; external name 'crt_WinSize';
{ Save window contents. Buf must be WinSize bytes large. }
procedure ReadWin (var Buf); external name 'crt_ReadWin';
{ Restore window contents saved by ReadWin. The size of the current
window must match the size of the window from which ReadWin was
used, but the position may be different. }
procedure WriteWin (const Buf); external name 'crt_WriteWin';
type
WinState = record
x1, y1, x2, y2, WhereX, WhereY, NewX1, NewY1, NewX2, NewY2:
Integer;
TextAttr: TTextAttr;
CursorShape: TCursorShape;
ScreenSize: TPoint;
Buffer: ^Byte
end;
{ Save window position and size, cursor position, text attribute and
cursor shape -- *not* the window contents. }
procedure SaveWin (var State: WinState);
{ Make a new window (like Window), and save the contents of the
screen below the window as well as the position and size, cursor
position, text attribute and cursor shape of the old window. }
procedure MakeWin (var State: WinState; x1, y1, x2, y2: Integer);
{ Create window in full size, save previous text mode and all values
that MakeWin does. }
procedure SaveScreen (var State: WinState);
{ Restore the data saved by SaveWin, MakeWin or SaveScreen. }
procedure RestoreWin (var State: WinState);
{ Panels }
type
TPanel = Pointer;
function GetActivePanel: TPanel; external
name 'crt_GetActivePanel';
procedure PanelNew (x1, y1, x2, y2: CInteger;
BindToBackground: Boolean); external name 'crt_PanelNew';
procedure PanelDelete (Panel: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelDelete';
procedure PanelBindToBackground (Panel: TPanel; BindToBackground:
Boolean); external name 'crt_PanelBindToBackground';
function PanelIsBoundToBackground (Panel: TPanel): Boolean;
external name 'crt_PanelIsBoundToBackground';
procedure PanelActivate (Panel: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelActivate';
procedure PanelHide (Panel: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelHide';
procedure PanelShow (Panel: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelShow';
function PanelHidden (Panel: TPanel): Boolean;
external name 'crt_PanelHidden';
procedure PanelTop (Panel: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelTop';
procedure PanelBottom (Panel: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelBottom';
procedure PanelMoveAbove (Panel, Above: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelMoveAbove';
procedure PanelMoveBelow (Panel, Below: TPanel); external
name 'crt_PanelMoveBelow';
function PanelAbove (Panel: TPanel): TPanel; external
name 'crt_PanelAbove';
function PanelBelow (Panel: TPanel): TPanel; external
name 'crt_PanelBelow';
{ TPCRT compatibility }
{ Write a string at the given position without moving the cursor.
Truncated at the right margin. }
procedure WriteString (const s: String; y, x: Integer);
{ Write a string at the given position with the given attribute
without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right margin. }
procedure FastWriteWindow (const s: String; y, x: Integer; Attr:
TTextAttr);
{ Write a string at the given absolute position with the given
attribute without moving the cursor. Truncated at the right
margin. }
procedure FastWrite (const s: String; y, x: Integer; Attr:
TTextAttr);
{ WinCRT compatibility }
const
cw_UseDefault = Integer ($8000);
var
{ Ignored }
WindowOrg : TPoint = (cw_UseDefault, cw_UseDefault);
WindowSize: TPoint = (cw_UseDefault, cw_UseDefault);
Origin : TPoint = (0, 0);
InactiveTitle: PChar = '(Inactive %s)';
AutoTracking: Boolean = True;
WindowTitle: {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__}
array [0 .. 79] of Char
{$else}
TStringBuf
{$endif};
{ Cursor location, 0-based }
Cursor : TPoint = (0, 0); attribute (name = 'crt_Cursor');
procedure InitWinCRT; attribute (name = 'crt_InitWinCRT');
{ Halts the program }
procedure DoneWinCRT; attribute (noreturn, name = 'crt_DoneWinCRT');
procedure WriteBuf (Buffer: PChar; Count: SizeType); attribute (name
= 'crt_WriteBuf');
function ReadBuf (Buffer: PChar; Count: SizeType): SizeType;
attribute (name = 'crt_ReadBuf');
{ 0-based coordinates! }
procedure CursorTo (x, y: Integer); attribute (name
= 'crt_CursorTo');
{ Dummy }
procedure ScrollTo (x, y: Integer); attribute (name
= 'crt_ScrollTo');
{ Dummy }
procedure TrackCursor; attribute (name = 'crt_TrackCursor');
The following listing contains the interface of the Dos unit.
This is a portable implementation of most routines from BP's `Dos' unit. A few routines that are Dos – or even IA32 real mode – specific, are only available if `__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' is defined, BP Incompatibilities.
The same functionality and much more is available in the Run Time System, Run Time System. In some cases, the RTS routines have the same interface as the routines in this unit (e.g. `GetEnv', `FSplit', `FExpand', `FSearch'), in other cases, they have different names and/or easier and less limiting interfaces (e.g. `ReadDir' etc. vs. `FindFirst' etc.), and are often more efficient.
Therefore, using this unit is not recommended in newly written programs.
{ Portable BP compatible Dos unit
This unit supports most of the routines and declarations of BP's
Dos unit.
Notes:
- The procedures Keep, GetIntVec, SetIntVec are not supported
since they make only sense for Dos real-mode programs (and GPC
compiled programs do not run in real-mode, even on IA32 under
Dos). The procedures Intr and MsDos are only supported under
DJGPP if `__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' is defined (with the
`-D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' option). A few other routines are
also only supported with this define, but on all platforms (but
they are crude hacks, that's why they are not supported without
this define).
- The internal structure of file variables (FileRec and TextRec)
is different in GPC. However, as far as TFDDs are concerned,
there are other ways to achieve the same in GPC, see the GPC
unit.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Authors: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-,maximum-field-alignment 0}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
module Dos;
{ GPC and this unit use `AnyFile' for different meanings. Export
renaming helps us to avoid a conflict here. If you use both units,
the meaning of the latter one will be effective, but you always
get the built-in meaning by using `GPC_AnyFile'. }
export Dos = all (DosAnyFile => AnyFile, FSearch, FExpand, FSplit,
GetEnv);
import GPC (MaxLongInt => GPC_Orig_MaxLongInt); System;
type
GPC_AnyFile = AnyFile;
Byte8 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8);
Word16 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 16);
Word32 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32);
TDosAttr = Word;
const
{ File attribute constants }
ReadOnly = $01;
Hidden = $02; { set for dot files except '.' and '..' }
SysFile = $04; { not supported }
VolumeID = $08; { not supported }
Directory = $10;
Archive = $20; { means: not executable }
DosAnyFile = $3f;
{ Flag bit masks -- only used by the unportable Dos routines }
FCarry = 1;
FParity = 4;
FAuxiliary = $10;
FZero = $40;
FSign = $80;
FOverflow = $800;
{ DosError codes }
DosError_FileNotFound = 2;
DosError_PathNotFound = 3;
DosError_AccessDenied = 5;
DosError_InvalidMem = 9;
DosErorr_InvalidEnv = 10;
DosError_NoMoreFiles = 18;
DosError_IOError = 29;
DosError_ReadFault = 30;
type
{ String types. Not used in this unit, but declared for
compatibility. }
ComStr = String [127]; { Command line string }
PathStr = String [79]; { File pathname string }
DirStr = String [67]; { Drive and directory string }
NameStr = String [8]; { File name string }
ExtStr = String [4]; { File extension string }
TextBuf = array [0 .. 127] of Char;
{ Search record used by FindFirst and FindNext }
SearchRecFill = packed array [1 .. 21] of Byte8;
SearchRec = record
Fill: SearchRecFill;
Attr: Byte8;
Time,
Size: LongInt;
Name: {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__}
String [12]
{$else}
TString
{$endif}
end;
{ Date and time record used by PackTime and UnpackTime }
DateTime = record
Year, Month, Day, Hour, Min, Sec: Word
end;
{ 8086 CPU registers -- only used by the unportable Dos routines }
Registers = record
case Boolean of
False: (ax, bx, cx, dx, bp, si, di, ds, es, Flags: Word16);
True : (al, ah, bl, bh, cl, ch, dl, dh: Byte8)
end;
var
{ Error status variable }
DosError: Integer = 0;
procedure GetDate (var Year, Month, Day, DayOfWeek: Word);
procedure GetTime (var Hour, Minute, Second, Sec100: Word);
procedure GetCBreak (var BreakOn: Boolean);
procedure SetCBreak (BreakOn: Boolean);
{ GetVerify and SetVerify are dummies except for DJGPP (in the
assumption that any real OS knows by itself when and how to verify
its disks). }
procedure GetVerify (var VerifyOn: Boolean);
procedure SetVerify (VerifyOn: Boolean);
function DiskFree (Drive: Byte): LongInt;
function DiskSize (Drive: Byte): LongInt;
procedure GetFAttr (var f: GPC_AnyFile; var Attr: TDosAttr);
procedure SetFAttr (var f: GPC_AnyFile; Attr: TDosAttr);
procedure GetFTime (var f: GPC_AnyFile; var MTime: LongInt);
procedure SetFTime (var f: GPC_AnyFile; MTime: LongInt);
{ FindFirst and FindNext are quite inefficient since they emulate
all the brain-dead Dos stuff. If at all possible, the standard
routines OpenDir, ReadDir and CloseDir (in the GPC unit) should be
used instead. }
procedure FindFirst (const Path: String; Attr: TDosAttr; var SR:
SearchRec);
procedure FindNext (var SR: SearchRec);
procedure FindClose (var SR: SearchRec);
procedure UnpackTime (p: LongInt; var t: DateTime);
procedure PackTime (const t: DateTime; var p: LongInt);
function EnvCount: Integer;
function EnvStr (EnvIndex: Integer): TString;
procedure SwapVectors;
{ Exec executes a process via Execute, so RestoreTerminal is called
with the argument True before and False after executing the
process. }
procedure Exec (const Path, Params: String);
function DosExitCode: Word;
{ Unportable Dos-only routines and declarations }
{$ifdef __BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__}
{$ifdef __GO32__}
{ These are unportable Dos-only declarations and routines, since
interrupts are Dos and CPU specific (and have no place in a
high-level program, anyway). }
procedure Intr (IntNo: Byte; var Regs: Registers);
procedure MsDos (var Regs: Registers);
{$endif}
{ Though probably all non-Dos systems have versions numbers as well,
returning them here would usually not do what is expected, e.g.
testing if certain Dos features are present by comparing the
version number. Therefore, this routine always returns 7 (i.e.,
version 7.0) on non-Dos systems, in the assumption that any real
OS has at least the features of Dos 7. }
function DosVersion: Word;
{ Changing the system date and time is a system administration task,
not allowed to a normal process. On non-Dos systems, these
routines emulate the changed date/time, but only for GetTime and
GetDate (not the RTS date/time routines), and only for this
process, not for child processes or even the parent process or
system-wide. }
procedure SetDate (Year, Month, Day: Word);
procedure SetTime (Hour, Minute, Second, Sec100: Word);
{$endif}
The following listing contains the interface of the DosUnix unit.
This unit is there to overcome some of those differences between Dos and Unix systems that are not automatically hidden by GPC and the Run Time System. Currently features translation of bash style input/output redirections (`foo 2>&1') into `redir' calls for DJGPP (`redir -eo foo') and a way to read files with Dos CR/LF pairs on any system.
When necessary, new features will be added to the unit in future releases.
{ Some routines to support writing programs portable between Dos and
Unix. Perhaps it would be a good idea not to put features to make
Dos programs Unix-compatible (shell redirections) and vice versa
(reading Dos files from Unix) together into one unit, but rather
into two units, DosCompat and UnixCompat or so -- let's wait and
see, perhaps when more routines suited for this/these unit(s) will
be found, the design will become clearer ...
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit DosUnix;
interface
uses GPC;
{ This function is meant to be used when you want to invoke a system
shell command (e.g. via Execute or Exec from the Dos unit) and
want to specify input/output redirections for the command invoked.
It caters for the different syntax between DJGPP (with the `redir'
utility) and other systems.
To use it, code your redirections in bash style (see the table
below) in your command line string, pass this string to this
function, and the function's result to Execute or the other
routines.
The function translates the following bash style redirections
(characters in brackets are optional) into a redir call under Dos
systems except EMX, and leave them unchanged under other systems.
Note: `redir' comes with DJGPP, but it should be possible to
install it on other Dos systems as well. OS/2's shell, however,
supports bash style redirections, I was told, so we don't
translate on EMX.
[0]< file redirect standard input from file
[1]>[|] file redirect standard output to file
[1]>> file append standard output to file
[1]>&2 redirect standard output to standard error
2>[|] file redirect standard error to file
2>> file append standard error to file
2>&1 redirect standard error to standard output
&> file redirect both standard output and standard
error to file }
function TranslateRedirections (const Command: String) = s:
TString;
{ Under Unix, translates CR/LF pairs to single LF characters when
reading from f, and back when writing to f. Under Dos, does
nothing because the run time system alrady does this job. In the
result, you can read both Dos and Unix files, and files written
will be Dos. }
procedure AssignDos (var f: AnyFile; const FileName: String);
{ Translates a character from the "OEM" charset used under Dos to
the ISO-8859-1 (Latin1) character set. }
function OEM2Latin1 (ch: Char): Char;
function OEM2Latin1Str (const s: String) = r: TString;
{ Translates a character from the ISO-8859-1 (Latin1) character set
to the "OEM" charset used under Dos. }
function Latin12OEM (ch: Char): Char;
function Latin12OEMStr (const s: String) = r: TString;
The following listing contains the interface of the FileUtils unit.
This unit provides some routines for file and directory handling on a higher level than those provided by the RTS.
{ Some routines for file and directory handling on a higher level
than those provided by the RTS.
Copyright (C) 2000-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit FileUtils;
interface
uses GPC;
type
TStringProc = procedure (const s: String);
{ Finds all files matching the given Mask in the given Directory and
all subdirectories of it. The matching is done using all wildcards
and brace expansion, like MultiFileNameMatch does. For each file
found, FileAction is executed. For each directory found (including
`.' and `..' if they match the Mask!), DirAction is executed. If
MainDirFirst is True, this happens before processing the files in
the directory and below, otherwise afterwards. (The former is
useful, e.g., if this is used to copy a directory tree and
DirAction does a MkDir, while the latter behaviour is required
when removing a directory tree and DirAction does a RmDir.) Both
FileAction and DirAction can be nil in which case nothing is done
for files or directories found, respectively. (If DirAction is
nil, the value of DirsFirst does not matter.) Of course,
FileAction and DirAction may also be identical. The procedure
leaves InOutRes set in case of any error. If FileAction or
DirAction return with InOutRes set, FindFiles recognizes this and
returns immediately. }
procedure FindFiles (const Directory, Mask: String; MainDirFirst:
Boolean;
FileAction, DirAction: TStringProc); attribute
(iocritical);
{ Creates the directory given by Path and all directories in between
that are necessary. Does not report an error if the directory
already exists, but, of course, if it cannot be created because of
missing permissions or because Path already exists as a file. }
procedure MkDirs (const Path: String); attribute (iocritical);
{ Removes Path if empty as well as any empty parent directories.
Does not report an error if the directory is not empty. }
procedure RmDirs (const Path: String); attribute (iocritical);
{ Copies the file Source to Dest, overwriting Dest if it exists and
can be written to. Returns any errors in IOResult. If Mode >= 0,
it will change the permissions of Dest to Mode immediately after
creating it and before writing any data to it. That's useful,
e.g., if Dest is not meant to be world-readable, because if you'd
do a ChMod after FileCopy, you might leave the data readable
(depending on the umask) during the copying. If Mode < 0, Dest
will be set to the same permissions Source has. In any case, Dest
will be set to the modification time of Source after copying. On
any error, the destination file is erased. This is to avoid
leaving partial files in case of full file systems (one of the
most common reasons for errors). }
procedure FileCopy (const Source, Dest: String; Mode: Integer);
attribute (iocritical);
{ Creates a backup of FileName in the directory BackupDirectory or,
if BackupDirectory is empty, in the directory of FileName. Errors
are returned in IOResult (and on any error, no partial backup file
is left), but if FileName does not exist, this does *not* count as
an error (i.e., BackupFile will just return without setting
IOResult then). If OnlyUserReadable is True, the backup file will
be given only user-read permissions, nothing else.
The name chosen for the backup depends on the Simple and Short
parameters. The short names will fit into 8+3 characters (whenever
possible), while the long ones conform to the conventions used by
most GNU tools. If Simple is True, a simple backup file name will
be used, and previous backups under the same name will be
overwritten (if possible). Otherwise, backups will be numbered,
where the number is chosen to be larger than all existing backups,
so it will be unique and increasing in chronological order. In
particular:
Simple Short Backup name
True True Base name of FileName plus '.bak'
False True Base name of FileName plus '.b' plus a number
True False Base name plus extension of FileName plus '~'
False False Base name plus extension of FileName plus '.~', a
number and '~' }
procedure BackupFile (const FileName, BackupDirectory: String;
Simple, Short, OnlyUserReadable: Boolean); attribute (iocritical);
The following listing contains the interface of the GMP unit.
This unit provides an interface to the GNU Multiprecision Library to perform arithmetic on integer, rational and real numbers of unlimited size and precision.
To use this unit, you will need the `gmp' library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
{ Definitions for GNU multiple precision functions: arithmetic with
integer, rational and real numbers of arbitrary size and
precision.
Translation of the C header (gmp.h) of the GMP library. Tested
with GMP 3.x and 4.x.
To use the GMP unit, you will need the GMP library which can be
found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License.
Please also note the license of the GMP library. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
{$nested-comments}
{ If HAVE_GMP4 is set (the default unless HAVE_GMP3 is set, some
interface changes made in GMP 4 are taken into account.
I.e., if this is set wrong, programs might fail. However, this
only affects a few routines related to random numbers. }
{$if not defined (HAVE_GMP3)}
{$define HAVE_GMP4}
{$endif}
{$undef GMP} { in case it's set by the user }
unit GMP;
interface
uses GPC;
{$if defined (__mips) and defined (_ABIN32) and defined (HAVE_GMP3)}
{ Force the use of 64-bit limbs for all 64-bit MIPS CPUs if ABI
permits. }
{$define _LONG_LONG_LIMB}
{$endif}
type
{$ifdef _SHORT_LIMB}
mp_limb_t = CCardinal;
mp_limb_signed_t = CInteger;
{$elif defined (_LONG_LONG_LIMB)}
mp_limb_t = LongCard;
mp_limb_signed_t = LongInt;
{$else}
mp_limb_t = MedCard;
mp_limb_signed_t = MedInt;
{$endif}
mp_ptr = ^mp_limb_t;
{$if defined (_CRAY) and not defined (_CRAYMPP)}
mp_size_t = CInteger;
mp_exp_t = CInteger;
{$else}
mp_size_t = MedInt;
mp_exp_t = MedInt;
{$endif}
mpz_t = record
mp_alloc,
mp_size: CInteger;
mp_d: mp_ptr
end;
mpz_array_ptr = ^mpz_array;
mpz_array = array [0 .. MaxVarSize div SizeOf (mpz_t) - 1] of
mpz_t;
mpq_t = record
mp_num,
mp_den: mpz_t
end;
mpf_t = record
mp_prec,
mp_size: CInteger;
mp_exp: mp_exp_t;
mp_d: mp_ptr
end;
TAllocFunction = function (Size: SizeType): Pointer;
TReAllocFunction = function (var Dest: Pointer; OldSize, NewSize:
SizeType): Pointer;
TDeAllocProcedure = procedure (Src: Pointer; Size: SizeType);
var
mp_bits_per_limb: CInteger; attribute (const); external
name '__gmp_bits_per_limb';
procedure mp_set_memory_functions (AllocFunction: TAllocFunction;
ReAllocFunction:
TReAllocFunction;
DeAllocProcedure:
TDeAllocProcedure); external name '__gmp_set_memory_functions';
{ Integer (i.e. Z) routines }
procedure mpz_init (var Dest: mpz_t); external
name '__gmpz_init';
procedure mpz_clear (var Dest: mpz_t); external
name '__gmpz_clear';
function mpz_realloc (var Dest: mpz_t; NewAlloc:
mp_size_t): Pointer; external name '__gmpz_realloc';
procedure mpz_array_init (Dest: mpz_array_ptr; ArraySize,
FixedNumBits: mp_size_t); external name '__gmpz_array_init';
procedure mpz_set (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_set';
procedure mpz_set_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard);
external name '__gmpz_set_ui';
procedure mpz_set_si (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedInt);
external name '__gmpz_set_si';
procedure mpz_set_d (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: Real);
external name '__gmpz_set_d';
procedure mpz_set_q (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: mpq_t);
external name '__gmpz_set_q';
procedure mpz_set_f (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: mpf_t);
external name '__gmpz_set_f';
function mpz_set_str (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CString; Base:
CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_set_str';
procedure mpz_init_set (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_init_set';
procedure mpz_init_set_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard);
external name '__gmpz_init_set_ui';
procedure mpz_init_set_si (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedInt);
external name '__gmpz_init_set_si';
procedure mpz_init_set_d (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: Real);
external name '__gmpz_init_set_d';
function mpz_init_set_str (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CString; Base:
CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_init_set_str';
function mpz_get_ui (protected var Src: mpz_t): MedCard;
external name '__gmpz_get_ui';
function mpz_get_si (protected var Src: mpz_t): MedInt;
external name '__gmpz_get_si';
function mpz_get_d (protected var Src: mpz_t): Real;
external name '__gmpz_get_d';
{ Pass nil for Dest to let the function allocate memory for it }
function mpz_get_str (Dest: CString; Base: CInteger;
protected var Src: mpz_t): CString; external
name '__gmpz_get_str';
procedure mpz_add (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_add';
procedure mpz_add_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_add_ui';
procedure mpz_sub (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_sub';
procedure mpz_sub_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_sub_ui';
procedure mpz_mul (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_mul';
procedure mpz_mul_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_mul_ui';
procedure mpz_mul_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_mul_2exp';
procedure mpz_neg (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_neg';
procedure mpz_abs (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_abs';
procedure mpz_fac_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard);
external name '__gmpz_fac_ui';
procedure mpz_tdiv_q (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_q';
procedure mpz_tdiv_q_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_q_ui';
procedure mpz_tdiv_r (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_r';
procedure mpz_tdiv_r_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_r_ui';
procedure mpz_tdiv_qr (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected
var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_qr';
procedure mpz_tdiv_qr_ui (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected
var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external
name '__gmpz_tdiv_qr_ui';
procedure mpz_fdiv_q (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_q';
function mpz_fdiv_q_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_fdiv_q_ui';
procedure mpz_fdiv_r (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_r';
function mpz_fdiv_r_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_fdiv_r_ui';
procedure mpz_fdiv_qr (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected
var Src1, Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_qr';
function mpz_fdiv_qr_ui (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected
var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external
name '__gmpz_fdiv_qr_ui';
function mpz_fdiv_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2:
MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_fdiv_ui';
procedure mpz_cdiv_q (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_cdiv_q';
function mpz_cdiv_q_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_cdiv_q_ui';
procedure mpz_cdiv_r (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_cdiv_r';
function mpz_cdiv_r_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_cdiv_r_ui';
procedure mpz_cdiv_qr (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected
var Src1,Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_cdiv_qr';
function mpz_cdiv_qr_ui (var DestQ, DestR: mpz_t; protected
var Src1: mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external
name '__gmpz_cdiv_qr_ui';
function mpz_cdiv_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t;
Src2:MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_cdiv_ui';
procedure mpz_mod (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var
Src1,Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_mod';
procedure mpz_divexact (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var
Src1,Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_divexact';
procedure mpz_tdiv_q_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_q_2exp';
procedure mpz_tdiv_r_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_tdiv_r_2exp';
procedure mpz_fdiv_q_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_q_2exp';
procedure mpz_fdiv_r_2exp (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_fdiv_r_2exp';
procedure mpz_powm (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Base,
Exponent, Modulus: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_powm';
procedure mpz_powm_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Base:
mpz_t; Exponent: MedCard; protected var Modulus: mpz_t); external
name '__gmpz_powm_ui';
procedure mpz_pow_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Base:
mpz_t; Exponent: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_pow_ui';
procedure mpz_ui_pow_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Base, Exponent:
MedCard); external name '__gmpz_ui_pow_ui';
procedure mpz_sqrt (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_sqrt';
procedure mpz_sqrtrem (var Dest, DestR: mpz_t; protected
var Src: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_sqrtrem';
function mpz_perfect_square_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_perfect_square_p';
function mpz_probab_prime_p (protected var Src: mpz_t;
Repetitions: CInteger): CInteger; external
name '__gmpz_probab_prime_p';
procedure mpz_gcd (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_gcd';
function mpz_gcd_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_gcd_ui';
procedure mpz_gcdext (var Dest, DestA, DestB: mpz_t;
protected var SrcA, SrcB: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_gcdext';
function mpz_invert (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src,
Modulus: mpz_t): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_invert';
function mpz_jacobi (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t):
CInteger; external name '__gmpz_jacobi';
function mpz_cmp (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t):
CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmp';
function mpz_cmp_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2:
MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmp_ui';
function mpz_cmp_si (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2:
MedInt): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmp_si';
function mpz_sgn (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
attribute (inline);
procedure mpz_and (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_and';
procedure mpz_ior (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_ior';
procedure mpz_com (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_com';
function mpz_popcount (protected var Src: mpz_t): MedCard;
external name '__gmpz_popcount';
function mpz_hamdist (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t):
MedCard; external name '__gmpz_hamdist';
function mpz_scan0 (protected var Src: mpz_t;
StartingBit: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_scan0';
function mpz_scan1 (protected var Src: mpz_t;
StartingBit: MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_scan1';
procedure mpz_setbit (var Dest: mpz_t; BitIndex: MedCard);
external name '__gmpz_setbit';
procedure mpz_clrbit (var Dest: mpz_t; BitIndex: MedCard);
external name '__gmpz_clrbit';
procedure mpz_random (var Dest: mpz_t; MaxSize:
mp_size_t); external name '__gmpz_random';
procedure mpz_random2 (var Dest: mpz_t; MaxSize:
mp_size_t); external name '__gmpz_random2';
function mpz_sizeinbase (protected var Src: mpz_t; Base:
CInteger): SizeType; external name '__gmpz_sizeinbase';
{ Rational (i.e. Q) routines }
procedure mpq_canonicalize (var Dest: mpq_t); external
name '__gmpq_canonicalize';
procedure mpq_init (var Dest: mpq_t); external
name '__gmpq_init';
procedure mpq_clear (var Dest: mpq_t); external
name '__gmpq_clear';
procedure mpq_set (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src:
mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_set';
procedure mpq_set_z (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpq_set_z';
procedure mpq_set_ui (var Dest: mpq_t; Nom, Den: MedCard);
external name '__gmpq_set_ui';
procedure mpq_set_si (var Dest: mpq_t; Nom: MedInt; Den:
MedCard); external name '__gmpq_set_si';
procedure mpq_add (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_add';
procedure mpq_sub (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_sub';
procedure mpq_mul (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_mul';
procedure mpq_div (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_div';
procedure mpq_neg (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src:
mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_neg';
procedure mpq_inv (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src:
mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_inv';
function mpq_cmp (protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t):
CInteger; external name '__gmpq_cmp';
function mpq_cmp_ui (protected var Src1: mpq_t; Nom2,
Den2: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpq_cmp_ui';
function mpq_sgn (protected var Src: mpq_t): CInteger;
attribute (inline);
function mpq_equal (protected var Src1, Src2: mpq_t):
CInteger; external name '__gmpq_equal';
function mpq_get_d (protected var Src: mpq_t): Real;
external name '__gmpq_get_d';
procedure mpq_set_num (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpq_set_num';
procedure mpq_set_den (var Dest: mpq_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpq_set_den';
procedure mpq_get_num (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_get_num';
procedure mpq_get_den (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpq_t); external name '__gmpq_get_den';
{ Floating point (i.e. R) routines }
procedure mpf_set_default_prec (Precision: MedCard); external
name '__gmpf_set_default_prec';
procedure mpf_init (var Dest: mpf_t); external
name '__gmpf_init';
procedure mpf_init2 (var Dest: mpf_t; Precision:
MedCard); external name '__gmpf_init2';
procedure mpf_clear (var Dest: mpf_t); external
name '__gmpf_clear';
procedure mpf_set_prec (var Dest: mpf_t; Precision:
MedCard); external name '__gmpf_set_prec';
function mpf_get_prec (protected var Src: mpf_t): MedCard;
external name '__gmpf_get_prec';
procedure mpf_set_prec_raw (var Dest: mpf_t; Precision:
MedCard); external name '__gmpf_set_prec_raw';
procedure mpf_set (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_set';
procedure mpf_set_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedCard);
external name '__gmpf_set_ui';
procedure mpf_set_si (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedInt);
external name '__gmpf_set_si';
procedure mpf_set_d (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: Real);
external name '__gmpf_set_d';
procedure mpf_set_z (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpf_set_z';
procedure mpf_set_q (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpq_t); external name '__gmpf_set_q';
function mpf_set_str (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: CString; Base:
CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_set_str';
procedure mpf_init_set (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_init_set';
procedure mpf_init_set_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedCard);
external name '__gmpf_init_set_ui';
procedure mpf_init_set_si (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedInt);
external name '__gmpf_init_set_si';
procedure mpf_init_set_d (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: Real);
external name '__gmpf_init_set_d';
function mpf_init_set_str (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: CString; Base:
CInteger): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_init_set_str';
function mpf_get_d (protected var Src: mpf_t): Real;
external name '__gmpf_get_d';
{ Pass nil for Dest to let the function allocate memory for it }
function mpf_get_str (Dest: CString; var Exponent:
mp_exp_t; Base: CInteger;
NumberOfDigits: SizeType; protected
var Src: mpf_t): CString; external name '__gmpf_get_str';
procedure mpf_add (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_add';
procedure mpf_add_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1:
mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_add_ui';
procedure mpf_sub (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_sub';
procedure mpf_ui_sub (var Dest: mpf_t; Src1: MedCard;
protected var Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_ui_sub';
procedure mpf_sub_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1:
mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_sub_ui';
procedure mpf_mul (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_mul';
procedure mpf_mul_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1:
mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_mul_ui';
procedure mpf_div (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_div';
procedure mpf_ui_div (var Dest: mpf_t; Src1: MedCard;
protected var Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_ui_div';
procedure mpf_div_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1:
mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_div_ui';
procedure mpf_sqrt (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_sqrt';
procedure mpf_sqrt_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: MedCard);
external name '__gmpf_sqrt_ui';
procedure mpf_neg (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_neg';
procedure mpf_abs (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_abs';
procedure mpf_mul_2exp (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1:
mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_mul_2exp';
procedure mpf_div_2exp (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1:
mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_div_2exp';
function mpf_cmp (protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t):
CInteger; external name '__gmpf_cmp';
function mpf_cmp_si (protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2:
MedInt): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_cmp_si';
function mpf_cmp_ui (protected var Src1: mpf_t; Src2:
MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_cmp_ui';
function mpf_eq (protected var Src1, Src2: mpf_t;
NumberOfBits: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpf_eq';
procedure mpf_reldiff (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_reldiff';
function mpf_sgn (protected var Src: mpf_t): CInteger;
attribute (inline);
procedure mpf_random2 (var Dest: mpf_t; MaxSize: mp_size_t;
MaxExp: mp_exp_t); external name '__gmpf_random2';
{$if False} { @@ commented out because they use C file pointers }
function mpz_inp_str (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CFilePtr;
Base: CInteger): SizeType; external name '__gmpz_inp_str';
function mpz_inp_raw (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: CFilePtr):
SizeType; external name '__gmpz_inp_raw';
function mpz_out_str (Dest: CFilePtr; Base: CInteger;
protected var Src: mpz_t): SizeType; external
name '__gmpz_out_str';
function mpz_out_raw (Dest: CFilePtr; protected var Src:
mpz_t): SizeType ; external name '__gmpz_out_raw';
{ @@ mpf_out_str has a bug in GMP 2.0.2: it writes a spurious #0
before the exponent for negative numbers }
function mpf_out_str (Dest: CFilePtr; Base: CInteger;
NumberOfDigits: SizeType; protected var Src: mpf_t): SizeType;
external name '__gmpf_out_str';
function mpf_inp_str (var Dest: mpf_t; Src: CFilePtr;
Base: CInteger): SizeType; external name '__gmpf_inp_str';
{$endif}
{ Available random number generation algorithms. }
type
gmp_randalg_t = (GMPRandAlgLC { Linear congruential. });
const
GMPRandAlgDefault = GMPRandAlgLC;
{ Linear congruential data struct. }
type
gmp_randata_lc = record
a: mpz_t; { Multiplier. }
c: MedCard; { Adder. }
m: mpz_t; { Modulus (valid only if M2Exp = 0). }
M2Exp: MedCard; { If <> 0, modulus is 2 ^ M2Exp. }
end;
type
gmp_randstate_t = record
Seed: mpz_t; { Current seed. }
Alg: gmp_randalg_t; { Algorithm used. }
AlgData: record { Algorithm specific data. }
case gmp_randalg_t of
GMPRandAlgLC: (lc: ^gmp_randata_lc) { Linear congruential. }
end
end;
procedure gmp_randinit (var State: gmp_randstate_t; Alg:
gmp_randalg_t; ...); external name '__gmp_randinit';
procedure gmp_randinit_lc (var State: gmp_randstate_t; {$ifdef
HAVE_GMP4} protected var {$endif} a: mpz_t; c: MedCard; {$ifdef
HAVE_GMP4} protected var {$endif} m: mpz_t); external
name '__gmp_randinit_lc';
procedure gmp_randinit_lc_2exp (var State: gmp_randstate_t; {$ifdef
HAVE_GMP4} protected var {$endif} a: mpz_t; c: MedCard; M2Exp:
MedCard); external name '__gmp_randinit_lc_2exp';
procedure gmp_randseed (var State: gmp_randstate_t; Seed:
mpz_t); external name '__gmp_randseed';
procedure gmp_randseed_ui (var State: gmp_randstate_t; Seed:
MedCard); external name '__gmp_randseed_ui';
procedure gmp_randclear (var State: gmp_randstate_t);
external name '__gmp_randclear';
procedure mpz_addmul_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_addmul_ui';
procedure mpz_bin_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1:
mpz_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_bin_ui';
procedure mpz_bin_uiui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src1, Src2:
MedCard); external name '__gmpz_bin_uiui';
function mpz_cmpabs (protected var Src1, Src2: mpz_t):
CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmpabs';
function mpz_cmpabs_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2:
MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_cmpabs_ui';
procedure mpz_dump (protected var Src: mpz_t); external
name '__gmpz_dump';
procedure mpz_fib_ui (var Dest: mpz_t; Src: MedCard);
external name '__gmpz_fib_ui';
function mpz_fits_sint_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_fits_sint_p';
function mpz_fits_slong_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_fits_slong_p';
function mpz_fits_sshort_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_fits_sshort_p';
function mpz_fits_uint_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_fits_uint_p';
function mpz_fits_ulong_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_fits_ulong_p';
function mpz_fits_ushort_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_fits_ushort_p';
procedure mpz_lcm (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_lcm';
procedure mpz_nextprime (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_nextprime';
function mpz_perfect_power_p (protected var Src: mpz_t): CInteger;
external name '__gmpz_perfect_power_p';
function mpz_remove (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_remove';
function mpz_root (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src:
mpz_t; n: MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_root';
procedure mpz_rrandomb (var ROP: mpz_t; var State:
gmp_randstate_t; n: MedCard); external name '__gmpz_rrandomb';
procedure mpz_swap (var v1, v2: mpz_t); external
name '__gmpz_swap';
function mpz_tdiv_ui (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2:
MedCard): MedCard; external name '__gmpz_tdiv_ui';
function mpz_tstbit (protected var Src1: mpz_t; Src2:
MedCard): CInteger; external name '__gmpz_tstbit';
procedure mpz_urandomb ({$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} var {$endif} ROP:
mpz_t; var State: gmp_randstate_t; n: MedCard); external
name '__gmpz_urandomb';
procedure mpz_urandomm ({$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} var {$endif} ROP:
mpz_t; var State: gmp_randstate_t; {$ifdef HAVE_GMP4} protected
var {$endif} n: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_urandomm';
procedure mpz_xor (var Dest: mpz_t; protected var Src1,
Src2: mpz_t); external name '__gmpz_xor';
procedure mpq_set_d (var Dest: mpq_t; Src: Real);
external name '__gmpq_set_d';
procedure mpf_ceil (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_ceil';
procedure mpf_floor (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_floor';
{$ifdef HAVE_GMP4}
function mpf_get_si (protected var Src: mpf_t): MedInt;
external name '__gmpf_get_si';
function mpf_get_ui (protected var Src: mpf_t): MedCard;
external name '__gmpf_get_ui';
function mpf_get_d_2exp (var Exp: MedInt; protected var Src:
mpf_t): Real; external name '__gmpf_get_d_2exp';
{$endif}
procedure mpf_pow_ui (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1:
mpf_t; Src2: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_pow_ui';
procedure mpf_trunc (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src:
mpf_t); external name '__gmpf_trunc';
procedure mpf_urandomb (ROP: mpf_t; var State:
gmp_randstate_t; n: MedCard); external name '__gmpf_urandomb';
const
GMPErrorNone = 0;
GMPErrorUnsupportedArgument = 1;
GMPErrorDivisionByZero = 2;
GMPErrorSqrtOfNegative = 4;
GMPErrorInvalidArgument = 8;
GMPErrorAllocate = 16;
var
gmp_errno: CInteger; external name '__gmp_errno';
{ Extensions to the GMP library, implemented in this unit }
procedure mpf_exp (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t);
procedure mpf_ln (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t);
procedure mpf_pow (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src1, Src2:
mpf_t);
procedure mpf_sin (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t);
procedure mpf_cos (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t);
procedure mpf_arctan (var Dest: mpf_t; protected var Src: mpf_t);
procedure mpf_pi (var Dest: mpf_t);
The following listing contains the interface of the GPCUtil unit.
This unit provides some utility routines for compatibility to some units available for BP, like some Turbo Power units.
{ Some utility routines for compatibility to some units available
for BP, like some `Turbo Power' units.
@@NOTE - SOME OF THE ROUTINES IN THIS UNIT MAY NOT WORK CORRECTLY.
TEST CAREFULLY AND USE WITH CARE!
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Authors: Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com>
Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
module GPCUtil;
export GPCUtil = all
(
{ Return the current working directory }
GetCurrentDirectory => ThisDirectory,
{ Does a directory exist? }
DirectoryExists => IsDirectory,
{ Does file name s exist? }
FileExists => ExistFile,
{ Return just the directory path of Path. Returns
DirSelf + DirSeparator if Path contains no directory. }
DirFromPath => JustPathName,
{ Return just the file name part without extension of Path.
Empty if Path contains no file name. }
NameFromPath => JustFileName,
{ Return just the extension of Path. Empty if Path contains
no extension. }
ExtFromPath => JustExtension,
{ Return the full pathname of Path }
FExpand => FullPathName,
{ Add a DirSeparator to the end of s if there is not
already one. }
ForceAddDirSeparator => AddBackSlash,
{ Return a string stripped of leading spaces }
TrimLeftStr => TrimLead,
{ Return a string stripped of trailing spaces }
TrimRightStr => TrimTrail,
{ Return a string stripped of leading and trailing spaces }
TrimBothStr => Trim,
{ Convert a string to lowercase }
LoCaseStr => StLoCase,
{ Convert a string to uppercase }
UpCaseStr => StUpCase
);
import GPC;
{ Replace all occurences of OldC with NewC in s and return the
result }
function ReplaceChar (const s: String; OldC, NewC: Char) = Res:
TString;
{ Break a string into 2 parts, using Ch as a marker }
function BreakStr (const Src: String; var Dest1, Dest2: String; ch:
Char): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Convert a CString to an Integer }
function PChar2Int (s: CString) = i: Integer;
{ Convert a CString to a LongInt }
function PChar2Long (s: CString) = i: LongInt;
{ Convert a CString to a Double }
function PChar2Double (s: CString) = x: Double;
{ Search for s as an executable in the path and return its location
(full pathname) }
function PathLocate (const s: String): TString;
{ Copy file Src to Dest and return the number of bytes written }
function CopyFile (const Src, Dest: String; BufSize: Integer):
LongInt; attribute (ignorable);
{ Copy file Src to Dest and return the number of bytes written;
report the number of bytes written versus total size of the source
file }
function CopyFileEx (const Src, Dest: String; BufSize: Integer;
function Report (Reached, Total: LongInt): LongInt) = BytesCopied:
LongInt; attribute (ignorable);
{ Turbo Power compatibility }
{ Execute the program prog. Dummy1 and Dummy2 are for compatibility
only; they are ignored. }
function ExecDos (const Prog: String; Dummy1: Boolean; Dummy2:
Pointer): Integer; attribute (ignorable);
{ Return whether Src exists in the path as an executable -- if so
return its full location in Dest }
function ExistOnPath (const Src: String; var Dest: String) =
Existing: Boolean;
{ Change the extension of s to Ext (do not include the dot!) }
function ForceExtension (const s, Ext: String) = Res: TString;
{ Convert Integer to PChar; uses NewCString to allocate memory for
the result, so you must call StrDispose to free the memory later }
function Int2PChar (i: Integer): PChar;
{ Convert Integer to string }
function Int2Str (i: Integer) = s: TString;
{ Convert string to Integer }
function Str2Int (const s: String; var i: Integer): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Convert string to LongInt }
function Str2Long (const s: String; var i: LongInt): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Convert string to Double }
function Str2Real (const s: String; var i: Double): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Return a string right-padded to length Len with ch }
function PadCh (const s: String; ch: Char; Len: Integer) = Padded:
TString;
{ Return a string right-padded to length Len with spaces }
function Pad (const s: String; Len: Integer): TString;
{ Return a string left-padded to length Len with ch }
function LeftPadCh (const s: String; ch: Char; Len: Byte) = Padded:
TString;
{ Return a string left-padded to length Len with blanks }
function LeftPad (const s: String; Len: Integer): TString;
{ Uniform access to big memory blocks for GPC and BP. Of course, for
programs that are meant only for GPC, you can use the usual
New/Dispose routines. But for programs that should compile with
GPC and BP, you can use the following routines for GPC. In the GPC
unit for BP (gpc-bp.pas), you can find emulations for BP that try
to provide access to as much memory as possible, despite the
limitations of BP. The drawback is that this memory cannot be used
freely, but only with the following moving routines. }
type
PBigMem = ^TBigMem;
TBigMem (MaxNumber: SizeType) = record
{ Public fields }
Number, BlockSize: SizeType;
Mappable: Boolean;
{ Private fields }
Pointers: array [1 .. Max (1, MaxNumber)] of ^Byte
end;
{ Note: the number of blocks actually allocated may be smaller than
WantedNumber. Check the Number field of the result. }
function AllocateBigMem (WantedNumber, aBlockSize: SizeType;
WantMappable: Boolean) = p: PBigMem;
procedure DisposeBigMem (p: PBigMem);
procedure MoveToBigMem (var Source; p: PBigMem; BlockNumber:
SizeType);
procedure MoveFromBigMem (p: PBigMem; BlockNumber: SizeType; var
Dest);
{ Maps a big memory block into normal addressable memory and returns
its address. The memory must have been allocated with
WantMappable = True. The mapping is only valid until the next
MapBigMem call. }
function MapBigMem (p: PBigMem; BlockNumber: SizeType): Pointer;
The following listing contains the interface of the HeapMon unit.
This unit provide a rather primitive means to watch the heap, i.e. check if all pointers that were allocated are released again. This is meant as a debugging help for avoiding memory leaks.
More extensive heap checking is provided by libraries like `efence' which can be used in GPC programs without special provisions.
{ A unit to watch the heap, i.e. check if all pointers that were
allocated are released again. It is meant as a debugging help to
detect memory leaks.
Use it in the main program before all other units. When, at the
end of the program, some pointers that were allocated, have not
been released, the unit writes a report to StdErr or another file
(see below). Only pointers allocated via the Pascal mechanisms
(New, GetMem) are tracked, not pointers allocated with direct libc
calls or from C code. After a runtime error, pointers are not
checked.
Note that many units and libraries allocate memory for their own
purposes and don't always release it at the end. Therefore, the
usefulness of this unit is rather limited.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit HeapMon;
interface
uses GPC;
{ This unit is automatically activated when used. The following
declarations are only needed for special purposes. }
{ The report generated at the end can be redirected to a certain
file by pointing HeapMonOutput to it. If not set, the report will
be printed to the error messages file given with `--gpc-rts'
options if given, and StdErr otherwise. }
var
HeapMonOutput: ^Text = nil;
{ HeapMonReport can be used to print a report on non-released memory
blocks at an arbitrary point during a program run to the file f.
It is invoked automatically at the end, so usually you don't have
to call it. Returns True if any non-released blocks were found,
False otherwise. }
function HeapMonReport (var f: Text; DoRestoreTerminal: Boolean) =
Res: Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
The following listing contains the interface of the Intl unit.
This unit provides national language support via locales and .mo files.
WARNING: The intl unit is NOT part of the gpc accompanying MirOS!
{ Welcome to the wonderful world of
INTERNATIONALIZATION (i18n).
This unit provides the powerful mechanism of national language
support by accessing `.mo' files and locale information.
It includes:
locales (not xlocales) and libintl.
See documentation for gettext (`info gettext') for details.
Because GPC can deal with both CStrings and Pascal Strings, there
is an interface for both types of arguments and function results
with slightly different names.
E.g. for Pascal strings:
function GetText (const MsgId: String): TString;
And the same as above, but with a C interface:
function GetTextC (MsgId: CString): CString;
`PLConv' in Pascal is very different from `struct lconv *' in C.
Element names do not have underscores and have sometimes different
sizes. The conversion is done automatically and has correct
results.
Furthermore, we have a tool similar to `xgettext' to extract all
strings out of a Pascal source. It extracts the strings and writes
a complete `.po' file to a file. See
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/eike/
The filename is pas2po-VERSION.tar.gz.
Copyright (C) 2001-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Eike Lange <eike.lange@uni-essen.de>
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as
published by the Free Software Foundation, version 2.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this library; see the file COPYING.LIB. If not,
write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place -
Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit Intl;
interface
uses GPC;
type
IntlString = String (16);
{ Pascal translation from OrigLConv in intlc.c }
PLConv = ^TLConv;
TLConv = record
{ Numeric (non-monetary) information. }
{ Decimal point character. }
DecimalPoint: IntlString;
{ Thousands separator. }
ThousandsSep: IntlString;
{ Each element is the number of digits in each group;
elements with higher indices are farther left.
An element with value CharMax means that no further grouping
is done.
An element with value Chr (0) means that the previous element
is used for all groups farther left. }
Grouping: IntlString;
{ Monetary information. }
{ First three chars are a currency symbol from ISO 4217.
Fourth char is the separator. Fifth char is Chr (0). }
IntCurrSymbol: IntlString;
{ Local currency symbol. }
CurrencySymbol: IntlString;
{ Decimal point character. }
MonDecimalPoint: IntlString;
{ Thousands separator. }
MonThousandsSep: IntlString;
{ Like `Grouping' element (above). }
MonGrouping: IntlString;
{ Sign for positive values. }
PositiveSign: IntlString;
{ Sign for negative values. }
NegativeSign: IntlString;
{ Int'l fractional digits. }
IntFracDigits: ByteInt;
{ Local fractional digits. }
FracDigits: ByteInt;
{ 1 if CurrencySymbol precedes a positive value, 0 if it
succeeds. }
PCSPrecedes: ByteInt;
{ 1 iff a space separates CurrencySymbol from a positive
value. }
PSepBySpace: ByteInt;
{ 1 if CurrencySymbol precedes a negative value, 0 if it
succeeds. }
NCSPrecedes: ByteInt;
{ 1 iff a space separates CurrencySymbol from a negative
value. }
NSepBySpace: ByteInt;
{ Positive and negative sign positions:
0 Parentheses surround the quantity and CurrencySymbol.
1 The sign string precedes the quantity and CurrencySymbol.
2 The sign string follows the quantity and CurrencySymbol.
3 The sign string immediately precedes the CurrencySymbol.
4 The sign string immediately follows the CurrencySymbol. }
PSignPosn,
NSignPosn: ByteInt;
end;
{ Please do not assign anything to these identifiers! }
var
LC_CTYPE: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_CTYPE';
LC_NUMERIC: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_NUMERIC';
LC_TIME: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_TIME';
LC_COLLATE: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_COLLATE';
LC_MONETARY: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_MONETARY';
LC_MESSAGES: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_MESSAGES';
LC_ALL: CInteger; external name '_p_LC_ALL';
CharMax: Char; external name '_p_CHAR_MAX';
{@section Locales }
{ Set and/or return the current locale. }
function SetLocale (Category: Integer; const Locale: String):
TString; attribute (ignorable);
{ Set and/or return the current locale. Same as above, but returns
a CString. }
function SetLocaleC (Category: Integer; const Locale: String):
CString; attribute (ignorable);
{ Return the numeric/monetary information for the current locale.
The result is allocated from the heap. You can Dispose it when
you don't need it anymore. }
function LocaleConv: PLConv;
{@section GetText }
{ Look up MsgId in the current default message catalog for the
current LC_MESSAGES locale. If not found, returns MsgId itself
(the default text). }
function GetText (const MsgId: String): TString;
{ Same as above, but with a C interface }
function GetTextC (MsgId: CString): CString;
{ Look up MsgId in the DomainName message catalog for the current
LC_MESSAGES locale. }
function DGetText (const DomainName, MsgId: String): TString;
{ Same as above, but with a C interface }
function DGetTextC (DomainName, MsgId: CString): CString;
{ Look up MsgId in the DomainName message catalog for the current
Category locale. }
function DCGetText (const DomainName, MsgId: String; Category:
Integer): TString;
{ Same as above, but with a C interface }
function DCGetTextC (DomainName, MsgId: CString; Category: Integer):
CString;
{ Set the current default message catalog to DomainName.
If DomainName is empty, reset to the default of `messages'. }
function TextDomain (const DomainName: String): TString; attribute
(ignorable);
{ Same as above, but with a C interface.
If DomainName is nil, return the current default. }
function TextDomainC (DomainName: CString): CString; attribute
(ignorable);
{ Specify that the DomainName message catalog will be found
in DirName rather than in the system locale data base. }
function BindTextDomain (const DomainName, DirName: String):
TString; attribute (ignorable);
{ Same as above, but with a C interface }
function BindTextDomainC (DomainName, DirName: CString): CString;
attribute (ignorable);
The following listing contains the interface of the MD5 unit.
This unit provides functions to compute `MD5' message digest of files or memory blocks, according to the definition of `MD5' in RFC 1321 from April 1992.
{ $MirOS: gcc/gcc/p/doc/generated/md5.texi,v 1.2 2009/12/27 16:26:58 tg Exp $
Copyright (c) 2005
Free Software Foundation, Inc. <gpc@gnu.de>
written by:
Thorsten "mirabilos" Glaser <tg@mirbsd.org>
Frank Heckenbach
Licensee is hereby permitted to deal in this work without restric-
tion, including unlimited rights to use, publicly perform, modify,
merge, distribute, sell, give away or sublicence, provided all co-
pyright notices above, these terms and the disclaimer are retained
in all redistributions or reproduced in accompanying documentation
or other materials provided with binary redistributions.
Licensor offers the work "AS IS" and WITHOUT WARRANTY of any kind,
express, or implied, to the maximum extent permitted by applicable
law, without malicious intent or gross negligence; in no event may
licensor, an author or contributor be held liable for any indirect
or other damage, or direct damage except proven a consequence of a
direct error of said person and intended use of this work, loss or
other issues arising in any way out of its use, even if advised of
the possibility of such damage or existence of a nontrivial bug.
Replacement for the GNU md5 unit, which was licenced under the GNU
GPL, thus propagating the requirement to be GPL'd to any code that
used the old unit. The GNU md5 unit was the only one not under the
LGPL or GPL with library exception clause; this fixes it. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit MD5;
interface
uses GPC;
{ Representation of a MD5 value. It is always in little endian byte
order and therefore portable. }
type
Card8 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8);
TMD5 = array [1 .. 16] of Card8;
const
MD5StrLength = 2 * High (TMD5);
type
MD5String = String (MD5StrLength);
{ Computes MD5 message digest for Length bytes in Buffer. }
procedure MD5Buffer (const Buffer; Length: SizeType; var MD5: TMD5);
attribute (name = '_p_MD5Buffer');
{ Computes MD5 message digest for the contents of the file f. }
procedure MD5File (var f: File; var MD5: TMD5); attribute
(iocritical, name = '_p_MD5File');
{ Initializes a MD5 value with zeros. }
procedure MD5Clear (var MD5: TMD5); attribute (name
= '_p_MD5Clear');
{ Compares two MD5 values for equality. }
function MD5Compare (const Value1, Value2: TMD5): Boolean; attribute
(name = '_p_MD5Compare');
{ Converts an MD5 value to a string. }
function MD5Str (const MD5: TMD5) = s: MD5String; attribute (name
= '_p_MD5Str');
{ Converts a string to an MD5 value. Returns True if successful. }
function MD5Val (const s: String; var MD5: TMD5): Boolean; attribute
(name = '_p_MD5Val');
{ Composes two MD5 values to a single one. }
function MD5Compose (const Value1, Value2: TMD5) = Dest: TMD5;
attribute (name = '_p_MD5Compose');
The following listing contains the interface of the Overlay unit.
This is just a dummy replacement for BP's `Overlay' unit, since GPC doesn't need overlays.
{ Dummy BP compatible overlay unit for GPC
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit Overlay;
interface
const
OvrOK = 0;
OvrError = -1;
OvrNotFound = -2;
OvrNoMemory = -3;
OvrIOError = -4;
OvrNoEMSDriver = -5;
OvrNoEMSMemory = -6;
const
OvrEmsPages: Word = 0;
OvrTrapCount: Word = 0;
OvrLoadCount: Word = 0;
OvrFileMode: Byte = 0;
type
OvrReadFunc = function (OvrSeg: Word): Integer;
var
OvrReadBuf: OvrReadFunc;
OvrResult: Integer = 0;
procedure OvrInit (aFileName: String);
procedure OvrInitEMS;
procedure OvrSetBuf (Size: LongInt);
function OvrGetBuf: LongInt;
procedure OvrSetRetry (Size: LongInt);
function OvrGetRetry: LongInt;
procedure OvrClearBuf;
The following listing contains the interface of the Pipes unit.
This unit provides routines to start a child process and write to/read from its Input/Output/StdErr via pipes. All of this is emulated transparently under Dos as far as possible.
{ Piping data from and to processes
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
{ Keep this consistent with the one in pipesc.c }
{$if defined (MSDOS) or defined (__MINGW32__)}
{$define NOFORK}
{$endif}
unit Pipes;
interface
uses GPC;
const
PipeForking = {$ifdef NOFORK} False {$else} True {$endif};
type
TProcedure = procedure;
PWaitPIDResult = ^TWaitPIDResult;
TWaitPIDResult = (PIDNothing, PIDExited, PIDSignaled, PIDStopped,
PIDUnknown);
PPipeProcess = ^TPipeProcess;
TPipeProcess = record
PID : Integer; { Process ID of process forked }
SignalPID: Integer; { Process ID to send the signal to.
Equals PID by default }
OpenPipes: Integer; { Number of pipes to/from the
process, for internal use }
Signal : Integer; { Send this signal (if not 0) to the
process after all pipes have been
closed after some time }
Seconds : Integer; { Wait so many seconds before
sending the signal if the process
has not terminated by itself }
Wait : Boolean; { Wait for the process, even longer
than Seconds seconds, after
sending the signal (if any) }
Result : PWaitPIDResult; { Default nil. If a pointer to a
variable is stored here, its
destination will contain the
information whether the process
terminated by itself, or was
terminated or stopped by a signal,
when waiting after closing the
pipes }
Status : ^Integer; { Default nil. If a pointer to a
variable is stored here, its
destination will contain the exit
status if the process terminated
by itself, or the number of the
signal otherwise, when waiting
after closing the pipes }
end;
var
{ Default values for TPipeProcess records created by Pipe }
DefaultPipeSignal : Integer = 0;
DefaultPipeSeconds: Integer = 0;
DefaultPipeWait : Boolean = True;
{ The procedure Pipe starts a process whose name is given by
ProcessName, with the given parameters (can be Null if no
parameters) and environment, and create pipes from and/or to the
process' standard input/output/error. ProcessName is searched for
in the PATH with FSearchExecutable. Any of ToInputFile,
FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile can be Null if the corresponding
pipe is not wanted. FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile may be
identical, in which case standard output and standard error are
redirected to the same pipe. The behaviour of other pairs of files
being identical is undefined, and useless, anyway. The files are
Assigned and Reset or Rewritten as appropriate. Errors are
returned in IOResult. If Process is not Null, a pointer to a
record is stored there, from which the PID of the process created
can be read, and by writing to which the action after all pipes
have been closed can be changed. (The record is automatically
Dispose'd of after all pipes have been closed.) If automatic
waiting is turned off, the caller should get the PID from the
record before it's Dispose'd of, and wait for the process sometime
in order to avoid zombies. If no redirections are performed (i.e.,
all 3 files are Null), the caller should wait for the process with
WaitPipeProcess. When an error occurs, Process is not assigned to,
and the state of the files is undefined, so be sure to check
IOResult before going on.
ChildProc, if not nil, is called in the child process after
forking and redirecting I/O, but before executing the new process.
It can even be called instead of executing a new process
(ProcessName can be empty then).
The procedure even works under Dos, but, of course, in a limited
sense: if ToInputFile is used, the process will not actually be
started until ToInputFile is closed. Signal, Seconds and Wait of
TPipeProcess are ignored, and PID and SignalPID do not contain a
Process ID, but an internal value without any meaning to the
caller. Result will always be PIDExited. So, Status is the only
interesting field (but Result should also be checked). Since there
is no forking under Dos, ChildProc, if not nil, is called in the
main process before spawning the program. So, to be portable, it
should not do any things that would influence the process after
the return of the Pipe function.
The only portable way to use "pipes" in both directions is to call
`Pipe', write all the Input data to ToInputFile, close
ToInputFile, and then read the Output and StdErr data from
FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile. However, since the capacity of
pipes is limited, one should also check for Data from
FromOutputFile and FromStdErrFile (using CanRead, IOSelect or
IOSelectRead) while writing the Input data (under Dos, there
simply won't be any data then, but checking for data doesn't do
any harm). Please see pipedemo.pas for an example. }
procedure Pipe (var ToInputFile, FromOutputFile, FromStdErrFile:
AnyFile; const ProcessName: String; protected var Parameters:
TPStrings; ProcessEnvironment: PCStrings; var Process:
PPipeProcess; ChildProc: TProcedure); attribute (iocritical);
{ Waits for a process created by Pipe as determined in the Process
record. (Process is Dispose'd of afterwards.) Returns True if
successful. }
function WaitPipeProcess (Process: PPipeProcess): Boolean; attribute
(ignorable);
{ Alternative interface from PExecute }
const
PExecute_First = 1;
PExecute_Last = 2;
PExecute_One = PExecute_First or PExecute_Last;
PExecute_Search = 4;
PExecute_Verbose = 8;
{ PExecute: execute a chain of processes.
Program and Arguments are the arguments to execv/execvp.
Flags and PExecute_Search is non-zero if $PATH should be searched.
Flags and PExecute_First is nonzero for the first process in
chain. Flags and PExecute_Last is nonzero for the last process in
chain.
The result is the pid on systems like Unix where we fork/exec and
on systems like MS-Windows and OS2 where we use spawn. It is up to
the caller to wait for the child.
The result is the exit code on systems like MSDOS where we spawn
and wait for the child here.
Upon failure, ErrMsg is set to the text of the error message,
and -1 is returned. `errno' is available to the caller to use.
PWait: cover function for wait.
PID is the process id of the task to wait for. Status is the
`status' argument to wait. Flags is currently unused (allows
future enhancement without breaking upward compatibility). Pass 0
for now.
The result is the process ID of the child reaped, or -1 for
failure.
On systems that don't support waiting for a particular child, PID
is ignored. On systems like MSDOS that don't really multitask
PWait is just a mechanism to provide a consistent interface for
the caller. }
function PExecute (ProgramName: CString; Arguments: PCStrings; var
ErrMsg: String; Flags: Integer): Integer; attribute (ignorable);
function PWait (PID: Integer; var Status: Integer; Flags: Integer):
Integer; attribute (ignorable);
The following listing contains the interface of the Ports unit.
This unit provides access routines for the hardware ports on the IA32, as a partial replacement for BP's `Port' and `PortW' pseudo arrays.
Since port access is platform-specific, this unit cannot be used in code intended to be portable. Even on the IA32, its use can often be avoided – e.g. Linux provides a number of `ioctl' functions, and DJGPP provides some routines to achieve things that would require port access under BP. Therefore, it is recommended to avoid using this unit whenever possible.
{ Access functions for I/O ports for GPC on an IA32 platform. This
unit is *not* portable. It works only on IA32 platforms (tested
under Linux and DJGPP). It is provided here only to serve as a
replacement for BP's Port and PortW pseudo arrays.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
{$ifndef __i386__}
{$error The Ports unit is only for the IA32 platform}
{$endif}
unit Ports;
interface
{ Port access functions }
function InPortB (PortNumber: ShortWord): Byte;
function InPortW (PortNumber: ShortWord): ShortWord;
procedure OutPortB (PortNumber: ShortWord; aValue: Byte);
procedure OutPortW (PortNumber, aValue: ShortWord);
{ libc functions for getting access to the ports -- only for root
processes, of course -- and to give up root privileges after
getting access to the ports for setuid root programs. Dummies
under DJGPP. }
{$ifdef MSDOS}
function IOPerm (From, Num: MedCard; On: Integer): Integer;
attribute (name = 'ioperm');
function IOPL (Level: Integer): Integer; attribute (name = 'iopl');
function SetEUID (EUID: Integer): Integer; attribute (name
= 'seteuid');
{$else}
function IOPerm (From, Num: MedCard; On: Integer): Integer;
external name 'ioperm';
function IOPL (Level: Integer): Integer; external name 'iopl';
function SetEUID (EUID: Integer): Integer; external name 'seteuid';
{$endif}
The following listing contains the interface of the Printer unit.
This unit provides printer access, compatible to BP's `Printer' unit, for Dos (using printer devices) and Unix systems (using printer utilities).
For BP compatibility, the variable `Lst' is provided, but for newly written programs, it is recommended to use the `AssignPrinter' procedure on a text file, and close the file when done (thereby committing the printer job). This method allows for sending multiple printer jobs in the same program.
{ BP compatible printer unit with extensions
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit Printer;
interface
uses GPC {$ifndef __OS_DOS__}, Pipes {$endif};
var
{ Dos-like systems: writing to a printer device }
{ The file name to write printer output into }
PrinterDeviceName: PString = @'prn';
{ Unix-like systems: printing via a printer program }
{ The file name of the printer program. If it contains a '/', it
will be taken as a complete path, otherwise the file name will
be searched for in the PATH with FSearchExecutable. }
PrinterCommand: PString = @'lpr';
{ Optional command line parameters for the printer program.
Ignored when nil. }
PrinterArguments: PPStrings = nil;
{ How to deal with the printer spooler after the printer pipe is
closed, cf. the Pipes unit. }
PrinterPipeSignal : Integer = 0;
PrinterPipeSeconds: Integer = 0;
PrinterPipeWait : Boolean = True;
{ Text file opened to default printer }
var
Lst: Text;
{ Assign a file to the printer. Lst will be assigned to the default
printer at program start, but other files can be assigned to the
same or other printers (possibly after changing the variables
above). SpoolerOutput, if not Null, will be redirected from the
printer spooler's standard output and error. If you use this, note
that a deadlock might arise when trying to write data to the
spooler while its output is not being read, though this seems
quite unlikely, since most printer spoolers don't write so much
output that could fill a pipe. Under Dos, where no spooler is
involved, SpoolerOutput, if not Null, will be reset to an empty
file for compatibility. }
procedure AssignPrinter (var f: AnyFile; var SpoolerOutput:
AnyFile);
The following listing contains the interface of the RegEx unit.
This unit provides routines to match strings against regular expressions and perform substitutions using matched subexpressions. Regular expressions are strings with some characters having special meanings. They describe (match) a class of strings. They are similar to wild cards used in file name matching, but much more powerful.
To use this unit, you will need the `rx' library which can be found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/.
{$nested-comments}
{ Regular expression matching and replacement
The RegEx unit provides routines to match strings against regular
expressions and perform substitutions using matched
subexpressions.
To use the RegEx unit, you will need the rx library which can be
found in http://www.gnu-pascal.de/libs/
Regular expressions are strings with some characters having
special meanings. They describe (match) a class of strings. They
are similar to wild cards used in file name matching, but much
more powerful.
There are two kinds of regular expressions supported by this unit,
basic and extended regular expressions. The difference between
them is not functionality, but only syntax. The following is a
short overview of regular expressions. For a more thorough
explanation see the literature, or the documentation of the rx
library, or man pages of programs like grep(1) and sed(1).
Basic Extended Meaning
`.' `.' matches any single character
`[aei-z]' `[aei-z]' matches either `a', `e', or any
character from `i' to `z'
`[^aei-z]' `[^aei-z]' matches any character but `a',
`e', or `i' .. `z'
To include in such a list the the
characters `]', `^', or `-', put
them first, anywhere but first, or
first or last, resp.
`[[:alnum:]]' `[[:alnum:]]' matches any alphanumeric character
`[^[:digit:]]' `[^[:digit:]]' matches anything but a digit
`[a[:space:]]' `[a[:space:]]' matches the letter `a' or a space
character (space, tab)
... (there are more classes available)
`\w' `\w' = [[:alnum:]]
`\W' `\W' = [^[:alnum:]]
`^' `^' matches the empty string at the
beginning of a line
`$' `$' matches the empty string at the
end of a line
`*' `*' matches zero or more occurences of
the preceding expression
`\+' `+' matches one or more occurences of
the preceding expression
`\?' `?' matches zero or one occurence of
the preceding expression
`\{N\}' `{N}' matches exactly N occurences of
the preceding expression (N is an
integer number)
`\{M,N\}' `{M,N}' matches M to N occurences of the
preceding expression (M and N are
integer numbers, M <= N)
`AB' `AB' matches A followed by B (A and B
are regular expressions)
`A\|B' `A|B' matches A or B (A and B are
regular expressions)
`\( \)' `( )' forms a subexpression, to override
precedence, and for subexpression
references
`\7' `\7' matches the 7'th parenthesized
subexpression (counted by their
start in the regex), where 7 is a
number from 1 to 9 ;-).
*Please note:* using this feature
can be *very* slow or take very
much memory (exponential time and
space in the worst case, if you
know what that means ...).
`\' `\' quotes the following character if
it's special (i.e. listed above)
rest rest any other character matches itself
Precedence, from highest to lowest:
* parentheses (`()')
* repetition (`*', `+', `?', `{}')
* concatenation
* alternation (`|')
When performing substitutions using matched subexpressions of a
regular expression (see `ReplaceSubExpressionReferences'), the
replacement string can reference the whole matched expression with
`&' or `\0', the 7th subexpression with `\7' (just like in the
regex itself, but using it in replacements is not slow), and the
7th subexpression converted to upper/lower case with `\u7' or
`\l7', resp. (which also works for the whole matched expression
with `\u0' or `\l0'). A verbatim `&' or `\' can be specified with
`\&' or `\\', resp.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License.
Please also note the license of the rx library. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit RegEx;
interface
uses GPC;
const
{ `BasicRegExSpecialChars' contains all characters that have
special meanings in basic regular expressions.
`ExtRegExSpecialChars' contains those that have special meanings
in extended regular expressions. }
BasicRegExSpecialChars = ['.', '[', ']', '^', '$', '*', '\'];
ExtRegExSpecialChars =
['.', '[', ']', '^', '$', '*', '+', '?', '{', '}', '|', '(', ')', '\'];
type
{ The type used by the routines of the `RegEx' unit to store
regular expressions in an internal format. The fields RegEx,
RegMatch, ErrorInternal, From and Length are only used
internally. SubExpressions can be read after `NewRegEx' and will
contain the number of parenthesized subexpressions. Error should
be checked after `NewRegEx'. It will be `nil' when it succeeded,
and contain an error message otherwise. }
RegExType = record
RegEx, RegMatch: Pointer; { Internal }
ErrorInternal: CString; { Internal }
From, Length: CInteger; { Internal }
SubExpressions: CInteger;
Error: PString
end;
{ Simple interface to regular expression matching. Matches a regular
expression against a string starting from a specified position.
Returns the position of the first match, or 0 if it does not
match, or the regular expression is invalid. }
function RegExPosFrom (const Expression: String; ExtendedRegEx,
CaseInsensitive: Boolean; const s: String; From: Integer) =
MatchPosition: Integer;
{ Creates the internal format of a regular expression. If
ExtendedRegEx is True, Expression is assumed to denote an extended
regular expression, otherwise a basic regular expression.
CaseInsensitive determines if the case of letters will be ignored
when matching the expression. If NewLines is True, `NewLine'
characters in a string matched against the expression will be
treated as dividing the string in multiple lines, so that `$' can
match before the NewLine and `^' can match after. Also, `.' and
`[^...]' will not match a NewLine then. }
procedure NewRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType; const Expression: String;
ExtendedRegEx, CaseInsensitive, NewLines: Boolean);
{ Disposes of a regular expression created with `NewRegEx'. *Must*
be used after `NewRegEx' before the RegEx variable becomes invalid
(i.e., goes out of scope or a pointer pointing to it is Dispose'd
of). }
procedure DisposeRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType); external
name '_p_DisposeRegEx';
{ Matches a regular expression created with `NewRegEx' against a
string. }
function MatchRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType; const s: String;
NotBeginningOfLine, NotEndOfLine: Boolean): Boolean;
{ Matches a regular expression created with `NewRegEx' against a
string, starting from a specified position. }
function MatchRegExFrom (var RegEx: RegExType; const s: String;
NotBeginningOfLine, NotEndOfLine: Boolean; From: Integer):
Boolean;
{ Finds out where the regular expression matched, if `MatchRegEx' or
`MatchRegExFrom' were successful. If n = 0, it returns the
position of the whole match, otherwise the position of the n'th
parenthesized subexpression. MatchPosition and MatchLength will
contain the position (counted from 1) and length of the match, or
0 if it didn't match. (Note: MatchLength can also be 0 for a
successful empty match, so check whether MatchPosition is 0 to
find out if it matched at all.) MatchPosition or MatchLength may
be Null and is ignored then. }
procedure GetMatchRegEx (var RegEx: RegExType; n: Integer; var
MatchPosition, MatchLength: Integer);
{ Checks if the string s contains any quoted characters or
(sub)expression references to the regular expression RegEx created
with `NewRegEx'. These are `&' or `\0' for the whole matched
expression (if OnlySub is not set) and `\1' .. `\9' for the n'th
parenthesized subexpression. Returns 0 if it does not contain any,
and the number of references and quoted characters if it does. If
an invalid reference (i.e. a number bigger than the number of
subexpressions in RegEx) is found, it returns the negative value
of the (first) invalid reference. }
function FindSubExpressionReferences (var RegEx: RegExType; const
s: String; OnlySub: Boolean): Integer;
{ Replaces (sub)expression references in ReplaceStr by the actual
(sub)expressions and unquotes quoted characters. To be used after
the regular expression RegEx created with `NewRegEx' was matched
against s successfully with `MatchRegEx' or `MatchRegExFrom'. }
function ReplaceSubExpressionReferences (var RegEx: RegExType;
const s, ReplaceStr: String) = Res: TString;
{ Returns the string for a regular expression that matches exactly
one character out of the given set. It can be combined with the
usual operators to form more complex expressions. }
function CharSet2RegEx (const Characters: CharSet) = s: TString;
The following listing contains the interface of the Strings unit.
This is a compatibility unit to BP's `Strings' unit to handle C style `#0'-terminated strings.
The same functionality and much more is available in the Run Time System, Run Time System, under clearer names (starting with a `CString' prefix),
Moreover, the use of `#0'-terminated C-style strings (`PChar' or `CString') is generally not recommended in GPC, since GPC provides ways to deal with Pascal-style strings of arbitrary and dynamic size in a comfortable way, as well as automatic conversion to C-style strings in order to call external C functions.
Therefore, using this unit is not recommended in newly written programs.
{ BP compatible Strings unit
Copyright (C) 1999-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
module Strings;
export Strings = all (CStringLength => StrLen, CStringEnd => StrEnd,
CStringMove => StrMove, CStringCopy =>
StrCopy,
CStringCopyEnd => StrECopy, CStringLCopy =>
StrLCopy,
CStringCopyString => StrPCopy, CStringCat =>
StrCat,
CStringLCat => StrLCat, CStringComp =>
StrComp,
CStringCaseComp => StrIComp, CStringLComp =>
StrLComp,
CStringLCaseComp => StrLIComp, CStringChPos =>
StrScan,
CStringLastChPos => StrRScan, CStringPos =>
StrPos,
CStringLastPos => StrRPos, CStringUpCase =>
StrUpper,
CStringLoCase => StrLower, CStringIsEmpty =>
StrEmpty,
CStringNew => StrNew);
import GPC;
function StrPas (aString: CString): TString;
procedure StrDispose (s: CString); external name '_p_Dispose';
The following listing contains the interface of the StringUtils unit.
This unit provides some routines for string handling on a higher level than those provided by the RTS.
{ Some routines for string handling on a higher level than those
provided by the RTS.
Copyright (C) 1999-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit StringUtils;
interface
uses GPC;
{ Various routines }
{ Appends Source to s, truncating the result if necessary. }
procedure AppendStr (var s: String; const Source: String);
{ Cuts s to MaxLength characters. If s is already MaxLength
characters or shorter, it doesn't change anything. }
procedure StrCut (var s: String; MaxLength: Integer);
{ Returns the number of disjoint occurences of SubStr in s. Returns
0 if SubStr is empty. }
function StrCount (const SubStr: String; s: String): Integer;
{ Returns s, with all disjoint occurences of Source replaced by
Dest. }
function StrReplace (const s, Source, Dest: String) = Result:
TString;
{ Sets of characters accepted for `True' and `False' by
Char2Boolean and StrReadBoolean. }
var
CharactersTrue : CharSet = ['Y', 'y'];
CharactersFalse: CharSet = ['N', 'n'];
{ If ch is an element of CharactersTrue, Dest is set to True,
otherwise if it is an element of CharactersFalse, Dest is set to
False. In both cases True is returned. If ch is not an element of
either set, Dest is set to False and False is returned. }
function Char2Boolean (ch: Char; var Dest: Boolean): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Converts a digit character to its numeric value. Handles every
base up to 36 (0 .. 9, a .. z, upper and lower case recognized).
Returns -1 if the character is not a digit at all. If you want to
use it for a base < 36, you have to check if the result is smaller
than the base and not equal to -1. }
function Char2Digit (ch: Char): Integer;
{ Encode a string in a printable format (quoted printable). All
occurences of EscapeChar within the string are encoded. If
QuoteHigh is True, all characters above the ASCII range are
encoded as well (required in "7 bit" environments, as per several
RFCs). `=' is always encoded, as required for proper decoding, as
are all characters below space (control characters), so if you
don't need an escape char yourself, you can pass #0 for
EscapeChar. }
function QuoteStringEscape (const s: String; EscapeChar: Char;
QuoteHigh: Boolean): TString;
{ Encode a string in a printable format (quoted printable and
surrounded with `"'). All occurences of `"' within the string are
encoded, so the result string contains exactly two `"' characters
(at the beginning and ending). This is useful to store arbitrary
strings in text files while keeping them as readable as possible
(which is the goal of the quoted printable encoding in general,
see RFC 1521, section 5.1) and being able to read them back
losslessly (with UnQuoteString). }
function QuoteString (const s: String): TString;
{ Encode a string in a printable format suitable for StrReadEnum.
All occurences of `,' within the string are encoded. }
function QuoteEnum (const s: String): TString;
{ Decode a string encoded by QuoteString (removing the `"' and
expanding quoted printable encoded characters). Returns True if
successful and False if the string has an invalid form. A string
returned by QuoteString is always valid. }
function UnQuoteString (var s: String): Boolean; attribute
(ignorable);
{ Decode a quoted-printable string (not enclosed in `"', unlike for
UnQuoteString). Returns True if successful and False if the string
has an invalid form. In the latter case, it still decodes as much
as is valid, even after the error position. }
function UnQPString (var s: String): Boolean; attribute
(ignorable);
{ Quotes a string as done in shells, i.e. all special characters are
enclosed in either `"' or `'', where `"', `$' and ``' are always
enclosed in `'' and `'' is always enclosed in `"'. }
function ShellQuoteString (const s: String) = Res: TString;
{ Replaces all tab characters in s with the appropriate amount of
spaces, assuming tab stops at every TabSize columns. Returns True
if successful and False if the expanded string would exceed the
capacity of s. In the latter case, some, but not all of the tabs
in s may have been expanded. }
function ExpandTabs (var s: String; TabSize: Integer): Boolean;
attribute (ignorable);
{ Returns s, with all occurences of C style escape sequences (e.g.
`\n') replaced by the characters they mean. If AllowOctal is True,
also octal character specifications (e.g. `\007') are replaced. If
RemoveQuoteChars is True, any other backslashes are removed (e.g.
`\*' -> `*' and `\\' -> `\'), otherwise they are kept, and also
`\\' is left as two backslashes then. }
function ExpandCEscapeSequences (const s: String; RemoveQuoteChars,
AllowOctal: Boolean) = r: TString;
{ Routines for TPStrings }
{ Initialise a TPStrings variable, allocate Size characters for each
element. This procedure does not dispose of any previously
allocated storage, so if you use it on a previously used variable
without freeing the storage yourself, this might cause memory
leaks. }
procedure AllocateTPStrings (var Strings: TPStrings; Size: Integer);
{ Clear all elements (set them to empty strings), does not free any
storage. }
procedure ClearTPStrings (var Strings: TPStrings);
{ Divide a string into substrings, using Separators as separator. A
single trailing separator is ignored. Further trailing separators
as well as any leading separators and multiple separators in a row
produce empty substrings. }
function TokenizeString (const Source: String; Separators: CharSet)
= Res: PPStrings;
{ Divide a string into substrings, using SpaceCharacters as
separators. The splitting is done according the usual rules of
shells, using (and removing) single and double quotes and
QuotingCharacter. Multiple, leading, and trailing separators are
ignored. If there is an error, a message is stored in ErrMsg (if
not Null), and nil is returned. nil is also returned (without an
error message) if s is empty. }
function ShellTokenizeString (const s: String; var ErrMsg: String) =
Tokens: PPStrings;
{ String parsing routines }
{ All the following StrReadFoo functions behave similarly. They read
items from a string s, starting at index i, to a variable Dest.
They skip any space characters (spaces and tabs) by incrementing i
first. They return True if successful, False otherwise. i is
incremented accordingly if successful, otherwise i is left
unchanged, apart from the skipping of space characters, and Dest
is undefined. This behaviour makes it easy to use the functions in
a row like this:
i := 1;
if StrReadInt (s, i, Size) and StrReadComma (s, i) and
StrReadQuoted (s, i, Name) and StrReadComma (s, i) and
...
StrReadReal (s, i, Angle) and (i > Length (s)) then ...
(The check `i > Length (s)' is in case you don't want to accept
trailing "garbage".) }
{ Just skip any space characters as described above. }
procedure StrSkipSpaces (const s: String; var i: Integer);
{ Read a quoted string (as produced by QuoteString) from a string
and unquote the result using UnQuoteString. It is considered
failure if the result (unquoted) would be longer than the capacity
of Dest. }
function StrReadQuoted (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest:
String): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Read a string delimited with Delimiter from a string and return
the result with the delimiters removed. It is considered failure
if the result (without delimiters) would be longer than the
capacity of Dest. }
function StrReadDelimited (const s: String; var i: Integer; var
Dest: String; Delimiter: Char): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Read a word (consisting of anything but space characters and
commas) from a string. It is considered failure if the result
would be longer than the capacity of Dest. }
function StrReadWord (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest:
String): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Check that a certain string is contained in s (after possible
space characters). }
function StrReadConst (const s: String; var i: Integer; const
Expected: String) = Res: Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ A simpler to use version of StrReadConst that expects a `,'. }
function StrReadComma (const s: String; var i: Integer) = Res:
Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Read an integer number from a string. }
function StrReadInt (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest:
Integer): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Read a real number from a string. }
function StrReadReal (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest:
Real): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Read a Boolean value, represented by a single character
from CharactersTrue or CharactersFalse (cf. Char2Boolean), from a
string. }
function StrReadBoolean (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest:
Boolean): Boolean; attribute (ignorable);
{ Read an enumerated value, i.e., one of the entries of IDs, from a
string, and stores the ordinal value, i.e., the index in IDs
(always zero-based) in Dest. }
function StrReadEnum (const s: String; var i: Integer; var Dest:
Integer; const IDs: array of PString): Boolean; attribute
(ignorable);
{ String hash table }
const
DefaultHashSize = 1403;
type
THash = Cardinal;
PStrHashList = ^TStrHashList;
TStrHashList = record
Next: PStrHashList;
s: PString;
i: Integer;
p: Pointer
end;
PStrHashTable = ^TStrHashTable;
TStrHashTable (Size: Cardinal) = record
CaseSensitive: Boolean;
Table: array [0 .. Size - 1] of PStrHashList
end;
function HashString (const s: String): THash;
function NewStrHashTable (Size: Cardinal; CaseSensitive:
Boolean) = HashTable: PStrHashTable;
procedure AddStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable; s: String;
i: Integer; p: Pointer);
procedure DeleteStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable; s: String);
function SearchStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable; const s:
String; var p: Pointer): Integer; { p may be Null }
procedure StrHashTableUsage (HashTable: PStrHashTable; var
Entries, Slots: Integer);
procedure DisposeStrHashTable (HashTable: PStrHashTable);
The following listing contains the interface of the System unit.
This unit contains only BP's more exotic routines which are not recommended to be used in new programs. Most of their functionality can be achieved by more standard means already.
Note: `MemAvail' and `MaxAvail', provided in this unit, cannot easily be achieved by other means. However, it is not recommended to use them on any multi-tasking system at all, where memory is a shared resource. The notes in the unit give some hints about how to avoid using them.
On special request, i.e., by defining the conditionals `__BP_TYPE_SIZES__', `__BP_RANDOM__' and/or `__BP_PARAMSTR_0__', the unit also provides BP compatible integer type sizes, a 100% BP compatible pseudo random number generator and/or BP compatible `ParamStr (0)' behaviour (the latter, however, only on some systems).
{ BP and partly Delphi compatible System unit for GPC
This unit is released as part of the GNU Pascal project. It
implements some rather exotic BP and Delphi compatibility
features. Even many BP and Delphi programs don't need them, but
they're here for maximum compatibility. Most of BP's and Delphi's
System units' features are built into the compiler or the RTS.
Note: The things in this unit are really exotic. If you haven't
used BP or Delphi before, you don't want to look at this unit. :-)
This unit depends on the conditional defines `__BP_TYPE_SIZES__',
`__BP_RANDOM__', `__BP_PARAMSTR_0__' and `__BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__'.
If `__BP_TYPE_SIZES__' is defined (with the `-D__BP_TYPE_SIZES__'
option), the integer data types will be redefined to the sizes
they have in BP or Delphi. Note that this might cause problems,
e.g. when passing var parameters of integer types between units
that do and don't use System. However, of the BP compatibility
units, only Dos and WinDos use such parameters, and they have been
taken care of so they work.
If `__BP_RANDOM__' is defined (`-D__BP_RANDOM__'), this unit will
provide an exactly BP compatible pseudo random number generator.
In particular, the range for integer randoms will be truncated to
16 bits like in BP. The RandSeed variable is provided, and if it's
set to the same value as BP's RandSeed, it produces exactly the
same sequence of pseudo random numbers that BP's pseudo random
number generator does (whoever might need this ... ;-). Even the
Randomize function will behave exactly like in BP. However, this
will not be noted unless one explicitly tests for it.
If `__BP_PARAMSTR_0__' is defined (`-D__BP_PARAMSTR_0__'), this
unit will change the value of `ParamStr (0)' to that of
`ExecutablePath', overwriting the value actually passed by the
caller, to imitate BP's/Dos's behaviour. However *note*: On most
systems, `ExecutablePath' is *not* guaranteed to return the full
path, so defining this symbol doesn't change anything. In general,
you *cannot* expect to find the full executable path, so better
don't even try it, or your program will (at best) run on some
systems. For most cases where BP programs access their own
executable, there are cleaner alternatives available.
If `__BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__' is defined (`-D__BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__'), the
two Delphi compatible functions `AllocMemCount' and `AllocMemSize'
will not be provided. The advantage is that this unit will not
have to `Mark' the heap which makes memory de-/allocations much
faster if the program doesn't use `Mark' otherwise.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Authors: Peter Gerwinski <peter@gerwinski.de>
Prof. Abimbola A. Olowofoyeku <African_Chief@bigfoot.com>
Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
Dominik Freche <dominik.freche@gmx.net>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
module System;
export System = all (FileMode {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__},
SystemInteger => Integer, SystemWord => Word {$endif});
import GPC (MaxLongInt => GPC_MaxLongInt);
var
{ Chain of procedures to be executed at the end of the program }
ExitProc: ^procedure = nil;
{ Contains all the command line arguments passed to the program,
concatenated, with spaces between them }
CmdLine: CString;
{$ifdef __BP_RANDOM__}
{ Random seed, initialized by Randomize, but can also be set
explicitly }
RandSeed: Integer attribute (Size = 32) = 0;
{$endif}
type
OrigInt = Integer;
OrigWord = Word;
{ Delphi }
SmallInt = Integer attribute (Size = 16);
DWord = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32);
{ Short BP compatible type sizes if wanted }
{$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__}
ByteBool = Boolean attribute (Size = 8);
WordBool = Boolean attribute (Size = 16);
LongBool = Boolean attribute (Size = 32);
ShortInt = Integer attribute (Size = 8);
SystemInteger = Integer attribute (Size = 16);
LongInt = Integer attribute (Size = 32);
Comp = Integer attribute (Size = 64);
Byte = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8);
SystemWord = Cardinal attribute (Size = 16);
LongWord = Cardinal attribute (Size = 32); { Delphi }
{$else}
SystemInteger = Integer;
SystemWord = Word;
{$endif}
{$if False} { @@ doesn't work well (dialec3.pas) -- when GPC gets
short
strings, it will be unnecessary }
{$ifopt borland-pascal}
String = String [255];
{$endif}
{$endif}
const
MaxInt = High (SystemInteger);
MaxLongInt = High (LongInt);
{ Return the lowest-order byte of x }
function Lo (x: LongestInt): Byte;
{ Return the second-lowest-order byte of x }
function Hi (x: LongestInt): Byte;
{ Swap the lowest-order and second-lowest-order bytes, mask out the
higher-order ones }
function Swap (x: LongestInt): SystemWord;
{ Store the current directory name (on the given drive number if
drive <> 0) in s }
procedure GetDir (Drive: Byte; var s: String);
{ Dummy routine for compatibility. @@Use two overloaded versions
rather than varargs when possible. }
procedure SetTextBuf (var f: Text; var Buf; ...);
{ Mostly useless BP compatible variables }
var
SelectorInc: SystemWord = $1000;
Seg0040: SystemWord = $40;
SegA000: SystemWord = $a000;
SegB000: SystemWord = $b000;
SegB800: SystemWord = $b800;
Test8086: Byte = 2;
Test8087: Byte = 3; { floating-point arithmetic is emulated
transparently by the OS if not present
in hardware }
OvrCodeList: SystemWord = 0;
OvrHeapSize: SystemWord = 0;
OvrDebugPtr: Pointer = nil;
OvrHeapOrg: SystemWord = 0;
OvrHeapPtr: SystemWord = 0;
OvrHeapEnd: SystemWord = 0;
OvrLoadList: SystemWord = 0;
OvrDosHandle: SystemWord = 0;
OvrEmsHandle: SystemWord = $ffff;
HeapOrg: Pointer absolute HeapLow;
HeapPtr: Pointer absolute HeapHigh;
HeapEnd: Pointer = Pointer (High (PtrCard));
FreeList: Pointer = nil;
FreeZero: Pointer = nil;
StackLimit: SystemWord = 0;
HeapList: SystemWord = 0;
HeapLimit: SystemWord = 1024;
HeapBlock: SystemWord = 8192;
HeapAllocFlags: SystemWord = 2;
CmdShow: SystemInteger = 0;
SaveInt00: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt02: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt0C: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt0D: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt1B: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt21: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt23: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt24: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt34: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt35: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt36: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt37: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt38: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt39: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt3A: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt3B: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt3C: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt3D: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt3E: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt3F: Pointer = nil;
SaveInt75: Pointer = nil;
RealModeRegs: array [0 .. 49] of Byte =
(0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0);
{ Mostly useless BP compatible pointer functions }
function Ofs (const x): PtrWord;
function Seg (const x): PtrWord;
function Ptr (Seg, Ofs: PtrWord): Pointer;
function CSeg: PtrWord;
function DSeg: PtrWord;
function SSeg: PtrWord;
function SPtr: PtrWord;
{ Routines to handle BP's 6 byte `Real' type which is formatted like
this:
47 0
-|------- -------- -------- -------- --------|--------
| |
+----------+ +------------+
47 Sign Bit | 8..46 Mantissa | 0..7 Biased Exponent
This format does not support infinities, NaNs and denormalized
numbers. The first digit after the binary point is not stored and
assumed to be 1. (This is called the normalized representation of
a binary floating point number.)
In GPC, this type is represented by the type `BPReal' which is
binary compatible to BP's type, and can therefore be used in
connection with binary files used by BP programs.
The functions `RealToBPReal' and `BPRealToReal' convert between
this type and GPC's `Real' type. Apart from that, `BPReal' should
be treated as opaque.
The variables `BPRealIgnoreOverflow' and `BPRealIgnoreUnderflow'
determine what to do in the case of overflows and underflows. The
default values are BP compatible. }
var
{ Ignore overflows, and use the highest possible value instead. }
BPRealIgnoreOverflow: Boolean = False;
{ Ignore underflows, and use 0 instead. This is BP's behaviour,
but has the disadvantage of diminishing computation precision. }
BPRealIgnoreUnderflow: Boolean = True;
type
BPRealInteral = Cardinal attribute (Size = 8);
BPReal = packed record
Format: packed array [1 .. 6] of BPRealInteral
end;
function RealToBPReal (r: Real) = BR: BPReal;
function BPRealToReal (const BR: BPReal) = RealValue: Real;
{ Heap management stuff }
const
{ Possible results for HeapError }
HeapErrorRunError = 0;
HeapErrorNil = 1;
HeapErrorRetry = 2;
var
{ If assigned to a function, it will be called when memory
allocations do not find enough free memory. Its result
determines if a run time error should be raised (the default),
or nil should be returned, or the allocation should be retried
(causing the routine to be called again if the allocation still
doesn't succeed).
Notes:
- Returning nil can cause some routines of the RTS and units
(shipped with GPC or third-party) to crash when they don't
expect nil, so better don't use this mechanism, but rather
CGetMem where needed.
- Letting the allocation be retried, of course, only makes sense
if the routine freed some memory before -- otherwise it will
cause an infinite loop! So, a meaningful HeapError routine
should dispose of some temporary objects, if available, and
return HeapErrorRetry, and return HeapErrorRunError when no
(more) of them are available. }
HeapError: ^function (Size: SystemWord): SystemInteger = nil;
{ Just returns HeapErrorNil. When this function is assigned to
HeapError, GetMem and New will return a nil pointer instead of
causing a runtime error when the allocation fails. See the comment
for HeapError above. }
function HeapErrorNilReturn (Size: SystemWord): SystemInteger;
{ Return the total free memory/biggest free memory block. Except
under Win32 and DJGPP, these are expensive routines -- try to
avoid them. Under Win32, MaxAvail returns the same as MemAvail, so
don't rely on being able to allocate a block of memory as big as
MaxAvail indicates. Generally it's preferable to not use these
functions at all in order to do a safe allocation, but just try to
allocate the memory needed using CGetMem, and check for a nil
result. What makes these routines unrealiable is, e.g., that on
multi-tasking systems, another process may allocate memory after
you've called MemAvail/MaxAvail and before you get to do the next
allocation. Also, please note that some systems over-commit
virtual memory which may cause MemAvail to return a value larger
than the actual (physical plus swap) memory available. Therefore,
if you want to be "sure" (modulo the above restrictions) that the
memory is actually available, use MaxAvail. }
function MemAvail: Cardinal;
function MaxAvail: Cardinal;
{ Delphi compatibility }
function CompToDouble (x: Comp): Double;
function DoubleToComp (x: Double): Comp;
{$ifndef __BP_NO_ALLOCMEM__}
function AllocMemCount = Count: SystemInteger;
function AllocMemSize = Size: SizeType;
{$endif}
procedure Assert (Condition: Boolean);
procedure DefaultAssertErrorProc (const Message, FileName: String;
LineNumber: SystemInteger; ErrorAddr: Pointer);
var
AssertErrorProc: ^procedure (const Message, FileName: String;
LineNumber: SystemInteger; ErrorAddr: Pointer) =
@DefaultAssertErrorProc;
NoErrMsg: Boolean = False;
The following listing contains the interface of the TFDD unit.
This unit provides some tricks with text files, e.g. a “tee” file which causes everything written to it to be written to two other files.
{ Some text file tricks.
Copyright (C) 2002-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit TFDD;
interface
uses GPC;
{ Write to multiple files. Everything written to Dest after calling
this procedure will be written to both File1 and File2. Can be
chained. }
procedure MultiFileWrite (var Dest, File1, File2: AnyFile);
The following listing contains the interface of the Trap unit.
This unit allows you to trap runtime errors, so a runtime error will not abort the program, but pass the control back to a point within the program. Use with care, and read the notes in the interface, please.
{ Trapping runtime errors
The Trap unit allows you to trap runtime errors, so a runtime
error will not abort the program, but pass the control back to a
point within the program.
The usage is simple. The TrapExec procedure can be called with a
function (p) as an argument. p must take a Boolean argument. p
will immediately be called with False given as its argument. When
a runtime error would otherwise be caused while p is active, p
will instead be called again with True as its argument. After p
returns, runtime error trapping ends.
When the program terminates (e.g. by reaching its end or by a Halt
statement) and a runtime error was trapped during the run, Trap
will set the ExitCode and ErrorAddr variables to indicate the
trapped error.
Notes:
- After trapping a runtime error, your program might not be in a
stable state. If the runtime error was a "minor" one (such as a
range checking or arithmetic error), it should not be a problem.
But if you, e.g., write a larger application and use Trap to
prevent a sudden abort caused by an unexpected runtime error,
you should make the program terminate regularly as soon as
possible after a trapped error (perhaps by telling the user to
save the data, then terminate the program and report the bug to
you).
- Since the trapping mechanism *jumps* back, it has all the
negative effects that a (non-local!) `goto' can have! You should
be aware of the consequences of all active procedures being
terminated at an arbitrary point!
- Nested traps are supported, i.e. you can call TrapExec again
within a routine called by another TrapExec instance. Runtime
errors trapped within the inner TrapExec invocation will be
trapped by the inner TrapExec, while runtime errors trapped
after its termination will be trapped by the outer TrapExec
again.
Copyright (C) 1996-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030303}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030303 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit Trap;
interface
uses GPC;
var
TrappedExitCode: Integer = 0;
TrappedErrorAddr: Pointer = nil;
TrappedErrorMessageString: TString = '';
{ Trap runtime errors. See the comment at the top. }
procedure TrapExec (procedure p (Trapped: Boolean));
{ Forget about saved errors from the innermost TrapExec instance. }
procedure TrapReset;
The following listing contains the interface of the Turbo3 unit.
This is a compatibility unit to BP's `Turbo3' compatibility unit to TP3. ;−) It is not meant to be used in any newly written code.
{ Turbo Pascal 3.0 compatibility unit
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
unit Turbo3;
interface
import GPC only (AssignTFDD);
System (MemAvail => System_MemAvail,
MaxAvail => System_MaxAvail);
CRT (LowVideo => CRT_LowVideo,
HighVideo => CRT_HighVideo);
var
Kbd: Text;
CBreak: Boolean absolute CheckBreak;
procedure AssignKbd (var f: AnyFile);
function MemAvail: Integer;
function MaxAvail: Integer;
function LongFileSize (var f: AnyFile): Real;
function LongFilePos (var f: AnyFile): Real;
procedure LongSeek (var f: AnyFile; aPosition: Real);
procedure LowVideo;
procedure HighVideo;
The following listing contains the interface of the WinDos unit.
This is a portable implementation of most routines from BP's `WinDos' unit. A few routines that are Dos – or even IA32 real mode – specific, are only available if `__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' is defined, BP Incompatibilities.
The same functionality and much more is available in the Run Time System, Run Time System. The RTS routines usually have different names and/or easier and less limiting interfaces (e.g. `ReadDir' etc. vs. `FindFirst' etc.), and are often more efficient.
Therefore, using this unit is not recommended in newly written programs.
{ Mostly BP compatible portable WinDos unit
This unit supports most, but not all, of the routines and
declarations of BP's WinDos unit.
Notes:
- The procedures GetIntVec and SetIntVec are not supported since
they make only sense for Dos real-mode programs (and GPC
compiled programs do not run in real-mode, even on IA32 under
Dos). The procedures Intr and MsDos are only supported under
DJGPP if `__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' is defined (with the
`-D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' option). A few other routines are
also only supported with this define, but on all platforms (but
they are crude hacks, that's why they are not supported without
this define).
- The internal structure of file variables (TFileRec and TTextRec)
is different in GPC. However, as far as TFDDs are concerned,
there are other ways to achieve the same in GPC, see the GPC
unit.
Copyright (C) 1998-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Author: Frank Heckenbach <frank@pascal.gnu.de>
This file is part of GNU Pascal.
GNU Pascal is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published
by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your
option) any later version.
GNU Pascal is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GNU Pascal; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307, USA.
As a special exception, if you link this file with files compiled
with a GNU compiler to produce an executable, this does not cause
the resulting executable to be covered by the GNU General Public
License. This exception does not however invalidate any other
reasons why the executable file might be covered by the GNU
General Public License. }
{$gnu-pascal,I-,maximum-field-alignment 0}
{$if __GPC_RELEASE__ < 20030412}
{$error This unit requires GPC release 20030412 or newer.}
{$endif}
module WinDos;
export WinDos = all (FCarry, FParity, FAuxiliary, FZero, FSign,
FOverflow,
DosError, GetDate, GetTime, GetCBreak,
SetCBreak,
GetVerify, SetVerify, DiskFree, DiskSize,
GetFAttr, SetFAttr, GetFTime, SetFTime,
UnpackTime, PackTime,
{$ifdef __BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__}
{$ifdef __GO32__}
Intr, MsDos,
{$endif}
DosVersion, SetDate, SetTime,
{$endif}
CStringGetEnv => GetEnvVar);
import GPC (MaxLongInt => GPC_Orig_MaxLongInt);
System;
Dos (FindFirst => Dos_FindFirst,
FindNext => Dos_FindNext,
FindClose => Dos_FindClose);
const
{ File attribute constants }
faReadOnly = ReadOnly;
faHidden = Hidden; { set for dot files except `.' and `..' }
faSysFile = SysFile; { not supported }
faVolumeID = VolumeID; { not supported }
faDirectory = Directory;
faArchive = Archive; { means: not executable }
faAnyFile = AnyFile;
{ Maximum file name component string lengths }
fsPathName = 79;
fsDirectory = 67;
fsFileName = 8;
fsExtension = 4;
{ FileSplit return flags }
fcExtension = 1;
fcFileName = 2;
fcDirectory = 4;
fcWildcards = 8;
type
PTextBuf = ^TTextBuf;
TTextBuf = TextBuf;
{ Search record used by FindFirst and FindNext }
TSearchRec = record
Fill: SearchRecFill;
Attr: Byte8;
Time, Size: LongInt;
Name: {$ifdef __BP_TYPE_SIZES__}
packed array [0 .. 12] of Char
{$else}
TStringBuf
{$endif};
Reserved: SearchRec
end;
{ Date and time record used by PackTime and UnpackTime }
TDateTime = DateTime;
{ 8086 CPU registers -- only used by the unportable Dos routines }
TRegisters = Registers;
{ FindFirst and FindNext are quite inefficient since they emulate
all the brain-dead Dos stuff. If at all possible, the standard
routines OpenDir, ReadDir and CloseDir (in the GPC unit) should be
used instead. }
procedure FindFirst (Path: PChar; Attr: Word; var SR: TSearchRec);
procedure FindNext (var SR: TSearchRec);
procedure FindClose (var SR: TSearchRec);
function FileSearch (Dest, FileName, List: PChar): PChar;
function FileExpand (Dest, FileName: PChar): PChar;
function FileSplit (Path, Dir, BaseName, Ext: PChar) = Res: Word;
function GetCurDir (Dir: PChar; Drive: Byte): PChar;
procedure SetCurDir (Dir: PChar);
procedure CreateDir (Dir: PChar);
procedure RemoveDir (Dir: PChar);
function GetArgCount: Integer;
function GetArgStr (Dest: PChar; ArgIndex: Integer; MaxLen: Word):
PChar;
This chapter is intended to be a QuickStart guide for programmers who are familiar with Borland Pascal.
Throughout the manual, we talk of “Borland Pascal” or “BP” for short, to refer to Borland Pascal version 7 for Dos protected mode. Other versions of Borland Pascal and Turbo Pascall don't differ too much, but this one was the very last Dos version Borland has published, so in most if not all cases, you can safely substitute the version you're familiar with.
“Borland Pascal” and “Turbo Pascal” are registered trademarks of Borland Inc.
GNU Pascal (GPC) is compatible to version 7 of Borland Pascal (BP) to a large extent and comes with portable replacements of the BP standard units.
However, BP is a 16-bit compiler while GPC is a 32/64-bit compiler, so the size of the `Integer' type, for instance, is 16 bits in BP, but at least 32 bits in GPC. If a BP program has been designed with portability in mind from the ground up, it may work with GPC without any change. Programs which rely on byte order, on the internals or sizes of data types or which use unportable things like interrupts and assembler code, will need to be changed. The following section lists the possible problems with solutions.
The GPC Run Time System (RTS) is fairly complete, and you can use all libraries written for GNU C from GNU Pascal, so there is much less need to use unportable constructs than there was in BP. (For example, BP's Turbo Vision library uses assembler to call a local procedure through a pointer. With GPC you can do this in Pascal just as with global procedures.) Please do not throw away the advantage of full portability by sticking to those workarounds.
We have successfully ported real-world projects (with several 10000s of lines) from BP to GPC, so this is possible for you, too.
This sections lists the remaining incompatibilities of GPC to BP, and the problems you might encounter when porting BP programs from 16-bit Dos to other platforms, and gives solutions for them.
By incompatibilites we mean problems that can arise when trying to compile a valid BP program with GPC. Of course, there are many features in GPC that BP doesn't know, but we call them extensions unless they can break valid BP programs, so they are not mentioned here. The subsequent sections of the `Borland Pascal' chapter mention a number of useful extensions that you might want to know about but which will not break your BP code.
Some of the differences can be “overcome” by command-line switches. As a summary:
--borland-pascal -w --uses=System -D__BP_TYPE_SIZES__ --pack-struct
-D__BP_RANDOM__ -D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__ -D__BP_PARAMSTR_0__
But please read the following notes, and don't use these switches indiscriminately when not necessary. There are reasons why they are not GPC's defaults.
GPC's internal string format (Extended Pascal string schema) is different from BP's. BP compatible short strings will be implemented in GPC soon, but in the meantime, you'll have to live with the difference. In general, GPC's format has many advantages (no length limit of 255 characters, constant and reference parameters always know about their capacity, etc.), but you will see differences if you:
GPC supports qualified identifiers, liek BP does. (In addition, it also supports Extended Pascal style qualified identifiers which behave a little differently for units and modules imported with `import' rather than `uses'.)
GPC's inline assembler is not compatible to BP's. It uses
AT&T syntax, supports a large variety of processors and works
together with GPC's optimizer. So, either convert your inline
assembly to AT&T syntax, or (usually better) to Pascal, or put it
into an external file which you can assemble with your favourite
(32 bit) assembler. A tutorial for using the GPC inline assembler is
available at
http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/misc/gpcasm.zip
Since many things you usually do with assembler in BP are provided by GPC's Run Time System (RTS), you will not need the inline assembler as often as in BP. (See Portability hints.)
The same applies to BP's `inline' directive for hand-written machine code. GPC's `inline' directive works for Pascal routines (see Miscellaneous), so you'll have to convert any hand-written machine code to Pascal (and thereby make it more readable, portable and easier to maintain while still getting the performance of inline code).
GPC supports `Move' and `FillChar', and they're fully BP compatible. However, some data structures have different internal formats which may become relevant when using these procedures. E.g., using `Move' on file variables does not work in GPC (there are reasons why assigning file variables with `:=' is not allowed in Pascal, and circumventing this restriction with `Move' is not a good idea). For other examples, see String type, Real type, and Endianness assumptions.
GPC does not support BP's 6-byte `Real' type. It supports `Single', `Double' and `Extended' which, at least on the IA32 and some other processors, are compatible to BP.
For BP's 6-byte `Real' type, GPC's `System' unit provides an emulation, called `BPReal', as well as conversion routines to GPC's `Real' type (which is the same as `Double'), called `RealToBPReal' and `BPRealToReal'. You'll probably only need them when reading or writing binary files containing values of the BP 6-byte real type. There are no operators (e.g., `+') available for `BPReal', but since GPC supports operator overloading, you could define them yourself (e.g., convert to `Real', do the operation, and convert back). Needless to say that this is very inefficient and should not be done for any serious computations. Better convert your data after reading them from the file and before writing them back, or simply convert your data files once (the other types are more efficient even with BP on any non-prehistoric processor, anyway).
A mostly BP compatible `Graph' unit exists as part of the `GRX' package. It is known to work under DJGPP, Cygwin, mingw, Linux/IA32 with svgalib, and should work under any Unix system with X11 (tested under Linux, Solaris, AIX, etc.).
There is a small difference in the color numbering, but it should be easy to work-around: You can't assume, e.g., that color 1 is always blue, and 2 is green, etc. On a system with 15 or more bits of color depth (i.e., 32768 or more colors, which most PCs today have), they will all be very dark shades of blue. This is not really a bug, but simply a property of modern high-color modes (whereas BP's `Graph' unit was only designed for 16 and 256 color modes).
However, the names `Blue', `Green' etc. stand for the correct colors in the `Graph' unit of GRX. They are no constants, but functions (because the color depth is in general not known until runtime), so you can't use them in contexts where constants are expected. Also, they might conflict with the identifiers of the `CRT' unit if you use both units at the same time. If you want to use computed color values in the range 0 ... 15, you can translate them to the correct colors using the `EGAColor' function.
The OOP stuff (Turbo Vision etc.) is not yet completed, but work on several projects is underway. If you want information about the current status or access to development source, please contact the GPC mailing list.
The routines `Keep', `GetIntVec' and `SetIntVec' in the `Dos' unit do not even make sense on DJGPP (32 bit Dos extender). If your program uses these, it is either a low-level Dos utility for which porting to a 32 bit environment might cause bigger problems (because the internal issues of DPMI become relevant which are usually hidden by DJGPP), or it installs interrupt handlers which will have to be thought about more carefully because of things like locking memory, knowing about and handling the differences between real and protected mode interrupts, etc. For these kinds of things, we refer you to the DJGPP FAQ (see DJGPP FAQ).
The internal structure of file variables (`FileRec' and `TextRec' in BP's `Dos' unit and `TFileRec' and `TTextRec' in BP's `WinDos' unit) is different in GPC. However, as far as Text File Device Drivers (TFDDs) are concerned, GPC offers a more powerful mechanism. Please see the RTS reference (see Run Time System), under `AssignTFDD'.
Those few routines in the `System' unit that deal with segmented pointers (e.g., `Ptr') are emulated in such a way that such ugly BP constructs like
PInteger (Ptr (Seg (a), Ofs (a) + 6 * SizeOf (Integer)))^ = 42
work in GPC, but they do not provide access to absolute memory addresses. Neither do `absolute' variables (which take a simple address in the program's address space in GPC, rather than a segmented address), and the `Mem' and `Port' arrays don't exist in GPC.
As a replacement for `Port' on IA32 processors, you can use the routines provided in the `Ports' unit, Ports. If you want to access absolute memory addresses in the first megabyte under DJGPP, you can't do this with normal pointers because DJGPP programs run in a protected memory environment, unless you use a dirty trick called near pointer hack. Please see the DJGPP FAQ (see DJGPP FAQ) for this and for other ways.
For similar reasons, the variable `PrefixSeg' in the `System' unit is not supported. Apart from TSRs, its only meaningful use in BP might be the setting of environment variables. GPC provides the `SetEnv' and `UnSetEnv' procedures for this purpose which you can use instead of any BP equivalents based on `PrefixSeg'. (However note that they will modify the program's own and its childs' environment, not its parent's environment. This is a property – most people call it a feature – of the environments, including DJGPP, that GPC compiled programs run in.)
GPC also runs on big-endian systems (see Endianness). This is, of course, a feature of GPC, but might affect your programs when running on a big-endian system if they make assumptions about endianness, e.g., by using type casts (or `absolute' declarations or variant records misused as type casts) in certain ways. Please see the demo program absdemo.pas for an example and how to solve it.
Endianness is also relevant (the more common case) when exchanging data between different machines, e.g. via binary files or over a network. Since the latter is not easily possible in BP, and the techniques to solve the problems are mostly the same as for files, we concentrate on files here.
First, you have to choose the endianness to use for the file. Most known data formats have a specified endianness (usually that of the processor on which the format was originally created). If you define your own binary data format, you're free to choose the endianness to use.
Then, when reading or writing values larger than one byte from/to the file, you have to convert them. GPC's Run Time System supports this by some routines. E.g., you can read an array from a little-endian file with the procedure `BlockReadLittleEndian', or write one to a big-endian file with `BlockWriteBigEndian'. Note: The endianness in the procedure names refers to the file, not the system – the routines know about the endianness of the system they run on, but you have to tell them the endianness of the file to use. This means you do not have to (and must not) use an `ifdef' to use the version matching the system's endianness.
When reading or writing records or other more complicated structures, either read/write them field by field using `BlockReadBigEndian' etc., or read/write them with the regular `BlockRead' and `BlockWrite' procedures and convert each field after reading or before writing using procedures like `ConvertFromBigEndian' or `ConvertToLittleEndian' (but remember, when writing, to undo the conversion afterwards, if you want to keep using the data – this is not necessary with `BlockWriteLittleEndian' etc.).
Especially for strings, there are ready-made procedures like `ReadStringBigEndian' or `WriteStringLittleEndian' which will read/write the length as a 64 bit value (much space for really long strings :−) in the given endianness, followed by the characters (which have no endianness problem).
All these routines are described in detail in the RTS reference (see Run Time System), under `endianness'. The demo program endiandemo.pas contains an example on how to use these routines.
GPC warns about some BP constructs which are especially “dirty”, like misusing typed constants as initialized variables. GPC also supports some features that may conflict with BP code, like macros. The command line option `--borland-pascal' disables both, so you might want to use it for a first attempt to compile your BP code under GPC. However, we suggest you try compiling without this switch and fixing any resulting problems as soon as you've become acquainted with GPC.
Even in `--borland-pascal' mode, GPC may warn about some dangerous things. To disable all warnings, you can use the `-w' option (note: lower-case `w'!). This is not recommended at all, but you may consider it more BP compatible ...
A few exotic BP routines and declarations (e.g., `Swap' and `HeapError') are contained in a `System' unit, System, which GPC (unlike BP) does not automatically use in each program. To use it, you can add a `uses System;' clause to your program. If you don't want to change your code, the command line option `--uses=System' will do the same.
Since GPC runs on 32 and 64 bit platforms, integer types have larger sizes than in BP. However, if you use the `System' unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and define the symbol `__BP_TYPE_SIZES__' (by giving `-D__BP_TYPE_SIZES__' on the command line), it will redeclare the types to the sizes used by BP. This is less efficient and more limiting, but might be necessary if your program relies on the exact type sizes.
GPC by default aligns fields of records and arrays suitably for higher performance, while BP doesn't. If you don't want the alignment (e.g., because the program relies on the internal format of your structures), give the `--pack-struct' option.
GPC uses a more elaborate pseudo random number generator than BP does. Using the `Random' and `Randomize' functions works the same way, but there is no `RandSeed' variable (but a `SeedRandom' procedure). However, if you use the `System' unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and define the symbol `__BP_RANDOM__' (by giving `-D__BP_RANDOM__' on the command line), it will provide a 100% BP compatible pseudo random number generator, including the `RandSeed' variable, which will produce exactly the same sequence of pseudo random numbers that BP's pseudo random number generator does. Even the `Randomize' function will then behave exactly like in BP.
A few more routines in the `Dos' and `WinDos' units besides the ones mentioned under Keep; GetIntVec; SetIntVec, like `Intr' or `DosVersion', are meaningless on non-Dos systems. By default, the `Dos' unit does not provide these routines (it only provides those that are meaningful on all systems, which are most of its routines, including the most commonly used ones). If you need the unportable ones, you get them by using the `System' unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and defining the symbol `__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' (by giving `-D__BP_UNPORTABLE_ROUTINES__' on the command line). If you use `Intr' or `MsDos', your program will only compile under DJGPP then. Other routines, e.g. `DosVersion' are emulated quite roughly on other systems. Please see the notes in the `Dos' unit (see Dos) for details.
In BP (or under Dos), `ParamStr (0)' always contains the full path of the current executable. Under GPC, by default it contains what was passed by the caller as the 0th argument – which is often the name of the executable, but that's merely a convention, and it usually does not include the path.
If you use the `System' unit (see - -uses=System - Swap; HeapError; etc.) and define the symbol `__BP_PARAMSTR_0__' (by giving `-D__BP_PARAMSTR_0__' on the command line), it will change the value of `ParamStr (0)' to that of `ExecutablePath', overwriting the value actually passed by the caller, to imitate BP's/Dos's behaviour. However note: On most systems, `ExecutablePath' is not guaranteed to return the full path, so defining this symbol doesn't change anything. In general, you cannot expect to find the full executable path, so better don't even try it, or your program will (at best) run on some systems. For most cases where BP programs access their own executable, there are cleaner alternatives available.
On the Dos (DJGPP) and Linux platforms, you can use RHIDE for GNU Pascal; check the subdirectories of your DJGPP distribution.
Unfortunately, there is no IDE which would run on all platforms. We are working on it, but this will take some time. Please be patient – or offer your help!
Without an IDE, the GNU Pascal Compiler, GPC, is called about like the command-line version of the Borland Pascal Compiler, BPC. Edit your source file(s) with your favorite ASCII editor, then call GNU Pascal with a command line like
C:\GNU-PAS> gpc hello.pas -o hello.exe
on your Dos or OS/2 box or
myhost:/home/joe/gnu-pascal> gpc hello.pas -o hello
on your Unix (or Unix-compatible) system.
Don't omit the .pas suffix: GPC is a common interface for a Pascal compiler, a C, ObjC and C++ compiler, an assembler, a linker, and perhaps an Ada and a FORTRAN compiler. From the extension of your source file GPC figures out which compiler to run. GPC recognizes Pascal sources by the extension .pas, .p, .pp or .dpr.
The -o is a command line option which tells GPC how the
executable has to be named. If not given, the executable will be
called `a.out' (Unix) or `a.exe' (Dos). However, you can
use the `--executable-file-name' to tell GPC to always call the
executable like the source (with the extension removed under Unix
and changed to `.exe' under Dos).
Note that GPC is case-sensitive concerning file names and options, so it will not work if you type
C:\GNU-PAS> GPC HELLO.PAS -O HELLO.EXE
GPC is a very quiet compiler and doesn't print anything on the screen unless you request it or there is an error. If you want to see what is going on, invoke GPC with additional options:
-Q "don't be quiet" (or: Quassel-Modus in German)
(with capital `Q'!) means that GPC prints out the names of procedures and functions it processes, and
--verbose
or abbreviated
-v
means that GPC informs you about the stages of compilation, i.e. preprocessing, compiling, assembling, and linking.
One example (this time for OS/2):
[C:\GNU-Pascal] gpc --verbose -Q hello.pas
Throughout this chapter, we will tell you about a lot of command-line switches. They are all invoked this way.
After compilation, there will be an executable hello file in
the current directory. (hello.exe on Dos or OS/2.) Just run
it and enjoy. If you're new to Unix, please note that the current
directory is not on the PATH in most installations, so you might
have to run your program as `./hello'. This also helps to avoid
name conflicts with other programs. Such conflicts are especially
common with the program name `test' which happens to be a
standard utility under Unix that does not print any output. If you
call your program `test.pas', compile it, and then invoke
`test', you will usually not run your program, but the utility
which leads to mysterious problems. So, invoke your program as
`./test' or, better yet, avoid the name `test' for your
programs.
If there are compilation errors, GNU Pascal will not stop
compilation after the first one – as Borland Pascal does – but try
to catch all errors in one compilation. If you get more error
messages than your screen can hold, you can catch them in a file
(e.g. gpc.out) or pipe them to a program like `more'
in the following way:
gpc hello.pas 2> gpc.out
This works with OS/2 and any bash-like shell under Unix; for Dos you
must get a replacement for command.com which supports this
kind of redirection, or use the `redir' utility (see also the
DJGPP FAQ, DJGPP FAQ.):
C:\GNU-PAS> redir -eo gpc hello.pas -o hello.exe | more
You can also use Borland's IDE for GNU Pascal on the Dos platform: Install the GNU Pascal Compiler in the Tools menu (via Options/Tools).
Name: GNU Pascal
Path: gpc
Arguments: $SAVE ALL --executable-file-name $NAME($EDNAME).pas
HotKey: Shift+F9
Note once more that GPC is case-sensitive, so it is important to
specify .pas instead of the .PAS Borland Pascal would
append otherwise!
You can include more command-line arguments to GNU Pascal (e.g. `--automake'; see below) as you will learn more about them.
Since Borland Pascal will try to recompile your program if you use
its Run menu function, you will need another tool to run your
program:
Name: Run Program
Path: command.com
Arguments: /c $NAME($EDNAME)
HotKey: Shift+F10
GPC supports comments surrounded by `{ }' and `(* *)',
just like BP does. According to the ISO 7185 and ISO 10206
standards, Pascal allows comments opened with (* and closed
with }. Borland Pascal does not support such mixed
comments, so you might have sources where passages containing
comments are “commented out” using the other kind of comment
delimiters. GPC's default behaviour is (like BP) not to allow mixed
comments, so you don't need to worry about this. However, if you
happen to like mixed comments, you can turn them on either by a
command-line option, or by a compiler directive:
--mixed-comments {$mixed-comments} (*$mixed-comments*)
GPC supports nested comments (e.g., `{ foo { bar } baz }'), but they are disabled by default (compatible to BP which doesn't know nested comments at all). You can enable them with the option `--nested-comments' (or the equivalent compiler directive)
GPC also supports Delphi style comments starting with `//' and extending until the end of the line. This comment style is activated by default unless one of the `--classic-pascal', `--extended-pascal', `--object-pascal' or `--borland-pascal' dialect options is given. You can turn them on or off with the `--[no-]delphi-comments' option.
All of BP's one-letter compiler directives (except H, P, Q, R, V) are supported by GPC, though some of them are ignored because they are not necessary under GPC. Besides, GPC supports a lot more directives. For an overview, see Compiler Directives.
You can use units in the same way as in Borland Pascal. However, there are some additional features.
Concerning the syntax of a unit, you can, if you want, use Extended Pascal syntax to specify a unit initializer, i.e., instead of writing
begin
...
end.
at the end of the unit, you can get the same result with
to begin do
begin
...
end;
and there also exists
to end do
begin
...
end;
which specifies a finalization routine. You can use this instead of Borland Pascal's exit procedures, but for compatibility, the included `System' unit also provides the `ExitProc' variable. The `to begin do' and/or `to end do' parts must be followed by the final `end.'. See Modules, for information about Extended Pascal modules, an alternative to units.
When GPC compiles a unit, it produces two files: an .o object
file (compatible with other GNU compilers such as GNU C) plus a
.gpi file which describes the interface.
If you are interested in the internal format of GPI file, see GPI files.
If you want to compile a program that uses units, you must “make” the project. (This is the command-line switch `-M' or the IDE keystroke `F9' in BP.) For this purpose, GPC provides the command-line switch `--automake':
gpc --automake hello.pas
If you want to force everything to be rebuilt rather than only recompile changed files (`-B' or “build” in BP), use `--autobuild' instead of `--automake':
gpc --autobuild hello.pas
For more information about the automake mechanism, see Automake.
If you do not want to use the automake mechanism for whatever reason, you can also compile every unit manually and then link everything together.
GPC does not automatically recognize that something is a unit and cannot be linked; you have to tell this by a command line switch:
-c only compile, don't link.
(If you omit this switch when compiling a unit, you only get a linker error message `undefined reference to `main''. Nothing serious.)
For example, to compile two units, use:
gpc -c myunit1.pas myunit2.pas
When you have compiled all units, you can compile a program that uses them without using `--automake':
gpc hello.pas
However, using `--automake' is recommended, since it will recompile units that were modified.
You could also specify the program and the units in one command line:
gpc hello.pas myunit1.pas myunit2.pas
One of the purposes of writing units is to compile them separately.
However, GNU Pascal allows you to have one or more units in the same
source file (producing only one .o file but separate
.gpi files). You even can have a program and one or more
units in one source file; in this case, no .o file is
produced at all.
GNU Pascal is a 32/64 bit compiler with excellent optimization algorithms (which are identically the same as those of GNU C). There are six optimization levels, specified by the command line options `-O', `-O2', ..., `-O6'.
One example:
program OptimizationDemo;
procedure Foo;
var
A, B: Integer;
begin
A := 3;
B := 4;
WriteLn (A + B)
end;
begin
Foo
end.
When GNU Pascal compiles this program with optimization
(`-O3'), it recognizes that the argument to `WriteLn' is the
constant 7 – and optimizes away the variables A and
B. If the variables were global, they would not be optimized
away because they might be accessed from other places, but the
constant 7 would still be optimized.
For more about optimization, see the GNU C documentation.
The command line option `-g' specifies generation of debugging information for GDB, the GNU debugger. GDB comes with its own documentation. Currently, GDB does not understand Pascal syntax, so you should be familiar with C expressions if you want to use it.
See also “Notes for debugging” in the “Programming” chapter; see Notes for Debugging.
Sometimes it is nice to have a look at the assembler output of the
compiler. You can do this in a debugger or disassembler (which is
the only way to do it in BP), but you can also tell GPC to produce
assembler code directly: When you specify the -S command line
option, GPC produces an .s file instead of an .o file.
The .s file contains assembler source for your program. More
about this in the next section.
Objects in the Borland Pascal 7.0 notation are implemented into GNU Pascal with the following differences:
type
MyObj = object
x: Integer;
procedure Foo; virtual;
y: Real;
function Bar: Char;
end;
Strings are “Schema types” in GNU Pascal which is something more
advanced than Borland-style strings. For variables, you cannot
specify just String as a type like in Borland Pascal; for
parameters and pointer types you can. There is no 255 characters
length limit. According to Extended Pascal, the maximum string
length must be in (parentheses); GNU Pascal accepts [brackets], too,
however, like BP.
For more about strings and schema types see Schema Types.
GPC supports Borland Pascal's string handling functions and some more (see String Operations):
| Borland Pascal | GNU Pascal
|
| Length | Length
|
| Pos | Pos, Index (1)
|
| Str | Str, WriteStr (1) (2)
|
| Val | Val, ReadStr (2)
|
| Copy | Copy, SubStr, MyStr[2 .. 7] (3)
|
| Insert | Insert
|
| Delete | Delete
|
| MyStr[0] := #7 | SetLength (MyStr, 7)
|
| =, <>, <, <=, >, >= | =, <>, <, <=, >, >= (4)
|
| EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE
| |
| n/a | Trim
|
Notes:
(1) The order of parameters of the Extended Pascal routines (`Index', `WriteStr') is different from the Borland Pascal routines.
(2) `ReadStr' and `WriteStr' allow an arbitrary number of arguments, and the arguments are not limited to numbers. `WriteStr' also allows comfortable formatting like `WriteLn' does, e.g. `WriteStr (Dest, Foo : 20, Bar, 1/3 : 10 : 2)'.
(3) `SubStr' reports a runtime error if the requested substring does not fit in the given string, `Copy' does not (like in BP).
(4) By default, the string operators behave like in BP. However, if you use the option `--no-exact-compare-strings' or `--extended-pascal', they ignore differences of trailing blanks, so, e.g., `'foo'' and `'foo '' are considered equal. The corresponding functions (`EQ', ...) always do exact comparisons.
GNU Pascal supports Borland Pascal's “typed constants” but also Extended Pascal's initialized variables:
var
x: Integer value 7;
or
var
x: Integer = 7;
When a typed constant is misused as an initialized variable, a warning is given unless you specify `--borland-pascal'.
When you want a local variable to preserve its value, define it as `static' instead of using a typed constant. Typed constants also become static automatically for Borland Pascal compatibility, but it's better not to rely on this “feature” in new programs. Initialized variables do not become static automatically.
program StaticDemo;
procedure Foo;
{ x keeps its value between two calls to this procedure }
var
x: Integer = 0; attribute (static);
begin
WriteLn (x);
Inc (x)
end;
begin
Foo;
Foo;
Foo;
end.
For records and arrays, GPC supports both BP style and Extended
Pascal style initializers. When you initialize a record, you may
omit the field names. When you initialize an array, you may provide
indices with a :. However, this additional information is
ignored completely, so perhaps it's best for the moment to only
provide the values ...
program BPInitVarDemo;
const
A: Integer = 7;
B: array [1 .. 3] of Char = ('F', 'o', 'o');
C: array [1 .. 3] of Char = 'Bar';
Foo: record
x, y: Integer;
end = (x: 3; y: 4);
begin
end.
The bitwise operators `shl', `shr', `and', `or', `xor' and `not' work in GNU Pascal like in Borland Pascal. As an extension, you can use them as procedures, for example
program AndProcedureDemo;
var x: Integer;
begin
and (x, $0000ffff);
end.
as an alternative to
program AndOperatorDemo;
var x: Integer;
begin
x := x and $0000ffff;
end.
GPC accepts the BP style notation `$abcd' for hexadecimal numbers, but you also can use Extended Pascal notation:
program EPBaseDemo;
const
Binary = 2#11111111;
Octal = 8#177;
Hex = 16#ff;
begin
end.
and so on up to a basis of 36. Of course, you can mix the notations as you like, e.g.:
program BPEPBaseDemo;
begin
WriteLn ($cafe = 2#1100101011111110)
end.
`Inc' and `Dec' are implemented like in Borland Pascal. `Pred' and `Succ' are generalized according to Extended Pascal and can have a second (optional) parameter:
procedure SuccDemo;
var a: Integer = 42;
begin
a := Succ (a, 5);
WriteLn (a) { 47 }
end.
BP style `absolute' variables work in the context of overloading other variables as well as in the context of specifying an absolute address, but the latter is highly unportable and not very useful even in Dos protected mode.
program BPAbsoluteDemo;
type
TString = String (80);
TTypeChoice = (t_Integer, t_Char, t_String);
{ @@ WARNING: BAD STYLE! }
procedure ReadVar (var x: Void; TypeChoice: TTypeChoice);
var
xInt: Integer absolute x;
xChar: Char absolute x;
xStr: TString absolute x;
begin
case TypeChoice of
t_Integer: ReadLn (xInt);
t_Char : ReadLn (xChar);
t_String : ReadLn (xStr);
end
end;
var
i: Integer;
c: Char;
s: TString;
begin
ReadVar (i, t_Integer);
ReadVar (c, t_Char);
ReadVar (s, t_String);
WriteLn (i, ' ', c, ' ', s)
end.
GNU Pascal knows Borland Pascal's procedures FillChar and
Move. However, their use can be dangerous because it often
makes implicit unportable assumptions about type sizes, endianness,
internal structures or similar things. Therefore, avoid them
whenever possible. E.g., if you want to clear an array of strings,
don't `FillChar' the whole array with zeros (this would
overwrite the Schema discriminants, see Strings), but rather
use a `for' loop to assign the empty string to each string. In
fact, this is also more efficient than `FillChar', since it
only has to set the length field of each string to zero.
GNU Pascal allows the user to define operators according to the Pascal-SC syntax:
program PXSCOperatorDemo;
type
Point = record
x, y: Real;
end;
operator + (a, b: Point) c: Point;
begin
c.x := a.x + b.x;
c.y := a.y + b.y;
end;
var
a, b, c: Point = (42, 0.5);
begin
c := a + b
end.
The Pascal-SC operators `+>', `+<', etc. for exact numerical calculations are not implemented, but you can define them.
| Borland Pascal | GNU Pascal | Bits (1) | Signed
|
| ShortInt | ByteInt | 8 | yes
|
| Integer | ShortInt | 16 | yes
|
| LongInt | Integer | 32 | yes
|
| Comp | LongInt, Comp | 64 | yes
|
| Byte | Byte | 8 | no
|
| Word | ShortWord | 16 | no
|
| n/a | Word | 32 | no
|
| n/a | LongWord | 64 | no
|
(1) The size of the GNU Pascal types may depend on the platform. The sizes above apply to 32 bit platforms, including the IA32.
If you care for types with exactly the same size as in Borland Pascal, take a look at the `System' unit and read its comments.
You can get the size of a type with `SizeOf' in bytes (like in Borland Pascal) and with `BitSizeOf' in bits, and you can declare types with a specific size (given in bits), e.g.:
program IntegerSizeDemo;
type
MyInt = Integer attribute (Size = 42); { 42 bits, signed }
MyWord = Word attribute (Size = 2); { 2 bits, unsigned,
i.e., 0 .. 3 }
MyCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = 2); { the same }
HalfInt = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Integer) div 2);
{ A signed integer type which is half as big as the normal
`Integer' type, regardless of how big `Integer' is
on any platform the program is compiled on. }
begin
end.
| Borland Pascal | GNU Pascal
|
| Single | Single, ShortReal
|
| Real | n/a (1)
|
| Double | Double, Real
|
| Extended | Extended, LongReal
|
| Comp | LongInt, Comp (see above)
|
(1) But see `BPReal', `RealToBPReal' and
`BPRealToReal' in GPC's System unit.
type
MyRec = record
f, o, oo: Boolean;
Bar: Integer
end;
has 8 bytes, not 7. Use the --pack-struct option or declare
the record as `packed' to force GPC to pack it to 7 bytes.
However, note that this produces somewhat less efficient code on the
IA32 and far less efficient code on certain other processors.
Packing records and arrays is mostly useful only when using large
structures where memory usage is a real concern, or when reading or
writing them from/to binary files where the exact layout matters.
In addition to BP's procedural types, GNU Pascal has pointers to procedures:
type
FuncPtr = ^function (Real): Real;
The differences between procedure pointers and procedural types are only syntactical:
One can use both kinds in the same program, of course, though it is recommended to stick to one kind throughout to avoid maximum confusion.
GNU Pascal also supports Standard Pascal's procedural parameters (see Special Parameters).
Furthermore, GNU Pascal allows you to call even local procedures through procedural pointers, variables or parameters without reverting to any dirty tricks such as assembler (which is necessary in BP).
The differences between the various kinds of procedural types, pointers and parameters are demonstrated in the demo program procvardemo.pas. An example for calling local routines through procedural parameters can be found in the demo program iteratordemo.pas.
Besides the routines supproted by BP, there are many more routines available that deal with files, file names and similar things in a portable way. In contrast to Borland Pascal, you don't have to use any platform-specific units to do these kinds of things, though portable emulations of those units (e.g., of the `Dos' and `WinDos' units) are also available for compatibility.
Besides the operators found in Borland Pascal, GNU Pascal supports the following operators:
pow and ** which do not
exist in Borland Pascal. You can use x pow y for integer and
x ** y for real or complex exponents. The basis may be
integer, real or complex in both cases.
set1 >< set2. For more about this, see Set Operations.
The second parameter to `FreeMem' is ignored by GNU Pascal and may be omitted. Memory blocks are always freed with the same size they were allocated with.
Remark: Extended Pascal Schema types provide a cleaner approach to most of the applications of `GetMem' and `FreeMem'.
procedure Foo (var x);
like in Borland Pascal. In GNU Pascal, you can also use
procedure Foo (var x: Void);
procedure Foo (a: Integer; ...);
However, GPC does not (yet) provide a portable mechanism to access the additional arguments.
procedure Foo (a: array of Integer);
are implemented. However, Standard Pascal `conformant array parameters' are usually a cleaner mechanism to pass arrays of variable size.
procedure DrawGraph (function f (x: Real): Real);
program Foo (Input, Output);
begin
end.
In GNU Pascal, headline parameters are optional. If the headline is omitted entirely, a warning is given unless you have specified `--borland-pascal' in the command line.
otherwise (according to Extended Pascal) as an
alternative to else:
program CaseOtherwiseDemo;
var x: Integer;
begin
ReadLn (x);
case x of
1: WriteLn ('one');
2: WriteLn ('two');
otherwise
WriteLn ('many')
end
end.
Note: In the absence of a `case' or `otherwise' branch, missing cases labels cause an error in Extended Pascal (which goes unnoticed in Borland Pascal). GPC does not give this error, but a warning if the `-Wswitch' option is given, however only for enumeration types.
Card function for sets which counts
their elements. Unlike Borland Pascal, GNU Pascal does not limit
sets to the range 0 .. 255.
Borland Pascal:
function Max (x, y: Integer): Integer;
inline ($58 / $59 / $3b / $c1 / $7f / $01 / $91);
GNU Pascal:
program InlineDemo;
function Max (x, y: Integer): Integer; attribute (inline);
begin
if x > y then
Max := x
else
Max := y
end;
begin
WriteLn (Max (42, 17), ' ', Max (-4, -2))
end.
(Actually, a more general `Max' function is already built in.)
This feature is not so important as it might seem because in optimization level 3 or higher (see GPC Options), GNU Pascal automatically inlines short procedures and functions.
Pascal is a well-known programming language and hardly needs to be described here. Note, however, that there is a large difference between the language used by the BP compiler and the Pascal Standards.
Extended Pascal is a standardized language based on the original Standard Pascal, but with significant extensions. Unfortunately, Borland Pascal does not conform to any of the Pascal standards. Writing a program that both complies to Extended Pascal (or even Standard Pascal) and compiles with BP is almost impossible for any non-trivial task.
On the other hand, BP has some nice features that make it very powerful in the environments in which it runs. However, some of those features are of little use on non-Dos systems and would not be good candidates for standardization.
There are also several BP features which are semantically similar to features in Standard Pascal or Extended Pascal, but syntactically different.
Therefore, in order to be useful to users coming from either side, GPC supports both the standards and the BP dialect as good as possible. By default, GPC allows features from any dialect it knows. By giving a dialect option such as `--borland-pascal' or `--extended-pascal', you can tell GPC to disable the features not found in that dialect, and to adjust its warning behaviour to the dialect.
The different sets of reserved words are a little problem, but GPC solves it by making the words in question only “conditionally reserved” which works transparently without problems in most cases. Still, giving a dialect option will disable all keywords not part of this dialect.
Apart from this, there are surprisingly few real conflicts between the dialects. Therefore, you can usually compile your BP code without the `--borland-pascal' option and make use of all of GPC's features. You might be surprised, though, when GPC accepts things you didn't know were allowed. :−)
Finally, if you want to make use of some of GPC's extensions (compared to BP) and still keep the code compileable with BP without using `ifdef's all over the place, we suggest you look at the unit `gpc-bp.pas', shipped with GPC, which contains BP versions of some of GPC's features. Please read the comments at the beginning of the unit to find out more about it.
GPC offers you the possibility to make your code fully portable to each of the many platforms supported by GPC. It would be a pity not to make use of this.
This section lists some known pitfalls that often hinder otherwise well-written programs to take full advantage of GPC. If you have never used any compiler but Borland Pascal and similar compilers, some of the advices might look strange to you. But this is just the same level of strangeness that your old programs will have for you once you have understood the principles of cross-platform portability. Remember that many tricks you have always been applying almost automatically in Borland Pascal were necessary to overcome certain limitations of the Dos platform and to compensate for the compiler's missing optimization. Programming with an optimizing compiler like GPC for platforms without a 64 kB limit is a completely new experience – and perhaps it is among the reasons why you are now working with GPC in the first place?
Okay – but why should I bother and make my program portable? I know that all who want to use my program are running WXYZ-OS anyway.
Yes, but that's the result of a self-fulfilling prophecy. It depends on you whether it will always remain like this or not. Consider a program ABC written for a single platform, WXYZ-OS. Naturally, only WXYZ-OS-users get interested in ABC. The author gets feedback only from WXYZ-OS users and does not see any reason to make the program cross-platform. Then people realize that if they want to run ABC they must move to WXYZ-OS. The author concludes that people only want WXYZ-OS programs, and so on.
To break out, just create a portable version of your program now. Then all OSes have equal chances to show their abilities when running your program, and your customers can choose their OS. Then, maybe, they decide to use your program just for the reason that they can be sure that it will run on all present and future platforms and not only on a specific one – who knows?
My program is a tool specifically designed to make the best of the STUV feature of WXYZ-OS. There is no point in making it portable.
How much do you know about non-WXYZ-OSes? Just ask an expert how the STUV feature is named elsewhere. Be sure, if it is of value, it exists almost everywhere.
I am using a lot of low-level stuff in my programs, so they cannot be portable.
You do not use those low-level routines directly in your high-level routines, do you? There should always be a layer “in-between” that encapsulates the low-level routines and present an API to your program that exactly reflects the needs of your application. This “API in between” is the point where you can exchange the low-level routines by portable calls to GPC's Run Time System.
If you do not have such a layer in-between, then the API of the low-level routines you call are your first approximation for such a layer. If you have ever thought “it would be great if that API function had that additional parameter”, then your own extended version of that API function that has that parameter can become part of your “API in between”. But then don't stop here: Certainly the API of the OS is not ideal for your program's needs. Just create more routines that encapsulate all OS-specific stuff ...
When the low-level stuff in question consists of interrupts, assembler and similar things, then the first thing you need is a portable replacement of the functionality. Fortunately, GPC covers many things already in Pascal that require assembler in Borland Pascal:
This chapter is still under development. All keywords and built-in identifiers are listed, but not all with explanations.
This chapter contains an alphabetical list of all keywords (reserved words) and built-in identifiers of the GNU Pascal compiler. For detailed and comprehensive description of syntax and reserved words, see Programming. This chapter explains only built-in procedures and functions in detail.
It does not cover extensions provided by external units and libraries which are supposed to come with their own documentation. For the interfaces of the units that come with GPC, see GPC Units.
function Abs (i: integer_type): integer_type;
or
function Abs (x: real_type): real_type;
or
function Abs (z: complex_type): real_type;
Returns the absolute value of the argument. For integer or real values of `x', the definition is
function Abs (x: integer_or_real_type): integer_or_real_type;
begin
if x < 0 then
Abs := -x
else
Abs := x
end;
whereas for complex values it is
function Abs (x: Complex): Real;
begin
Abs := SqRt (x * Conjugate (x))
end;
The function `Abs' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program AbsDemo;
var
i1: Complex;
begin
WriteLn (Abs (42)); { 42 }
WriteLn (Abs (-42)); { 42 }
WriteLn (Abs (-12.1) : 0 : 1); { 12.1 }
i1 := Cmplx (1, 1); { 1 + i }
WriteLn (Abs (i1) : 0 : 3) { 1.414, i.e. SqRt (2) }
end.
Sqr.
var
variable_name: data_type absolute variable_reference;
or
var
variable_name: data_type absolute integer_expression;
The first meaning of the `absolute' directive allows to put a variable to the address of another one and thus provides a type-casting mechanism.
In most cases, variable_reference will be just a variable name, but GPC also allows arbitrary pointer expressions here. If variable_reference has neither a constant address nor is a variable parameter, GPC prints a warning. This warning is suppressed in “extended syntax” mode which is switched on by the `--extended-syntax' option or the `{$X+}' compiler directive.
GPC also allows explicit type casts. Variant records (as defined in ISO 7185 Pascal), however, have no guaranteed overlaying and are therefore not suitable for type casts.
The second meaning of `absolute' places a variable at a specified address. This is useful on machines without virtual memory addressing for doing certain low-level operations, but should be avoided on systems with memory protection such as Unix-like systems. GPC does not check whether the specified virtual address makes any sense and does not provide a built-in mechanism to map it to a real address.
GPC warns about this second use of `absolute' unless “extended syntax” has been requested.
`absolute' is a Borland Pascal extension.
Borland Pascal has a slightly different syntax for the second meaning related to the addressing scheme of IA32 processors working in real mode.
Allowing arbitrary memory references instead of just variable names in the first meaning of `absolute' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AbsoluteDemo;
{$X+}
const
IOMem = $f0000000;
MaxVarSize = MaxInt div 8;
var
Mem: array [0 .. MaxVarSize - 1] of Byte absolute 0;
{ This address has no actual meaning }
MyPort: Byte absolute IOMem + $c030;
{ Beware: Using any of the variables above will crash
your program unless you know exactly what you do!
That's why GPC warns about it without the $X+ directive. }
var
x: Real;
a: array [1 .. SizeOf (Real)] of Byte absolute x;
i: Integer;
b: Byte absolute a[i]; { GNU Pascal extension:
non-constant memory reference. }
begin
x := 3.14;
{ Look at the internal representation of a real variable. }
for i := 1 to SizeOf (Real) do
Write (a[i] : 4);
WriteLn;
{ The same again, more ugly ... }
for i := 1 to SizeOf (Real) do
Write (b : 4);
WriteLn;
{ And yes, there's an even more ugly way to do it ... }
for i := 1 to SizeOf (Real) do
Write (Mem[PtrCard (@x) + i - 1] : 4);
WriteLn
end.
Abstract object type or method declaration.
`abstract' is an Object Pascal extension.
function Addr (const Foo): Pointer;
`Addr' returns the address of its argument. It is equivalent to the address operator.
Note: In BP, `Addr' returns an untyped pointer. GPC does this only with `--borland-pascal'. Otherwise it returns a typed pointer. `Addr' never depends on the `--[no]-typed-address' option/compiler directive, unlike the address operator. (It is recommended you never rely on untyped pointer results, but use a type-cast if really necessary.)
`Addr' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program AddrDemo;
var
Foo: ^Integer;
Bar: Integer;
begin
Foo := Addr (Bar); { Let `Foo' point to `Bar'. }
Bar := 17;
Foo^ := 42; { Change the value of `Bar' to 42 }
WriteLn (Bar)
end.
function AlignOf (var x): Integer;
Returns the alignment of a type or variable in bytes.
`AlignOf' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AlignOfDemo;
var
a: Integer;
b: array [1 .. 8] of Char;
begin
WriteLn (AlignOf (a)); { Alignment of `Integer', e.g. 4 bytes. }
WriteLn (AlignOf (Integer)); { The same. }
WriteLn (AlignOf (b)); { Alignment of `Char'; usually 1 byte. }
end.
Although the array is bigger than a single char, it is accessed char by char, so there usually is no need to align it on a 4 byte boundary or such. (This may be false on some platforms.)
`export' extension (`export foo = all').
`all' is a GNU Pascal extension.
operator and (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
or
operator and (operand1, operand2: integer_type) = Result: integer_type;
or
procedure and (var operand1: integer_type; operand2: integer_type);
In GNU Pascal, `and' has three built-in meanings:
By default, `and' acts as a short-circuit operator in GPC: If the first operand is `False', the second operand is not evaluated because the result is already known to be `False'. You can change this to complete evaluation using the `--no-short-circuit' command-line option or the `{$B+}' compiler directive.
The logical `and' operator is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal.
According to ISO, you cannot rely on `and' being a short-circuit operator. On the other hand, GPC's default behaviour does not contradict the ISO standard. (See and_then.) However, since it seems to be a de-facto standard among ISO Pascal compilers to evaluate both operands of `and', GPC switches to `--no-short-circuit' mode if one of the language dialect options selecting ISO Pascal, for instance `--extended-pascal', is given. Use `--short-circuit' to override.
Use of `and' as a bitwise operator for integers is a Borland Pascal extension.
Use of `and' as a “procedure” is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AndDemo;
var
a, b, c: Integer;
begin
if (a = 0) and (b = 0) then { logical `and' }
c := 1
else if (a and b) = 0 then { bitwise `and' }
c := 2
else
and (c, a) { same as `c := c and a' }
end.
Note the difference between the logical `and' and the bitwise `and': When `a' is 2 and `b' is 4, then `a and b' is 0. Beware: `a and b = 0' has nothing to do with `(a = 0) and (b = 0)'!
Since bitwise `and' has a higher priority than the `=' operator, parentheses are needed in `if (a = 0) and (b = 0)' because otherwise `0 and b' would be calculated first, and the remainder would cause a parse error.
Keywords, and_then, and then, or, xor, Operators.
{ `and then' is built in. A user-defined operator cannot consist of
two words. }
operator and then (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
`and then' is an alias for the short-circuit logical operator `and_then'.
While `and_then' is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal, `and then' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AndThenDemo;
var
p: ^Integer;
begin
New (p);
ReadLn (p^);
if (p <> nil) and then (p^ < 42) then { This is safe. }
WriteLn (p^, ' is less than 42')
end.
Keywords, and_then, and, or else.
operator and_then (operand1, operand2: Boolean) = Result: Boolean;
The `and_then' short-circuit logical operator performs the same operation as the logical operator `and'. But while the ISO standard does not specify anything about the evaluation of the operands of `and' – they may be evaluated in any order, or not at all – `and_then' has a well-defined behaviour: It evaluates the first operand. If the result is `False', `and_then' returns `False' without evaluating the second operand. If it is `True', the second operand is evaluated and returned.
Since the behaviour described above is the most efficient way to implement `and', GPC by default treats `and' and `and_then' exactly the same. If you want, for some reason, to have both operands of `and' evaluated completely, you must assign both to temporary variables and then use `and' – or `and_then', it does not matter.
`and_then' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Some people think that the ISO standard requires both operands of `and' to be evaluated. This is false. What the ISO standard does say is that you cannot rely on a certain order of evaluation of the operands of `and'; in particular things like the following program can crash according to ISO Pascal, although they cannot crash when compiled with GNU Pascal running in default mode.
program AndBug;
var
p: ^Integer;
begin
New (p);
ReadLn (p^);
if (p <> nil) and (p^ < 42) then { This is NOT safe! }
WriteLn ('You''re lucky. But the test could have crashed ...')
end.
program And_ThenDemo;
var
p: ^Integer;
begin
New (p);
ReadLn (p^);
if (p <> nil) and_then (p^ < 42) then { This is safe. }
WriteLn (p^, ' is less than 42')
end.
Keywords, and then, and, or_else.
type
AnsiChar = Char;
`AnsiChar' is an 8 bit char type. Currently, it is the same as `Char', but this might change in the future, once `wide chars' (16 bit chars) will be introduced into GPC. Depending on the platform, `Char' might be either `AnsiChar' or `WideChar' then.
`AnsiChar' is a Borland Delphi extension.
program AnsiCharDemo;
var
A: AnsiChar; { There is nothing special with `AnsiChar'. }
B: Char;
begin
A := 'A';
A := B
end.
type
AnyFile { built-in type }
`AnyFile' is a built-in type that can only be used for parameters and pointer targets. Any kind of file variable (`Text', untyped and typed `file') can be passed to such a parameter and their address assigned to such a pointer. On the other side, only generic file operations are possible with `AnyFile' parameters/pointer targets.
This type is useful for implementing generic file handling routines. Also some built-in file routines use this type for their parameters, e.g. `IOSelectRead' (see Run Time System).
`BlockRead' (see BlockRead) and `BlockWrite' (see BlockWrite) treat `AnyFile' specially, in that they accept all `AnyFile's as arguments (even if the actual file is a typed or `Text' file) and always use a block size of 1 (even if the actual file is an untyped file with different block size or a typed file of a type with size not equal to one). This is the only way to reliably read/write a certain amount of data from/to an `AnyFile'.
`AnyFile' pointers cannot be allocated with `New' (because it would be unspecified which kind of file to create).
`AnyFile' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AnyFileDemo;
procedure Test (var f: AnyFile);
var v: ^AnyFile;
begin
{ Generic file operations are allowed for `AnyFile' }
Rewrite (f);
{ `AnyFile' can also be accessed via pointers }
v := @f;
Close (v^)
end;
var
t: Text;
f: file;
g: file of Integer;
begin
{ Any kind of file variable can be passed as `AnyFile' }
Test (t);
Test (f);
Test (g)
end.
procedure Append (var F: any_file; [FileName: String;]
[BlockSize: Cardinal]);
`Append' opens a file for writing. If the file does not exist, it is created. If it does exist, the file pointer is positioned after the last element.
Like `Rewrite', `Reset' and `Extend' do, `Reset' accepts an optional second parameter for the name of the file in the filesystem and a third parameter for the block size of the file. The third parameter is allowed only (and by default also required) for untyped files. For details, see Rewrite.
`Append', including the `BlockSize' parameter, is a Borland Pascal extension. ISO 10206 Extended Pascal has Extend instead. The `FileName' parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AppendDemo;
var
Sample: Text;
begin
Assign (Sample, 'sample.txt');
Rewrite (Sample);
WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello, World!'); { `sample.txt' now has one line }
Close (Sample);
{ ... }
Append (Sample);
WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello again!'); { `sample.txt' now has two lines }
Close (Sample)
end.
Assign, Reset, Rewrite, Update, Extend.
function ArcCos (x: Real): Real;
or
function ArcCos (z: Complex): Complex;
`ArcCos' returns the (principal value of the) arcus cosine of the argument. The result is in the range `0 < ArcCos (x) < Pi' for real arguments.
`ArcCos' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ArcCosDemo;
begin
{ yields 3.14159 as ArcCos (0.5) = Pi / 3 }
WriteLn (3 * ArcCos (0.5) : 0 : 5)
end.
ArcSin, ArcTan, Sin, Cos, Ln, Arg.
function ArcSin (x: Real): Real;
or
function ArcSin (z: Complex): Complex;
`ArcSin' returns the (principal value of the) arcus sine of the argument. The result is in the range `-Pi / 2 < ArcSin (x) < Pi / 2' for real arguments.
`ArcSin' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ArcSinDemo;
begin
{ yields 3.14159 as ArcSin (0.5) = Pi / 6 }
WriteLn (6 * ArcSin (0.5) : 0 : 5)
end.
ArcCos, ArcTan, Sin, Cos, Ln, Arg.
function ArcTan (x: Real): Real;
or
function ArcTan (z: Complex): Complex;
`ArcTan' returns the (principal value of the) arcus tangent of the argument. The result is in the range `-Pi / 2 < ArcTan (x) < Pi / 2' for real arguments.
`ArcTan' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program ArcTanDemo;
begin
{ yields 3.14159 as ArcTan (1) = Pi / 4 }
WriteLn (4 * ArcTan (1) : 0 : 5)
end.
ArcSin, ArcCos, Sin, Cos, Ln, Arg.
function Arg (z: Complex): Real;
`Arg' returns the complex “argument”, i.e. the angle (in radian) in the complex plane with respect to the real axis, of its parameter `z'. The result is in the range of `-Pi < Arg (z) <= Pi'.
`Arg' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ArgDemo;
var
z: Complex;
begin
z := Cmplx (1, 1); { 1 + i }
WriteLn (Arg (z) : 0 : 5) { yields 0.78540, i.e. Pi / 4 }
end.
In type definitions:
array [index_type] of element_type
or
array [index_type, ..., index_type] of element_type
In parameter list declarations:
array of element_type
The reserved word `array' is used to define an array type.
@@conformant/open arrays
Array types are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal.
program ArrayDemo;
type
IntArray = array [1 .. 20] of Integer;
WeekDayChars = array [(Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun)] of Char;
Foo = array [0 .. 9, 'a' .. 'z', (Baz, Glork1, Fred)] of Real;
TwoDimIntArray = array [1 .. 10] of IntArray;
{ is equivalent to: }
TwoDimIntArray2 = array [1 .. 10, 1 .. 20] of Integer;
procedure PrintChars (F: array of Char);
var
i: Integer;
begin
for i := Low (F) to High (F) do
WriteLn (F[i])
end;
var
Waldo: WeekDayChars;
begin
Waldo := 'HiWorld';
PrintChars (Waldo)
end.
Keywords, Array Types, High, Low
Object type membership test and conversion.
`as' is an Object Pascal and a Borland Delphi extension.
See `http://www.gnu-pascal.de/contrib/misc/gpcasm.zip'.
`asm', as implemented in GPC, is a GNU Pascal extension. It is mostly compatible to GCC's `asm', but not compatible to that of Borland Pascal.
Deprecated! Use `external name' now.
Keywords, external, name, Importing Libraries from Other Languages.
procedure Assert (Condition: Boolean);
or
procedure Assert (Condition: Boolean; const Message: String);
`Assert' checks the given `Condition' at run-time. If it is true, it does nothing. If it is false, it raises a runtime error, using the second argument for the message if given.
However, if the switch `--no-assertions' is given (see GPC Command Line Options), `Assert' is deactivated. It still evaluates the condition if it has side effects, but never raises a runtime error.
`Assert' is a Borland Delphi extension.
procedure Assign (var F: any_file; FileName: String);
`Assign' is a Borland Pascal extension.
Reset, Rewrite, Update, Extend, Append.
function Assigned (p: Pointer): Boolean;
or
function Assigned (p: procedural_type): Boolean;
The `Assigned' function returns `True' if the pointer parameter or the address of the procedural parameter is not `nil'; it returns `False' if it is `nil'.
`Assigned' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program AssignedDemo;
type
PInt = ^Integer;
procedure TellIfOdd (p: PInt);
begin
if Assigned (p) and then Odd (p^) then
WriteLn ('The pointer p points to an odd value.')
end;
var
foo: Integer;
begin
TellIfOdd (nil);
foo := 1;
TellIfOdd (@foo);
foo := 2;
TellIfOdd (@foo)
end.
declaration attribute (name);
or
declaration attribute (name = parameter);
or
declaration attribute (name (parameter, parameter ...));
Several attributes can be given in one `attribute' directive, separated with `,', or in several `attribute' directives.
Besides the attributes that GCC supports (see Attribute Syntax), GPC allows the following attributes for variables:
For routines it allows the following additional attributes:
For types it allows the following additional attributes:
`Size' can be applied to integer and Boolean types to produce types with a specified size in bits; for example
type
Card16 = Cardinal attribute (Size = 16);
defines an unsigned integer type with 16 bits.
Variable and routine attributes are preceded by a `;', type attributes are not. So, e.g., in the following example, the `Size' attribute applies to the type, and the `static' attribute to the variable.
var a: Integer attribute (Size = 64); attribute (static);
`attribute' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program AttributeDemo;
{ Demo for `iocritical' attribute. }
{ Program will abort with a runtime error! }
{$I-}
procedure p; attribute (iocritical);
var t: Text;
begin
Reset (t) { Will not cause a runtime error here because I/O
checking is off, but leave InOutRes set. }
end;
{$I+}
begin
p;
{ Since `p' was declared `iocritical', and I/O checking is now on,
InOutRes is checked immediately after the call to p, and a
runtime error raised. }
{ So this statement is never reached. }
InOutRes := 0;
{ Neither this one, which would be reached without the
`iocritical' attribute. }
WriteLn ('never gets here')
end.
begin
statement;
statement;
...
statement
end;
The reserved word `begin' opens a `begin ... end' statement which joins several statements to one compound statement.
`begin' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program BeginDemo;
begin
if True then
WriteLn ('single statement');
if True then
begin { clamp statement1 ... }
WriteLn ('statement1');
WriteLn ('statement2')
end { ... to statement2 }
end.
Keywords, begin end Compound Statement, end
procedure Bind (var F: any_file; B: BindingType);
`Bind' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Unbind, Binding, BindingType, bindable.
External bindability of files.
`bindable' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Keywords, Bind, Unbind, Binding, BindingType.
function Binding (F: any_file): BindingType;
`Binding' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Bind, Unbind, BindingType, bindable.
type
UnixTimeType = LongInt;
BindingType = packed record
Bound,
Force, { Can be set to allow binding to
directories or inaccessible files }
Extensions_Valid,
Readable,
Writable,
Executable,
Existing, { Binding points to an existing file }
Directory, { Binding points to an existing
directory; `Existing' is False
in this case }
Special, { Binding points to an existing
special file (device, pipe, socket,
etc.); `Existing' is False in
this case }
SymLink: Boolean; { Binding points to a symbolic link }
Size: FileSizeType; { Size of file, or -1 if unknown }
AccessTime, { Time of last access }
ModificationTime, { Time of last modification }
ChangeTime: UnixTimeType; { Time of last change }
User, { User ID of owner }
Group, { Group ID of owner }
Mode, { Access permissions, cf. ChMod }
Device, { Device the file is on }
INode, { Unix INode number }
Links: Integer; { Number of hard links }
TextBinary: Boolean; { Open a Text file in binary mode }
Handle: Integer; { Can be set to bind a Pascal file to
a given file handle }
CloseFlag: Boolean; { If Handle is used, tell whether to
close it when file is closed }
Name: String (BindingNameLength)
end;
BindingNameLength is an implementation-defined constant.
`BindingType' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension. The fields `Bound' and `Name' are required by Extended Pascal, the other ones are GNU Pascal extensions.
Bind, Unbind, Binding, bindable.
function BitSizeOf (var x): SizeType;
Returns the size of a type or variable in bits.
`BitSizeOf' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program BitSizeOfDemo;
type
Int12 = Integer attribute (Size = 12);
var
a: Integer;
b: array [1 .. 8] of Char;
c: Int12;
d: packed record
x: Int12;
y: 0 .. 3
end;
begin
WriteLn (BitSizeOf (a)); { Size of an `Integer'; usually 32 bits. }
WriteLn (BitSizeOf (Integer)); { The same. }
WriteLn (BitSizeOf (b)); { Size of eight `Char's; usually 64 bits. }
WriteLn (BitSizeOf (c)); { e.g. 16 bits (smallest addressable
space holding a 12 bit integer). }
WriteLn (BitSizeOf (d)); { e.g. 16 }
WriteLn (BitSizeOf (d.x)); { 12 }
WriteLn (BitSizeOf (d.y)) { 2 }
end.
procedure BlockRead (var F: File; var Buffer; Blocks: Integer);
or
procedure BlockRead (var F: File; var Buffer; Blocks: Integer;
var BlocksRead: Integer);
`BlockRead' is a UCSD Pascal extension.
procedure BlockWrite (var F: File; const Buffer; Blocks: Integer);
or
procedure BlockWrite (var F: File; const Buffer; Blocks: Integer;
var BlocksWritten: Integer);
`BlockWrite' is a UCSD Pascal extension.
type
Boolean = (False, True); { built-in type }
The intrinsic `Boolean' represents boolean values, i.e. it can only assume the two values `True' and `False' (which are predefined constants).
`Boolean' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program BooleanDemo;
var
a: Boolean;
begin
a := True;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), True, False, CBoolean, ByteBool, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
Break { simple statement }
With `Break' you can exit the body of the current loop instantly. It can only be used within a `while', `repeat' or a `for' loop.
`Break' is a Borland Pascal extension. Mac Pascal has `Leave' instead.
program BreakDemo;
var
Foo: Integer;
begin
while True do
begin
repeat
WriteLn ('Enter a number less than 100:');
ReadLn (Foo);
if Foo < 100 then
Break; { Exits `repeat' loop }
WriteLn (Foo, ' is not exactly less than 100! Try again ...')
until False;
if Foo > 50 then
Break; { Exits `while' loop }
WriteLn ('The number entered was not greater than 50.')
end
end.
Loop Control Statements, Continue, Cycle, Exit, Halt, Leave, Return, goto.
type
Byte { built-in type }
`Byte' is an unsigned integer type which is one “unit” wide. On most platforms one unit has 8 bits, therefore the type is named “byte” and usually has a range of `0 .. 255'. (It is the same as ByteCard.)
`Byte' in GNU Pascal is compatible to `unsigned char' in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`Byte' is a Borland Pascal extension. (For something equivalent in ISO Pascal, see Subrange Types.)
program ByteDemo;
var
a: Byte;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type
ByteBool = Boolean attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Byte));
The intrinsic `ByteBool' represents boolean values, but occupies the same memory space as a `Byte'. It is used when you need to define a parameter or record that conforms to some external library or system specification.
`ByteBool' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ByteBoolDemo;
var
a: ByteBool;
begin
Byte (a) := 1;
if a then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1')
end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Boolean, True, False, CBoolean, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
type
ByteCard = Cardinal attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Byte));
`ByteCard' is an unsigned integer type which is one “unit” wide. On most platforms one unit has 8 bits, therefore the type is prefixed “byte-” and usually has a range of `0 .. 255'.
`ByteCard' in GNU Pascal is compatible to `unsigned char' in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`ByteCard' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ByteCardDemo;
var
a: ByteCard;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type
ByteInt = Integer attribute (Size = BitSizeOf (Byte));
`ByteInt' is a signed integer type which is one “unit” wide. On most platforms one unit has 8 bits, therefore the type is prefixed “byte-” and usually has a range of `-128 .. 127'.
`ByteInt' in GNU Pascal is compatible to `signed char' in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`ByteInt' is a GNU Pascal extension.
`ByteInt' in GNU Pascal corresponds to ShortInt in Borland Pascal.
program ByteIntDemo;
var
a: ByteInt;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
Deprecated! Use `external' now.
Keywords, Importing Libraries from Other Languages, external.
function Card (S: any_set): Integer;
The function `Card (S)' returns the number of elements in the set `S'.
`Card' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program CardDemo;
var
Foo: set of 1 .. 100;
begin
Foo := [1, 2, 3, 5, 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 5, 5]; { four elements }
WriteLn ('foo consists of ', Card (Foo), ' elements')
end.
type
Cardinal { built-in type }
`Cardinal' is the “natural” unsigned integer type in GNU Pascal. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of `0 .. 4294967295'. Use it whenever you need a general-purpose unsigned integer type and don't need to care about compatibility to other Pascal dialects.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`Cardinal' is not defined in ISO Pascal, but several Pascal compilers support it as an extension. In Borland Delphi, for instance, it is an unsigned 16-bit in version 1.0, an unsigned 31-bit integer from version 2.0 on, and an unsigned 32-bit integer from version 4.0 on.
program CardinalDemo;
var
a: Cardinal;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
case expression of
selector: statement;
...
selector: statement;
end;
or, with alternative statement sequence:
case expression of
selector: statement;
...
selector: statement;
otherwise { ``else'' instead of ``otherwise'' is allowed }
statement;
...
statement;
end;
or, as part of the invariant record type definition:
foo = record
field_declarations
case bar: variant_type of
selector: (field_declarations);
selector: (field_declarations);
...
end;
or, without a variant selector field,
foo = record
field_declarations
case variant_type of
selector: (field_declarations);
selector: (field_declarations);
...
end;
`case' opens a case statement. For further description see case Statement.
For `case' in a variant record type definition, see Record Types.
The `case' statement is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
According to ISO 7185 Pascal, the selector type must be a named type. UCSD Pascal and Borland Pascal allow any ordinal type here.
The alternative statement execution with `otherwise' it is an Extended Pascal extension; with `else' it is a Borland Pascal extension. In GNU Pascal, both are allowed.
program CaseDemo;
var
Foo: String (10);
Bar: Integer;
begin
WriteLn ('Enter up to ten arbitrary characters:');
ReadLn (Foo);
for Bar := 1 to Length (Foo) do
begin
Write (Foo[Bar], ' is ');
case Foo[Bar] of
'A' .. 'Z', 'a' .. 'z':
WriteLn ('an English letter');
'0' .. '9':
WriteLn ('a number');
otherwise
WriteLn ('an unrecognized character')
end
end
end.
Keywords, if Statement, Record Types, else, otherwise
type
CBoolean { built-in type }
`CBoolean' is a Boolean type. In GNU Pascal it is compatible to `_Bool' in GNU C (which is defined as `bool' in stdbool.h). This compatibility is the reason why `CBoolean' exists.
`CBoolean' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CBooleanDemo;
var
a: CBoolean;
begin
a := True;
if Ord (a) = 1 then WriteLn ('Ord (True) = 1')
end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), Integer Types, Boolean, True, False, ByteBool, ShortBool, MedBool, WordBool, LongBool, LongestBool.
type
CCardinal { built-in type }
`CCardinal' is an unsigned integer type. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of `0 .. 4294967295'.
`CCardinal' in GNU Pascal is compatible to `unsigned int' in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`CCardinal' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CCardinalDemo;
var
a: CCardinal;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
type
Char { built-in type }
The built-in type `Char' holds elements of the operating system's character set (usually ASCII). The `Char' type is a special case of ordinal type. Conversion between character types and ordinal types is possible with the built-in functions `Ord' and `Chr'.
`Char' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program CharDemo;
var
a: Char;
begin
a := 'x';
WriteLn (a)
end.
Character Types, Ordinal Types, Type Casts, Ord, Chr.
procedure ChDir (Directory: String);
`ChDir' changes the current directory to Directory, if its argument is a valid parameter to the related operating system's function. Otherwise, a runtime error is caused.
`ChDir' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ChDirDemo;
var
Foo: String (127);
begin
WriteLn ('Enter directory name to change to:');
ReadLn (Foo);
{$I-} { Don't abort the program on error }
ChDir (Foo);
if IOResult <> 0 then
WriteLn ('Cannot change to directory `', Foo, '''.')
else
WriteLn ('Okay.')
end.
function Chr (AsciiCode: Integer): Char;
`Chr' returns a character whose ASCII code corresponds to the value given by `AsciiCode'.
`Chr' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program ChrDemo;
var
x: Integer;
begin
for x := 32 to 122 do
Write (Chr (x))
end.
type
CInteger { built-in type }
`CInteger' is a signed integer type. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of `-2147483648 .. 2147483647'.
`CInteger' in GNU Pascal is compatible to `int' in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`CInteger' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CIntegerDemo;
var
a: CInteger;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
Deprecated! Use `external' now.
Keywords, Importing Libraries from Other Languages, external.
OOE/Delphi style object class.
`class' is an Object Pascal and a Borland Delphi extension.
procedure Close (var F: any_file);
`Close' is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Cmplx (RealPart, ImaginaryPart: Real): Complex;
`Cmplx' makes a complex number from `RealPart' and `ImaginaryPart'.
`Cmplx' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program CmplxDemo;
var
z: Complex;
x, y: Real;
begin
z := Cmplx (x, y) { z := x + iy }
end.
type
Comp = LongInt;
`Comp' is a signed integer type which is longer than `Integer'. On some platforms it is 64 bits wide and thus has a range of `-9223372036854775808 .. 9223372036854775807'.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`Comp' is a Borland Pascal extension.
In some contexts, Borland Pascal treats `Comp' as a “real” type – this behaviour is not supported by GPC.
program CompDemo;
var
a: Comp;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
Integer Types, Subrange Types.
procedure CompilerAssert (Condition: Boolean);
or
function CompilerAssert (Condition: Boolean): Boolean;
or
function CompilerAssert (Condition: Boolean;
ResultValue: Any_Type): type of ResultValue;
`CompilerAssert' checks the given `Condition' at compile-time. If it is a compile-time constant of Boolean type with the value `True', it returns `ResultValue', or if called with only one argument, it returns `True' or nothing if used as a procedure.
If `Condition' cannot be evaluated at compile-time or does not have the value `True', it causes a compile-time error.
So it can be used to make sure that certain assumptions hold before relying on them.
`CompilerAssert' does not depend on the `--[no-]assertions' options. It does not generate any run-time code.
`CompilerAssert' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CompilerAssertDemo;
var
a: LongInt;
const
{ Make sure that the highest value a can hold is larger than
MaxInt, and set b to that value. }
b = CompilerAssert (High (a) > MaxInt, High (a));
{ Do a similar check for the minimum value, setting c to True
(which can be ignored). }
c = CompilerAssert (Low (a) < Low (Integer));
begin
{ Procedure-like use of CompilerAssert in the statement part. }
CompilerAssert (MaxInt >= 100000);
WriteLn (b, ' ', c)
end.
type
Internal_Complex = record { not visible }
RealPart, ImaginaryPart: Real
end;
Complex = restricted Internal_Complex;
`Complex' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ComplexDemo;
var
a: Complex;
begin
a := Cmplx (42, 3);
WriteLn (Re (a), ' + ', Im (a), ' i')
end.
function Concat (S1, S2: String): String;
or
function Concat (S1, S2, S3: String): String;
or
...
`Concat' is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Conjugate (z: Complex): Complex;
`Conjugate' computes the complex conjugate of the complex number `z'
`Conjugate' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ConjugateDemo;
var
z: Complex;
begin
z := Cmplx (2, 3); { z is 2 + i * 3 }
WriteLn ('z = ', Re (z) : 0 : 5, ' + i * ', Im (z) : 0 : 5);
z := Conjugate (z); { z conjugate is 2 - i * 3 }
WriteLn ('z conjugate = ', Re (z) : 0 : 5,' + i * ', Im (z) : 0 : 5)
end.
Constant declaration or constant parameter declaration.
`const' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. `const' parameters are a Borland Pascal extension. Pointers to `const' are a GNU Pascal extension.
Constant declarations allow you to define names for constant (unchanging) values, such as using `SecondsPerHour' instead of 3600. This can make your program much more readable and maintainable.
GNU Pascal allows you to define constant strings, records and arrays as well as simple numeric constants.
GNU Pascal also implements the const parameter extension which allows the compiler to pass parameters by reference while still allowing you to pass constant values as inputs. See Subroutine Parameter List Declaration for more information.
@@ Pointers to `const' @@
program ConstDemo;
type
Rec = record
x: Integer;
y: Integer;
end;
const
a = 5;
constr: Rec = (10, 12);
procedure doit (const r: Rec; const s: String);
begin
WriteLn (r.x);
WriteLn (r.y);
WriteLn (s);
end;
var
variabler: Rec;
begin
variabler.x := 16;
variabler.y := 7;
doit (variabler, 'Should be 16 and 7');
doit (constr, 'Should be 10 and 12');
end.
Keywords, var, protected, Subroutine Parameter List Declaration.
Object constructor.
`constructor' is an Object Pascal and a Borland Pascal extension.
Continue { simple statement }
`Continue' goes on with loop iteration by jumping to the end of the current loop body. Note: `Continue' can only stand within a `while', `repeat' or a `for' loop.
`Continue' is a Borland Pascal extension, Mac Pascal has `Cycle' instead.
program ContinueDemo;
var
Foo, Bar: Integer;
begin
WriteLn ('Enter three numbers:');
for Bar := 1 to 3 do
begin
ReadLn (Foo);
if Foo < 5 then
Continue;
WriteLn ('Your number was greater than 5.')
end
end.
Loop Control Statements, Break, Cycle, Exit, Halt, Leave, Return, goto.
function Copy (S: String; FirstChar, Count: Integer): String;
or
function Copy (S: String; FirstChar: Integer): String;
`Copy' returns a sub-string of `S' starting with the character at position FirstChar. If Count is given, such many characters will be copied into the sub-string. If Count is omitted, the sub-string will range to the end of S.
If `Count' is too large for the sub-string to fit in S, the result will be truncated at the end of S. If `FirstChar' exceeds the length of S, the empty string will be returned. (For a function which does not truncate but triggers a runtime error instead, see SubStr.)
Please note that GPC's strings may be longer than 255 characters. If you want to isolate the second half of a string S starting with the third character, use `Copy (S, 3)' instead of `Copy (S, 3, 255)'.
`Copy' is a UCSD Pascal extension. The possibility to omit the third parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CopyDemo;
var
S: String (42);
begin
S := 'Hello';
WriteLn (Copy (S, 2, 3)); { yields `ell' }
WriteLn (Copy (S, 3)); { yields `llo' }
WriteLn (Copy (S, 4, 7)); { yields `lo' }
WriteLn (Copy (S, 42)) { yields the empty string }
end.
function Cos (x: Real): Real;
or
function Cos (z: Complex): Complex;
`Cos' returns the cosine of the argument. The result is in the range `-1 < Cos (x) < 1' for real arguments.
The function `Cos' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program CosDemo;
begin
{ yields 0.5 since Cos (Pi / 3) = 0.5 }
WriteLn (Cos (Pi / 3) : 0 : 5)
end.
type
CString = ^Char;
`CString' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CStringDemo;
var
s: CString;
begin
s := 'Hello, world!';
{$X+}
WriteLn (s)
end.
function CString2String (S: CString): String;
`CString2String' is a GNU Pascal extension.
function CStringCopyString (Dest: CString; const Source: String): CString;
`CStringCopyString' is a GNU Pascal extension.
function CurrentRoutineName: String;
`CurrentRoutineName' returns the name of the current routine from where it's called.
`CurrentRoutineName' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CurrentRoutineNameDemo;
procedure FooBar;
begin
WriteLn (CurrentRoutineName) { `FooBar' }
end;
begin
WriteLn (CurrentRoutineName); { `main program' }
FooBar
end.
type
CWord = CCardinal;
`CCardinal' is an unsigned integer type. On some platforms it is 32 bits wide and thus has a range of `0 .. 4294967295'. It is the same as CCardinal.
`CWord' in GNU Pascal is compatible to `unsigned int' in GNU C.
There are lots of other integer types in GPC, see Integer Types.
`CWord' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program CWordDemo;
var
a: CWord;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
CCardinal, Integer Types, Subrange Types.
Cycle { simple statement }
`Cycle' goes on with loop iteration by jumping to the end of the current loop body. Note: `Cycle' can only stand within a `while', `repeat' or a `for' loop.
`Cycle' is a Mac Pascal extension. Borland Pascal has `Continue' instead.
program CycleDemo;
var
Foo, Bar: Integer;
begin
WriteLn ('Enter three numbers:');
for Bar := 1 to 3 do
begin
ReadLn (Foo);
if Foo < 5 then
Cycle;
WriteLn ('Your number was greater than 5.')
end
end.
Loop Control Statements, Break, Continue, Exit, Halt, Leave, Return, goto.
function Date (T: TimeStamp): packed array [1 .. Date_length] of Char;
Date takes a TimeStamp parameter and returns the date as a
string (in the form of a packed array of Char).
Date_length is an implementation defined invisible constant.
`Date' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Set TimeStamp.
TimeStamp, GetTimeStamp, Time, Date And Time Routines.
For ordinal types:
procedure Dec (var x: ordinal_type);
or
procedure Dec (var x: ordinal_type; Amount: and_integer_type);
For pointer types:
procedure Dec (var p: any_pointer_type);
or
procedure Dec (var p: any_pointer_type; Amount: and_integer_type);
For ordinal types, `Dec' decreases the value of `x' by one or by `amount' if specified.
If the argument `p' is pointing to a specified type (typed pointer), `Dec' decreases the address of `p' by the size of the type `p' is pointing to or by `amount' times that size respectively. If `p' is an untyped pointer (i.e. `p' is of type Pointer), `p' is decreased by one, otherwise by `amount' if specified.
`Dec' is a Borland Pascal extension. The combination of the second argument with application to pointers is a GNU Pascal extension.
program DecDemo;
var
x: Integer;
y: array [1 .. 5] of Integer;
p: ^Integer;
begin
x := 9;
Dec (x, 10); { yields -1 }
{$X+} { Turn on extended systax }
p := @y[5]; { p points to y[5] }
Dec (p, 3) { p points to y[2] }
end.
Inc, Pred, Succ, Pointer Arithmetics.
procedure DefineSize (var F: any_file; NewSize: Integer);
`DefineSize' is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Delete (var S: String; FirstChar, Count: Integer);
or
procedure Delete (var S: String; FirstChar: Integer);
`Delete' is a UCSD Pascal extension. The possibility to omit the third parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
Object destructor.
`destructor' is an Object Pascal and a Borland Pascal extension.
Discard (Value);
`Discard' does nothing, but tells the compiler that the value given as an argument is not further used. It can be applied, e.g., to routine parameters which are to be ignored, so no warning about them will be given with `-Wunused', or when calling a function and ignore its result.
An alternative for the latter case is to give the function the `ignorable' attribute. This is useful is the function's result is expected to be ignored regularly. If, however, a result is generally meaningful and only to be ignored in a particular case, using `Discard' is preferable.
`Discard' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program DiscardDemo;
function Foo (a: Integer): Integer; begin WriteLn (a); Foo := a + 1 end;
{ Parameter `a' is there only to make the parameter list compatible to that of function `Foo'. } function Bar (a: Integer): Integer; begin Discard (a); { Tell the compiler that we intentionally do not use `a' in this function. } Bar := a + 1 end;
var c: Char; f: function (a: Integer): Integer;
begin Write ('With output? '); ReadLn (c); if LoCase (c) = 'y' then f := Foo else f := Bar; Discard (f (42)) { Call the function, but ignore its result } end.
Dispose (PointerVar: Pointer);
or
Dispose (PointerVar: Pointer; tag_field_values);
or
Dispose (ObjectPointerVar: Pointer; destructor_call);
`Dispose' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by most known Pascal variants, but not by UCSD Pascal. Its use for objects is a Borland Pascal extension.
operator div (p, q: Integer) = r: Integer;
Integer division operator.
`div' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program DivDemo;
var
a, b: Integer;
begin
a := 16;
b := 7;
WriteLn (a div b); { `2' }
end.
for ... do
statement
or
while ... do
statement
or
with ... do
statement
or
to begin do
statement
or
to end do
statement
The `do' reserved word is used in combination with other Pascal keywords in many ways. For description and examples see the relevant reference sections: `for', `while', `with', `to begin', `to end'.
`do' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
See references.
Keywords, for, while, with, to begin do, to end do.
type
Double = Real;
`Double' is a synonym for the `Real' data type and supported for compatibility with other compilers.
`Double' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program DoubleDemo;
var
A: Double; { There is nothing special with `Double'. }
B: Real;
begin
A := Pi;
A := B
end.
for variable := value1 downto value2 do
statement
The `downto' reserved word is used in combination with `for' to build a `for' loop.
`downto' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program DowntoDemo; var i: Integer; begin for i := 10 downto 1 do WriteLn (i) end.
As part of the if ... then ... else statement:
if Boolean_expression then
statement1
else
statement2
or, as part of the case ... else statement:
case expression of
selector: statement;
...
selector: statement
else { ``otherwise'' instead of ``else'' is allowed }
statement;
...
statement
end
`else' is part of the `if ... then ... else'
statement which provides a possibility to execute statements
alternatively. In the case statement, `else' starts a
series of statements which is executed if no selector fit in
expression. In this situation, `else' is a synonym for
otherwise.
`else' in `if' statements is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. `else' in `case' statements is a Borland Pascal extension; ISO 10206 Extended Pascal has `otherwise' instead.
program ElseDemo;
var
i: Integer;
begin
Write ('Enter a number: ');
ReadLn (i);
if i > 42 then
WriteLn ('The number is greater than 42')
else
WriteLn ('The number is not greater than 42')
end.
Keywords, if, case, otherwise.
function Empty (var F: any_file): Boolean;
`Empty' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
begin
statement;
statement;
...
statement
end
The reserved word `end' closes a `begin' ... `end'; statement which joins several statements together into one compound statement.
@@ end of a `case' statement @@ end of a record or object declaration @@ part of a `to end do' module destructor
`end' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program EndDemo;
begin
if True then
WriteLn ('single statement');
if True then
begin { clamp statement1 ... }
WriteLn ('statement1');
WriteLn ('statement2')
end { ... to statement2 }
end.
Keywords, begin end Compound Statement, begin
function EOF ([var F: any_file]): Boolean;
or
function EOF: Boolean;
`EOF' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function EOLn ([var F: Text]): Boolean;
or
function EOLn: Boolean;
`EOLn' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
`EpsReal' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function EQ (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
`EQ' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function EQPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
`EQPad' is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Erase (var F: any_file);
`Erase' is a Borland Pascal extension.
`except' is a Borland Delphi extension.
Exclude (set_variable, ordinal_value);
Remove (subtract) a single element from a set. ordinal_value must be compatible with the base type of set_variable. Exclude is equivalent to:
set_variable := set_variable - [ordinal_value];
If set_variable does not contain ordinal_value, nothing happens.
`Exclude' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ExcludeDemo;
var
Ch: Char;
MyCharSet: set of Char;
begin
MyCharSet := ['P', 'N', 'L'];
Exclude (MyCharSet , 'N') { L, P }
end.
See other examples in set and Set Operations.
Keywords, Set Operations, set, in, Include.
procedure Exit;
or
procedure Exit (program);
or
procedure Exit (Identifier);
`Exit' without an argument leaves the currently executed procedure or function. Note: If `Exit' is called within the main program, it will be terminated instantly.
`Exit' with an argument that is `program' or the name of the current program, terminates the program, and is equivalent to `Halt'.
`Exit' with an argument that is the name of the current or an encompassing routine leaves that routine.
`Exit' is a UCSD Pascal extension. Borland Pascal only allows it without an argument.
program ExitDemo;
procedure Foo (Bar: Integer);
var
Baz, Fac: Integer;
begin
if Bar < 1 then
Exit; { Exit `Foo' }
Fac := 1;
for Baz := 1 to Bar do
begin
Fac := Fac * Baz;
if Fac >= Bar then
Exit; { Exit `Foo' }
WriteLn (Bar,' is greater than ', Baz, '!, which is equal to ', Fac)
end
end;
begin
Foo (-1);
Foo (789);
Exit; { Terminates program }
Foo (987654321) { This is not executed anymore }
end.
function Exp (x: Real): Real;
or
function Exp (z: Complex): Complex;
The exponential function `Exp' computes the value of e to the power of x, where the Euler number e = Exp (1) is the base of the natural logarithm.
The function `Exp' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal; its application to complex values is defined in ISO 10206 Extended Pascal.
program ExpDemo;
var
z: Complex;
begin
z := Cmplx (1, - 2 * Pi); { z = 1 - 2 pi i }
z := Exp (z); { yields e = Exp (1), since Exp ix = Cos x + i Sin x }
WriteLn (Ln (Re (z)) : 0 : 5) { prints 1 = Ln (Exp (1)) }
end.
export `interface_name' = (identifier, identifier, ...);
or
export `interface_name' = all;
Interface export for Extended Pascal modules.
`all' means to automatically export all identifiers declared in the interface module.
`export' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension. It also exists in Borland Pascal, but with a different meaning, not (yet) supported by GPC.
`export all' is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ExportDemo;
import AllInterface in 'somemodule.pas';
begin
Bar (a);
WriteLn (b)
end.
module SomeModule interface;
export
SomeInterface = (a);
AllInterface = all; { Same as `AllInterface = (a, b, Bar);' }
var
a, b: Integer;
procedure Bar (i: Integer);
end.
module SomeModule implementation;
procedure Bar (i: Integer);
begin
b := a
end;
to begin do
a := 42;
end.
Library export.
`exports' is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure Extend (var F: any_file; [FileName: String;]
[BlockSize: Cardinal]);
`Extend' opens a file for writing. If the file does not exist, it is created. If it does exist, the file pointer is positioned after the last element.
Like `Rewrite', `Reset' and `Append' do, `Reset' accepts an optional second parameter for the name of the file in the filesystem and a third parameter for the block size of the file. The third parameter is allowed only (and by default also required) for untyped files. For details, see Rewrite.
`Extend' is an ISO 10206 Extended extension. Borland Pascal has Append instead. The `BlockSize' parameter is a Borland Pascal extension. The `FileName' parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
program ExtendDemo;
var
Sample: Text;
begin
Assign (Sample, 'sample.txt');
Rewrite (Sample);
WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello, World!'); { `sample.txt' now has one line }
Close (Sample);
{ ... }
Extend (Sample);
WriteLn (Sample, 'Hello again!'); { `sample.txt' now has two lines }
Close (Sample)
end.
Assign, Reset, Rewrite, Update, Append.
type
Extended = LongReal;
`Extended' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program ExtendedDemo;
var
a: Extended;
begin
a := 42;
WriteLn (a)
end.
declaration external;
or
declaration external name linker_name;
Declaration of external object.
`external' is a UCSD Pascal extension.
`Fail' is a Borland Pascal extension.
type
Boolean = (False, True); { built-in type }
`False' is one of the two Boolean values and is used to represent a condition which is never fullfilled. For example, the expression, `1 = 2' always yields `False'. It is the opposite of `True'. `False' has the ordinal value 0.
`False' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program FalseDemo;
var
a: Boolean;
begin
a := 1 = 2; { yields False }
WriteLn (Ord (False)); { 0 }
WriteLn (a); { False }
if False then WriteLn ('This is not executed.')
end.
Boolean (Intrinsic), True, Boolean.
The `far' directive can be appended to a procedure or function heading but is ignored by GPC. It is there for Borland compatibility, only. (Since the GNU compilers provide a flat memory model, the distinction between `near' and `far' pointers is void.)
`far' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program FarDemo;
var
p: procedure;
{$W no-near-far} { Don't warn about the uselessness of `far' }
procedure Foo; far; { `far' has no effect in GPC }
begin
WriteLn ('Foo')
end;
begin
p := Foo; { Would also work without `far' in GPC. }
p
end.
In type definitions:
file of Type
or
file
Non-text file type declaration.
Typed files (`file of Type') are defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. Untyped files (`file') are a Borland Pascal extension.
function FilePos (var F: any_file): Integer;
`FilePos' is a Borland Pascal extension.
function FileSize (var F: any_file): Integer;
`FileSize' is a Borland Pascal extension.
procedure FillChar (var Dest; Count: SizeType; Val: Char);
or
procedure FillChar (var Dest; Count: SizeType; Val: Byte);
`FillChar' is a UCSD Pascal extension.
Unit finalization.
It is equivalent to Extended Pascal's `to end do'.
`finalization' is a Borland Delphi extension.
Keywords, initialization, to end do.
procedure Finalize (var Aynthing);
`Finalize' does all necessary clean-ups for the parameter. This is normally done automatically when a variable goes out of scope, so you need to call `Finalize' only in special situations, e.g. when you deallocate a dynamic variable with `FreeMem' rather than `Dispose'.
Using a variable after applying `Finalize' to it (and without applying `Initialize' to it again) is invalid and produces undefined results.
`Finalize' is a Borland Delphi extension.
`finally' is a Borland Delphi extension.
procedure Flush (var F: any_file);
`Flush' is a Borland Pascal extension.
For ordinal index variables:
for ordinal_variable := initial_value to final_value do
statement
or
for ordinal_variable := initial_value downto final_value do
statement
For sets:
for set_element_type_variable in some_set do
statement
For pointer index variables:
for pointer_variable := initial_address to final_address do
statement
or
for pointer_variable := initial_address downto final_address do
statement
@@ Set member iteration
The `for' statement is a count loop. For further information see for Statement.
`for' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants. Iteration of Pointers is a Borland Pascal extension. Set member iteration is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ForDemo;
var
CharSet: set of Char;
c: Char;
n: Integer;
Fac: array [0 .. 10] of Integer;
PInt: ^Integer;
begin
CharSet := ['g', 'p', 'c'];
for c in CharSet do
WriteLn (c); { prints `c', `g', `p' in three lines }
Fac[0] := 1;
for n := 1 to 10 do { computes the factorial of n for n = 0 .. 10 }
Fac[n] := Fac[n - 1] * n;
{$X+}
{ prints n! for n = 0 .. 10 }
for PInt := @Fac[0] to @Fac[10] do
WriteLn (PInt - @Fac[0], '! = ', PInt^)
end.
Keywords, Set Types, Pointer Arithmetics
`FormatString' is a GNU Pascal extension.
Declaration of a routine whose definition follows below.
`forward' is a UCSD Pascal extension.
function Frac (x: Real): Real;
`Frac' returns the fractional part of a floating point number.
`Frac' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program FracDemo;
begin
WriteLn (Frac (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 0.34500 }
WriteLn (Int (12.345) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 }
WriteLn (Round (12.345) : 1); { 12 }
WriteLn (Trunc (12.345) : 1); { 12 }
WriteLn (Frac (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -0.34500 }
WriteLn (Int (-12.345) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 }
WriteLn (Round (-12.345) : 1); { -12 }
WriteLn (Trunc (-12.345) : 1); { -12 }
WriteLn (Frac (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 0.54300 }
WriteLn (Int (12.543) : 1 : 5); { 12.00000 }
WriteLn (Round (12.543) : 1); { 13 }
WriteLn (Trunc (12.543) : 1); { 12 }
WriteLn (Frac (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -0.54300 }
WriteLn (Int (-12.543) : 1 : 5); { -12.00000 }
WriteLn (Round (-12.543) : 1); { -13 }
WriteLn (Trunc (-12.543) : 1); { -12 }
end.
Real Types, Real, Int, Round, Trunc.
`FrameAddress' is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure FreeMem (var p: Pointer; Size: Cardinal);
or
procedure FreeMem (var p: Pointer);
Releases a chunk of memory previously allocated using `GetMem'. The parameter Size is optional. Its value is currently ignored.
Since Extended Pascal's schemata provide a cleaner way to implement dynamical arrays and such, we recommend using `GetMem' and `FreeMem' only for low-level applications or for interfacing with other languages.
`FreeMem' is a Borland Pascal extension. `FreeMem' with only one parameter is a GNU Pascal extension.
See GetMem.
GetMem, Schema Types, Dispose, Mark, Release.
Function declaration.
`function' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function GE (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
`GE' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function GEPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
`GEPad' is a GNU Pascal extension.
procedure Get (var F: typed_file);
`Get' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants except UCSD/Borland Pascal and its variants.
procedure GetMem (var p: Pointeger; Size: Cardinal);
Allocates dynamical storage on the heap and returns a pointer to it in `p'.
Since Extended Pascal's schemata provide a cleaner way to implement dynamical arrays and such, we recommend using `GetMem' and `FreeMem' only for low-level applications.
`GetMem' is a Borland Pascal extension.
The Borland-comatibility unit `Graph' from the BPcompat package supports a `GetImage' and a `PutImage' procedure which need a variable of size `ImageSize' as a buffer. Since these are “black box” routines, the buffer can't reasonably be a schema providing a dynamical array. Instead, we have to use `GetMem' and `FreeMem' for dynamical memory allocation.
program GetMemDemo;
var
Buffer: Pointer;
Size: Cardinal;
begin
Size := Random (10000); { the size can be determined at run time }
GetMem (Buffer, Size);
{ Do something with Buffer }
FreeMem (Buffer) { or: FreeMem (Buffer, Size) }
end.
procedure GetTimeStamp (var T: TimeStamp);
GetTimeStamp gets the current local date and time as a
TimeStamp record containing the Year, Month, Day, Hour,
Minute, Second, and so on.
`GetTimeStamp' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
Set TimeStamp.
TimeStamp, Date, Time, Date And Time Routines.
goto label
The `goto' statement transfers control to statement with the label `label'.
`goto' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
function GT (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
`GT' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
function GTPad (S1, S2: String): Boolean;
`GTPad' is a GNU Pascal extension.
Halt;
or
Halt (ExitCode: Integer);
`Halt' terminates the program with exitcode 0. If `ExitCode', is specified, it is returned by `Halt' on exit.
`Halt' is an Extended Pascal and a UCSD Pascal extension.
program HaltDemo;
begin
WriteLn ('This string will always be this program''s output.');
Halt; { Terminate right here and right now. }
WriteLn ('And this string won''t ever!')
end.
Break, Continue, Exit, Return, goto.
function High (ordinal_type_or_variable): ordinal_type;
or
function High (array_type_or_variable): array_index_type;
or
function High (string_variable): Integer;
For ordinal types or variables of that type, `High' returns the highest value a variable of that type can assume.
For array types or variables of that type, `High' returns the highest index a variable of that type can assume. Note: the result is of the same type as the array index is. If the array has more than one dimension, `High' returns the highest index in the first dimension.
If the argument is a string variable, `High' returns the discriminant of the string type (i.e. its capacity).
`High' is a Borland Pascal extension.
program HighDemo;
type
Colors = (Red, Green, Blue);
var
Col: array [Colors] of (Love, Hope, Faithfulness);
Foo: Colors;
Bar: Integer;
Baz: String (123);
begin
Foo := High (Col); { yields Blue }
Bar := Ord (High (Col[Foo])); { yields Ord (Faithfulness), i.e., 2 }
Bar := High (Integer); { highest possible value of `Integer' }
Bar := High (Baz) { returns 123 }
end.
if Boolean_expression then
statement
or with an alternative statement:
if Boolean_expression then
statement1
else
statement2
The `if ... then' statement executes statement1 depending on `Boolean expression' being true. If `else' is specified, it continues executing statement2 instead.
`if' is defined in ISO 7185 Pascal and supported by all known Pascal variants.
program IfDemo;
var
Foo, Bar: Boolean;
begin
Foo := True;
Bar := False;
if ((1 = 1) or (2 = 3)) and (Foo = not Bar) then
begin
{ This is executed if either Foo is true but not Bar or vice versa }
WriteLn ('Either Foo or Bar is true.');
if Bar then
WriteLn ('You will see this text if Bar is true.')
end
else { This whole `else' branch is not executed }
if 1 = 1 then
if True = False then
WriteLn ('This text is never written on screen.')
else { Note: This ``else'' belongs to ``if True = False'' }
WriteLn ('This text is never written on screen as well.')
else { Note: This ``else'' belongs to ``if 1 = 1'' }
WriteLn ('Nor is this.')
end.
Keywords, if Statement, else, then
function Im (z: Complex): Real;
`Im' extracts the imaginary part of the complex number `z'. The result is a real value.
`Im' is an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
program ImDemo;
var
z: Complex;
begin
z := Cmplx (1, 2); { 1 + i * 2 }
WriteLn (Im (z) : 0 : 5) { 2.00000 }
end.
Module or unit implementation part.
`implementation' is an Extended Pascal and a UCSD Pascal extension.
program @@fragment foo;
import
bar1;
bar3 (baz1 => glork1) in 'baz.pas';
bar2 only (baz2, baz3 => glork2);
bar4 qualified;
[...]
In module:
module @@fragment Bar;
import
bar1;
bar3 (baz1 => glork1) in 'baz.pas';
bar2 only (baz2, baz3 => glork2);
bar4 qualified;
[...]
The reserved word `import' in the import part of a program makes the program import an interface.
The `in' above tells GPC to look for the module in the specified file; otherwise the file name is derived from the name of the interface by adding first .p, then .pas – which only works if the name of the exported interface coincides with the file name.
The symbol `=>' denotes import renaming: The entity which is exported under the name `baz1' by the interface `bar3' will be known under the new name `glork1' in the program.
The `only' qualifier means that only the listed identifiers will be imported from the interface. Renaming works together with `only', too.
The `qualified' qualifier means “qualified import”: The imported identifiers will be accessible only trough a “qualified name”. The entity which is exported under the name `baz2' by the interface `bar4' will be accessible as `bar4.baz2'.
There must be at most one import part at the begining of a block. Each module or function/procedure (and also main program) can have its own import part. A single import part can import arbitrarly many interfaces.
The interfaces needn't be exported by Extended Pascal modules but may be UCSD/Borland Pascal units as well. GPC also allows `import' parts in units.
`import' and modules in general are an ISO 10206 Extended Pascal extension.
As part of the set membership test, as a boolean expression:
ordinal_value in set_expression
or, as part of a `for' loop iterating through a set:
for ordinal_variable in set_expression do ...
When `in' is used as a membership test, it acts as a binary operator taking ordinal_value as its left parameter and set_expression as its right parameter and returning a boolean result which is true if set_expression contains the element ordinal_value.
When `in' is used as part of a `for' loop, it iterates ordinal_variable over the elements contained in set_expression, that is every <